#Hwarang x reader | Explore Tumblr posts and blogs

lovrehani · 2 months ago

Text

a must read!

Loved the author's writing style, how it brings the historical settings to life and immerses the reader to the sights and sounds of Silla. The pacing was well-structured; balancing quieter, reflective moments to intense action. It is the very first chapter but I find myself deeply invested in the story and how it flows around all the characters.

spoilers below

Jisoo, is someone I'm really curious about, where he stands in the power dynamics and what exactly his ideologises are.

Where has father heo been hiding (or is he dead?) and what exactly was his role in the main city?

Does the reader have some special powers? as it was mentioned that she healed faster than most.

Is the heirloom blade of more importance than it seems?

I'm SO excited to get answers to these questions in the next parts!!!!! Keep up the excellent work author, rooting for this series 🤍

𝔥𝔴𝔞𝔯𝔞𝔫𝔤 - 𝔩𝔧𝔥 || 𝔭𝔞𝔯𝔱 𝔦

taglist: @hipsdofangirl

𝔭𝔯𝔬𝔩𝔬𝔤𝔲𝔢 || 𝔭𝔞𝔯𝔱 𝔦𝔦

𝔍𝔞𝔫𝔲𝔞𝔯𝔶 17𝔱𝔥, 661 – 𝔖𝔥𝔬𝔰𝔥𝔦𝔫 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 The cold, gray sky of winter greets you with its hollow breath as you swing the door to your room open, any heat that has accumulated overnight swiftly dissipating as swaths of blustery air invade the space. From the looks of it, thick, gray clouds had begun to accumulate over the city outside the walls of the Hwarang’s compound, forecasting at least a light blanket of snow in the coming hours. You’d have to make sure that the fires from the kitchen aren’t low so that the ondol keeps warm under the building’s floors.

Before you move to exit the room, you reach to grab a jacket from your handful of things, sighing as you catch sight of a piece of paper hidden under your coat. It’s the letter that had brought you here in the first place. Nearly two weeks have passed since your arrival at the Hwarang’s headquarters, the same frigidity that had met you on your first meeting was still ingrained into them, the same distrust, no doubt, but it isn’t as if you can leave.

A frown as you look down at your clothes after shrugging the jacket onto your shoulders. Instead of your father’s clothes that you’d arrived in, they’d given you robes of their own. Not the blues of their commanders or warriors, but the deep green of their lesser ranks; of the pageboys, cooks, and less desirable positions within their numbers. They were and are foreign to you, you’d much rather wear the clothes that feel more familiar, even if they are men’s. But you aren’t meant to raise suspicion, just keep your head low until they find out more information of your father’s whereabouts. A female hiding out in the Hwarang’s headquarters would raise suspicion, start rumors, and with how much they hold themselves to a gold standard, it would be irreparable to their reputation.

Jihoon, the Hwarang’s commander, had given you strict instructions to keep up the facade as a male. Saying that, while it would be harmful to their reputation if the word got out, it would also be a beacon for those looking for your father, or perhaps even you. Only those that you’d met on the first day, as well as a handful of others within their leadership, know of your true identity.

As you move your hands away from the hem of your jacket, your fingers brush against the blade that Jihoon had given back to you the day you’d arrived. It’d been somewhat ceremonial in your household, not a thing of use as there was no need for it. Your father had claimed it to be an heirloom kept in the family since the birth of Silla as a kingdom. You aren’t sure of the validity of that statement though, as the metal isn’t tinged with rust, it looks newly forged at times.

Regardless of the validity of the blade, your father made you take several lessons with your town’s local head guard, who’d only taught a girl because her father was a well-known physician. Also, because your father could treat any injury you sustained while practicing, which wasn’t ever needed as any scrapes or scratches you obtained healed fairly quickly. When you were little you didn’t think much of it. Yet as you grew older you realized that you healed faster than most. Your father said it must’ve been a gift from the Heavens but urged you not to tell anyone about it. And you hadn’t, fearing that those around you would treat you like a witch or a monster if they were to find out.

Swordplay was never something you took much interest in, seeing that you’d probably never put the techniques you’d learned to use. Besides, you aren’t a bloodthirsty fiend looking for a chance to use it anyway, you’d rather help people than hurt them.

You’re pulled from your thoughts for a brief moment as a wang-do, one of the common Hwarang soldiers, passes by your room. They lock eyes with you for a moment, a scowl sneering onto their lips before they break their gaze and continue to stride past. Private rooms were only given to personnel of a higher rank within the Hwarang, and seeing how you are a newcomer, you can somewhat understand the resentment some of them have with your staying not in the typical quarters of those of your rank.

With more guilt than not as you accept the hospitality of the Hwarang, you try to help out as much as you can, despite the wishes of the commander. To the average wang-do, it probably seems as if you’re receiving special treatment from the captains. Despite the actuality of them keeping watch over you to make sure you wouldn’t spew their secrets; it would be confusing, aggravating even, from an outsider’s perspective. But, even if you were allowed free reign of the headquarters, it’s not as if you could speak to any of them, most were nobles from families of high wealth. And your father isn’t poor by any means, but the wealth disparity between the nobles of the capital and nobles of the countryside is nothing to scoff at.

So, you remain alone, for the time being, finding that the best way to not draw attention to yourself is to become practically invisible. Maybe if Jihoon allowed you to go out and search for your father you would find yourself more useful, but he’d just left for Hanseong a few days prior. Seeing as the man in charge of your stay here isn’t available, maybe your best bet would be to stay in your room until something of note happened, despite how aggravatingly boring it is.

The room is practically empty, only a bed, a small chest of drawers and a writing desk to keep you company. It reminds you of when your father would leave for his patient visits, disappearing for days at a time and leaving you alone at home. Although it isn’t the same, those visits had the promise of return. Waiting for someone you knew would come back and waiting for the unknown are vastly different things.

As your reflections manifest into exasperated sighs, you barely notice the sound of approaching footsteps heading towards your room.

“There you are!” Youngmin, the head of the Hwarang, exclaims once he catches sight of you. “I’ve been looking everywhere for you; I didn’t think you’d be in here!” He beams at you for a moment before stepping into the room with a tray in his hands.

“Oh, I’m… sorry?” you apologize as he sets down the tray onto the writing desk nestled into the corner of the room.

“Ah… wait… This is your room?” He questions as he straightens up, looking around at the interior for a moment.

“It is,” you nod, wondering what he’s thinking about.

“Then I just barged into a woman’s room without even announcing myself!” He looks flustered, his cheeks turning a tinge pink as he realizes his mistake and takes a few steps out of the room.

“It’s alright,” you try to assure him, “After all, it’s not like there’s anything here that I wouldn’t want you to see.”

“Hmm,” he sighs, trying to compose himself, “I thought since we’d assigned you to be Jihoon’s page your room would be next to his…” It seems as if Jihoon had neglected to inform Youngmin that you hadn’t actually been made a page. That isn’t in the least bit surprising with how coldly the commander had been treating you.

“I’m not fully equipped to entertain guests, but you’re welcome to come in if you’d like,” you offer, motioning for him to come back inside the room.

“You don’t need to worry,” he waves his hand as if to brush off the thought, “And, if I may, I’ll take you up on your offer.” Youngmin then steps back into the room, and as if he notices your hesitant demeanor, he speaks up once more, “And please don’t feel nervous around me, as long as you’re here you’re a guest of the Hwarang.”

You offer him a small smile before looking down to the tray he’d carried in. A look of shock comes over your face as you realize what he’d brought, “This is—!”

Youngmin chuckles lightly, “I take it you’re a fan of sweets then? Jihoon’s adoptive mother likes to send them to us every once in a while, and hardly anyone touches them.” Several assorted hangwa lay on the dish, their colors vibrant against the gray gloom of the light shining in from outside, next to a steaming cup of tea. “Go ahead and have some, if you’d like.”

“Thank you very much,” you nod and make your way over to gingerly pick up one of the confections. You look at the pink treat for a moment before taking a bite out of it, savoring the sweetness of it before turning back to Youngmin, “It’s delicious.” Snacks like this were only limited to holidays or festivals back home, it’s shocking to hear that Jihoon’s mother had sent such a thing on a whim.

“I’m glad you like them,” he smiles. Something about Youngmin’s presence holds an aura of warmth, that makes you feel more relaxed than you had been with any other member of the Hwarang since your arrival. “Ah, I’ve also heard you haven’t been able to go outside?”

A nod, “That’s right. But if that’s what’s needed for me to stay here, I wouldn’t want to cause any unnecessary trouble by going out.”

He looks almost sympathetic as he parts his lips once more, “I see… I’m glad you understand. I know that Jihoon can seem a little intimidating at first but he’s a truly caring man.”

To see the man who’d kept you in relative solitude for a few weeks as a caring person didn’t seem fully right… But Youngmin knows him much better than you do.

“He may be a little strict with you, but only because he’s trying to do what’s in your best interest.” Youngmin sighs, a telling sign that maybe he hadn’t agreed with everything Jihoon had done before. “I’ll speak to him once he gets back, I know this must be hellish for you, but I can only ask you to hang in for a bit longer.”

“Alright,” you nod, “Thank you.” Even if Youngmin’s visit hadn’t done much to change your living arrangement, it had lightened your mood ever so slightly.

After Youngmin had departed and you’d been left to sulk in your room for a while, you notice that the sun was slowly sinking into the sky. The clouds of earlier in the day had parted to let the golden light shine onto the headquarters as the sun made its descent into the horizon. It feels as if time itself has stopped, the sun hanging in the same place for an unimaginably long time.

All this time in solitude is doing a number on both your mental and emotional state. Any hope of getting out of your isolation seems to slip with each passing moment you spend alone. You had come to the capital to find your father, not get swept up into a world where your life lay on the line should you slip up and say something you shouldn’t.

Even if they were showing you more hospitality than you could’ve asked for, you know that you can’t trust the Hwarang completely.

“They can’t all be that bad… right?” you mutter to yourself as you sit at the small drawing table, flipping through the letters you’d brought with you.

“Has anyone ever called you ‘gullible’, before?” A voice behind you causing you to jump and turn to see who’d spoken.

Your gaze hardens as you see Boo Seungkwan standing in your doorway, arms crossed with a small frown painted on his lips. “What are you doing here?” Asking as you push yourself to your feet, brushing off your pant legs before facing him fully.

“You didn’t notice me? It’s my turn to keep watch over you,” he sighs, “You talk to yourself a lot, don’t you?”

Had you really been thinking aloud earlier? You bite your lip and try to mentally remind yourself to never do that again as you’d never know who could be listening in on you here. Before you can retort, Hansol steps in from the hallway.

“I think that’s enough picking on her, Seungkwan.” He frowns at the other.

“Did you hear me too?” You question, somewhat embarrassed about how this was playing out.

“I only just arrived,” he shakes his head in the negative. “I came to tell you that dinner is ready but,” Hansol’s eyes narrow ever so slightly at you, noticing how incrementally flustered you’re getting, “have I interrupted something?”

“Nothing at all!” You insist, trying to calm yourself.

“I was going to let the two of you continue to speak, but if I had left you two alone, I knew that he’d probably try and get you out of sorts again,” Hansol notes somewhat stoically, probably thinking to the times where he’d been in the exact same situation. His shoulders shrug before the sound of more approaching footsteps reaches you.

Soonyoung rushes into the room with loud, heavy stomps. His eyes are somewhat frantic, his voice somewhat annoyed as he speaks, “Hey! It’s dinnertime and I’m absolutely starving.”

“Sorry about that, I’ll be there soon,” Hansol apologizes to the younger.

Soonyoung then looks to you, “You too, hurry up or Junhui’s gonna eat all of the food again.”

“Sorry Captain Kwon, I’ll be there as soon as I can.” You say as he begins to turn on his heels to leave before stopping himself.

His lips purse together before he looks back at you, “Look… can you drop the ‘Captain Kwon’ thing? Just call me Soonyoung, everyone else here does.”

“Are you sure about that?” You question with an inquisitive tilt of your head.

“Why not? We’re practically the same age, aren’t we? And we don’t need honorifics either, I’m not one of those uptight nobles.” He frowns slightly.

“Alright then… Soonyoung.”

“That’s more like it,” he grins, “Now let’s go.”

The walk to the dining area is more familiar than any other route you’d taken thus far during your stay with the Hwarang. Meals are the only time of day that you really are able to leave your room and have company, even if that company was the other captains of the Hwarang.

“You’re lateee,” a whine from Wen Junhui as he sits in front of his meal, the lids still atop the dishes so as to not let the steam out. “Who’s responsible for this? My stomach’s crying and I think my soup’s already gone cold,” he frowns as everyone finishes filing into the hall.

“You mean ‘growling’,” Soonyoung snickers as he moves to take his seat next to Junhui, you move to sit on the other side of Junhui, next to Mingyu. “Sometimes it’s really easy to tell that you’re not from here.”

“That doesn’t even matter, you should all apologize to my stomach,” the taller’s hands fly to his abdomen as the remaining captains take their seats, “it’s been desperate for food since this morning’s practice routines.”

A small ‘tch’ from Mingyu as he rolls his eyes at the two, “A commoner correcting a noble, I never thought I’d see the day.” There’s a tinge of sarcasm to his voice as he speaks, the tone disappearing as he pipes up once more, “Alright, now that everyone’s here we can eat.”

There’s general chatter amongst the captains as they start to uncover their dishes and begin to dig into their meals. You sit and eat in relative silence until Junhui’s voice begins to raise on your right.

“There’s hardly enough here to feed a kid, let alone a guy like me,” you turn your head and watch his gaze trail down to Soonyoung’s tray to his right, “I guess I’ll have to take yours…” His now empty hands make a grab for the bowl of rice situated atop Soonyoung’s tray. “Survival of the—”

“Survival of the fittest my ass, Junhui,” the other retorts, sticking out his elbow and hitting the other square in the chest. There’s a hollow thud reverberating around Wen’s ribcage, it sounds painful, but he doesn’t look phased at all. But it did stop him from trying to snatch Soonyoung’s meal. “Why’re you always stealing my food?”

Junhui laughs, you hear Mingyu also let out a small chuckle to your left. “It’s because of the size difference, Soonyoung. I’ve got the bigger body; therefore I need more food.”

“No way, I’ve gotta eat too!” Soonyoung protests, his elbow still locked in place trying to hold the other back.

“You’d think they’d be more civil around a woman,” Mingyu, at the tailend of his laughter, notes about the two, “but they’re always like this.”

“I think I’ve gotten used to it by now,” you respond, setting down the cup of tea you’d been drinking before looking at Hansol, who’s gaze seems to have drifted across the room to the bickering pair.

“How we’ve managed so long without them killing one another is beyond me,” he says before eating a spoonful of the soup in front of him. “Are you not eating?” Hansol questions Seungkwan, who sits next to him. The latter sits reclined back in his seat, seemingly watching the entertainment in front of him instead of touching his food.

“I’m alright. If I eat too much in one sitting I get slow.” He nods, reaching for his cup.

“What do you mean ‘slow’?” Junhui pokes, gaze shifting from Soonyoung to Seungkwan for a moment and then down to the food on the older’s plates. “But if you’re not going to eat…”

“Go for it,” Seungkwan scoots the tray forward with his elbow, passing it over to Junhui as his hand is still occupied with his cup. “As long as I’ve got makgeolli, I’m alright.”

“Sounds like I’m going with makgeolli too,” Mingyu sighs and passes a few plates from his tray onto yours after noticing that most of your food was already eaten.

“You don’t have to—” you begin to protest before Seungkwan speaks up again.

“Don’t worry about eating too much or being a freeloader,” he says, a weird bubbling of guilt arising in your stomach.

“I understand but I can’t help but feel a little bad…” You state as you look down to the newly acquired plates in front of you.

“If you’re going to let that get to you, you’re never going to get anything you want,” Hansol says pointedly, continuing to eat the mix of soup in front of him.

“A- alright,” you nod, picking up your utensils again and beginning to pick at the newfound food on your tray. Because you never had much contact with others during the daytime, it makes having dinner with the captains something of an entertaining and frightening experience every night. But it’s fun. A small smile curls onto your lips at the thought of some normalcy for a moment when you hear Mingyu speak again.

“You know we’re not going to hurt you, right?” He’d seen your smile, probably seeing it as you begin to relax, and he seeks to soothe your anxieties about them even more so. His own lips have a soft smile of their own, an honesty brimming with it. Maybe they’d all been trying to put you at ease with their antics.

It was troublesome to navigate, you have conflicted feelings about staying with them and taking up their time and resources, but it isn’t as if you have much of a choice. They seemed to realize that too and instead of scorning you for it, were trying to make the best of it.

But before you could ponder on the notion for much longer, Song Eunseok enters the room.

“Captains?” He asks somewhat quietly, but the noise of his arrival had turned all heads towards him. “Do you have a moment?” Voice soft as usual, his eyes teem with a quiet anxiety that you hadn’t ever seen during your brief acquaintance with him. The gaiety that had once erupted in the room comes to a fizz as he begins to speak once more, “I’ve just gotten a letter from Sabi, Seungcheol’s been gravely injured during a skirmish.”

Your brows raise as Seungkwan shouts out, “What the hell happened?!”

“A group of Baekje revivalists were laying siege to the chancellor’s home, Seungcheol and Jihoon arrived in time to subdue them, however, Seungcheol was injured at some point during the fight.”

“Is he going to be alright?” You ask, your hands clenching together, nails digging into the skin.

“According to Jihoon's letter he is gravely hurt, but the wound is on his left arm.” Eunseok’s teeth gnaw at the insides of his cheek for a moment, “It will be hard for him to draw an arrow or wield a blade but it’s almost certain that he will survive this.”

“That’s good,” a sigh of relief leaving you, but the air lies tense from the other captains as they await more answers regarding their comrade’s status.

“Seungcheol should be returning in a few days,” Eunseok nods, a solemn tone to his voice, “I’ll go and talk with Kwak some more regarding the situation, if anything else arises I’ll let you know.” He was already halfway out the door by the time he finished speaking, talking over his shoulder in a bated anxiety to rival that of the rest of the room.

“An injury so bad he can’t hold a bow or sword?” Hansol almost thinks aloud, “He may have severed an artery. He may never carry a blade again if that’s true…” You now begin to understand the severity of the situation, why the air grew heavy and the voices grew low. “If he were to fight one handed against an opponent of similar skill he would almost certainly lose.”

“... If push comes to shove he’ll have to take it. Seungcheol’s not just going to give up like that,” Seungkwan frowns, the cup in his hand settling down onto the table in front of him with a small clink before his hands fall into his lap.

“Don’t say that, Boo,” Junhui’s face mirrors an equal grimace to that of the elder’s. “It’ll look bad if captains start joining the Furies.”

“... Who?” You question, trying to follow their conversation as best you could but finding yourself lost as they begin to speak of things unknown to you. “The Furies?”

“Furies,” Soonyoung begins, “They come from something you drink where any injury can be cur—”

“Soonyoung!” Before you know it, Mingyu is on his feet and striding around you to the young captain. The elder captain’s hand reaches down and pulls up the younger by the front of his robes.

“Ah—” Soonyoung’s voice catches in his throat, his eyes go wide as if he’s realized he’d said something that he shouldn’t have.

“You’re overreacting, Kim.” Junhui stands, trying to pry Mingyu’s irontight grasp away from Soonyoung. “It’s my fault anyway, I said something first.” When Mingyu relinquishes Soonyoung’s green robes from his grip, Junhui shoots the younger a sympathetic look, “Sorry.”

“I should’ve watched myself,” Soonyoung sighs, his hands moving to straighten his now wrinkled garment.

Junhui’s gaze then turns to you, his tone becoming sterner, “Everything you just heard is something you should never repeat. I know you’re probably curious, but we can’t say anything else about it, so don’t ask.” The cold weight hiding behind his eyes is enough to make you feel uneasy about what you’d just heard. You’re not even sure what they were talking about, but it seems important enough to stay a secret.

“Those Furies that Soonyoung was talking about are pitiful men,” Seungkwan states as he pushes himself to his feet. His voice held none of the snideness that it normally had, taking on a flatter and emotionless tone. A sate sort of melancholy coming over him, it’s clear he has something on his mind.

“It’s nothing you have to worry about,” Junhui says to you as he breaks the silence, “So don’t try and get worked up about it.”

Seeing as you were only a guest of the Hwarang and not an actual member among their ranks, you can understand their secrets. But it doesn’t make you any less curious.

“Try your best to forget about it,” Hansol warns, not so much to you but to your circumstance, “The more involved you become with our affairs will only put you in more danger.”

The wall built up between you and the captains was almost tangible at this point, not an easy thing to scale or break through.

Dinner ended in relative silence, you excused yourself to your room and hurried back to collect your thoughts. You exhale a large sigh as you enter, your mind hopping from the fate of the Hwarang’s colonel to what the Furies were. It reminds you of the rakshasa from the Buddhist texts your father had made you read as a young girl. The phrases ‘something you drink’ and ‘becoming a Fury’ bounce around your skull before you stop yourself. Hansol had asked you to forget, but it feels as if him saying that only makes you want to remember.

For whatever reason, the Hwarang captains were keeping hush about whatever ordeal was occurring. Was it to protect you? Regardless, sticking your nose into their business would only be detrimental to your stay with them.

With that in mind you try to clear your head as best you can before slipping into bed and trying to drift off to sleep.

𝔐𝔞𝔯𝔠𝔥 3𝔯𝔡, 661 – 𝔖𝔥𝔬𝔰𝔥𝔦𝔫 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 It’s been a little over two months since you’d joined the Hwarang at the headquarters in Seorabeol. Jihoon and Seungcheol had returned from their expedition to Sabi, but morale among the men was low. For a while after their return, due to Seungcheol’s injury, a few operations within the organization became hectic due to his absence. The wounds he’d acquired were grim, draining most of the goodness in his nature before your very eyes. He’d spend days locked away in his room, the silence deafening to those who would venture in and try to speak to him.

On the rare occasion that he did leave his room, his temper lay short before he’d barricade himself away in his abode once more. The Hwarang had offered to let him return to his family for recovery’s sake, but he insisted that his duty remain with his compatriots, despite his abysmal attitude.

Even though you too were holed up away inside of your room, the ways in which the two of you coped with the ordeal were vastly different. Seungcheol was trapped within himself, fallen from whatever pedestal he thought was his to a mere memory of what once was. You, on the other hand, were merely looking for ways to help your hosts.

In doing so, you now find yourself wandering the halls of the Hwarang’s main building looking for Lee Jihoon, who hopefully has an assignment for you to complete. Much in fashion for the commander, he was nowhere to be seen. You debate on whether it would be impolite to go to his room directly when an unknown soldier walks up to you.

Their face is unfamiliar to you and they aren’t wearing the blue robes associated with the Hwarang on patrol. There is a chance you’d never seen them before, but by the way they are looking at you, you can surmise that that isn’t the case.

“You… wouldn’t have happened to have seen Commander Lee… would you?” You ask as they approach, their gait long and almost prideful.

“And who are you?” They question, looking you over with scathing eyes as if to detect your character, “Mind telling me what you’re doing here?”

“Oh well… it’s a long story,” you mumble out, noticing their gaze sharpening on you.

“Don’t make me repeat myself!” Their voice raises, the sternness only growing, “Answer me!”

Fumbling out your words, you introduce yourself quickly.

“Hmm,” he ponders, gaze softening ever so slightly, “I heard that the Commander recently acquired an apprentice warrior as a new page, it must be you.”

“I am,” you respond with faux cocksureness, not realizing that the men had referred to you as an apprentice warrior under the Hwarang.

“Why don’t you enlighten me on how you came to know the Chief and Commander?” The man’s scrutinizing gaze continues as you straighten your posture, shifting your weight from foot to foot. “I heard you’re from Toehwa-hyeon, but how were you able to squeeze your way in here?”

“I didn’t ‘squeeze my way in here’,” you retort, not liking how this man was addressing you.

“Judging by how defensive you’re being, it sounds as if I’ve gotten it right.” He almost scoffs at you in disbelief, “This isn’t some place for a common boy without any worth in his duties or on the battlefield to walk in without earning it. I’ll ask you one last time: how did you come to know the Chief and Commander?”

You stay silent, unsure of how to address him or what answer would be the right one. Yet, before you can begin to formulate a response, he steps forward and grabs the sleeve of your robes, “I, Suh Kangjoon, am asking you a question.” With the way he states his own name, it’s as if he’s trying to signal himself as someone of importance, but you’d never heard the other captains speak of him before. “What makes you think you can ignore me?” Rather than have a calm air as he asked, his tone had almost shifted to that of a petulant child.

“What the hell do you think you’re doing?” A voice barks off to the side, coming from one of the hall’s entranceways. Both Kangjoon and you turn to see Jihoon standing in the doorway, an almost scowl painting his lips as he watches the scene before him. Once Kangjoon had realized it was him, his hand falls away from clutching at your robes and returns to his side.

“Very well, Commander,” he wets his lips as Jihoon approaches before clearing his throat and speaking once again. “I’m here on business with Gukseon Kwak.��

“Is that right?” Jihoon’s voice is tipped with a poisonous edge, as if he didn’t fully trust the character in front of you. “He failed to mention that to me.”

“He wrote to me with special orders to aid him while Colonel Choi is out of commission,” he begins, “I have the letter if you’d like to read it.”

“That’s quite alright,” Jihoon waves him off, “but I think it’d be in your interest to know that Kwak is out on training runs with Kwon’s squadron today.”

“Then I suppose I’ll have to come back at a later date,” the air of faux civility between the two was nearly palpable, Jihoon doing nothing to hide his distaste whereas Kangjoon only looked at him snidely. The newcomer begins to turn on his heels, heading for the exit before his pace slows and leaves the two of you with a few words, “Is it true that you’ve welcomed him as your page, Commander?”

“Yes,” Jihoon nods, glancing at you for a moment before returning to look at the other, “but it’s no concern to you.”

A flash of an uncaring smile, “Forgive me, then. I’ll try not to ask more as it seems to be out of my jurisdiction.” Another step before he stills, “I do, however, question your predisposition toward keeping those from higher ranks close to you,” his eyes widen in faux surprise, “Ah, it seems I’ve forgotten myself, please excuse me.”

Once the stranger has exited the building, only then do you feel a sigh of relief overcome you. But before you have the chance to dwell on it for too long, Jihoon speaks up.

“You shouldn’t be walking around the headquarters without my permission, you know.”

“I understand, Commander, I didn’t mean to cause any trouble,” you begin to apologize.

“Your presence here isn’t known by the other factions of the Hwarang, only those staying here at Shoshin,” He explains, “be mindful of anyone that isn’t a Hwarang from this sect, understood?”

“Understood,” you nod. “But, can I ask who that man was?”

“That man is a captain of the Hanseong Hwarang. His name is Suh Kangjoon.” Jihoon looks as if he’s wracking his brain for an adequate description of the man, “His archery and swordsmanship are decent, but he’s well read and has a knack for military tactics.” His voice lowers a bit for his next statement. “He’s cunning, so be careful.”

“Okay.”

“Regardless of that,” his voice back to a decent volume as his gaze hardens at you, “if you’re not attending to someone then I fully expect you to stay put in your room.” With that, you suppose, he meant to dismiss you back to your quarters as any strict commander should and would have done. Yet, you still have something to ask of him.

“I actually wanted to ask you something, Commander,” you start, trying your best to look him in the eye instead of anywhere else, “Staying in my room alone for so long makes me feel utterly useless. Is there anything I can do around the compound to make me feel less-than-adequate while I stay here?”

“You truly can’t find something productive to do in your room?” Almost as if the sincerity of your prior statement was beginning to make him think, his harsh gaze softens just a bit.

“Not at all,” you shake your head.

A sigh, “Very well, then. I’ll talk with the other captains about it, so, until then just be on standby.” His arms cross, his gaze once again turning stern, “This is under the condition that you are to keep yourself from interacting with anyone that is not a Hwarang of Shoshin Temple, alright?”

“Of course,” you can’t help a small smile curling onto your lips, “But… thank you.”

The two of you part not long after that, and you find the next day via Eunseok that you’re allowed to freely roam the compound now. Albeit you have a few tasks to help out with; cleaning, laundry, and cooking. It isn’t a glamorous job but it is something you’re accustomed to.

𝔍𝔲𝔫𝔢 15𝔱𝔥, 661 - 𝔖𝔢𝔬𝔯𝔞𝔟𝔢𝔬𝔩, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 The air thick with a humidity sweeping in from the coast, the entirety of the Kingdom of Silla lies in mourning after the death of the posthumously named King Taejong Muyeol. With the lauded last year's effort of him uniting both Silla and Baekje, the former kingdom to the west of Silla, hanging over the heads of every citizen, his death felt like a sharp blow to all. For the first few days of the month, the Hwarang had traveled to Banweolseong, the King’s palace, to pay their respects to the fallen monarch, leaving you alone with only Eunseok as company.

Once the Hwarang had steadily returned to the compounds, an air of normalcy once again began to hang over the inhabitants and the buildings themselves. Yet, midway through the month, Emperor Gaozong of the Tang dynasty called in aid from Silla to attack the kingdom of Gogoryeo. The kingdom resides to the north, and the Tang emperor wished to pincer it from both sides so that it would fall under either Tang or Silla rule.

Whereas this may have been the wishes of Taejong Muyeol, the new king, Munmu, found issue in sending out an army so close to the prior monarch’s death. Yet, as an almost tributary state to the Tang, Silla was forced to comply by sending soldiers to the front. No members of the Hwarang were called, as they were to remain in their cities and keep patrol when the officers that normally stood guard could not.

It’s a cooler day of the beginning of summer, you’d just come back to your room with your laundry when Hansol appears at your door. He stands there for a moment, allowing you to put down the basket of clothes in your hands before speaking, “Commander Lee would like a word with you.”

A wordless nod and you begin to follow after him. Hansol leads you to the main hall, only stopping at the entranceway and gesturing you inside, you step into the room and hear Hansol go in behind you, closing the door after he enters. Looking around, you spot Jihoon, Seungkwan, Mingyu, Junhui and Soonyoung standing around the hall. It seems as if only the captains and you had been summoned for this meeting.

“I know you’ve been waiting for this, but the time has come to finally let you out,” Jihoon says once everyone’s settled into a comfortable silence.

Your lips part and you can barely contain the gasp forming in the back of your throat, “Really?” Unable to contain your excitement, you try to compose yourself before speaking again. “So, there really was someone who saw my father in Hwango-dong?” You question, only hearing rumors of someone who’d seen a man with your father’s profile in one of the city’s districts.

“We’re not sure if it’s true or not,” Jihoon cedes as he nods his head, “It’s our intention to let you verify for us. Considering that you’d recognize him the best out of everyone here.”

“So, where is this man who said he saw him?”

“The initial report outlines Jeolin Inn in Hwango-dong, Hansol’s assigned to do a preliminary check.” Both your and his attention turn to the man Jihoon had named. Did this mean that you were to accompany him to check or were you to wait here until after he’d swept the area?

“That doesn’t mean that Heo is a guest of the inn though,” Kim chimes in.

“Yeah,” Junhui agrees, “Being sighted in Hwango-dong could just mean he was walking around Seorabeol.”

“Exactly,” Jihoon sighs, crossing his arms and looking at Soonyoung, Junhui and Mingyu, “That’s why I’m asking the three of you to take her out on your rounds to assist her in her search.”

“All of us?” Soonyoung’s head tilts in confusion, “We normally split up and go our separate ways on our rounds.”

Rather than entertaining Soonyoung with a response, Jihoon looks back to you. It was a quiet way to say that they were still in charge of looking over you, needing to make sure you wouldn’t try and make a break for it should they take you out in search for your father.

“We get what you’re trying to say, Jihoon,” Seungkwan notes, “but I don’t like that you’re making us do all of the babysitting. I thought you were planning on patrolling as well?” The teasing lilt to his voice returns, “So, for your benefit why don’t you show your adorable page the ropes by taking her out with you?”

“Aren’t you the one who pushed her onto me?” Jihoon scoffs, “I’m not taking any of your shit today, Boo. She isn’t my page.”

“Maybe she is, maybe she isn’t, but a lot of the wang-do are beginning to believe it.” Seungkwan notes, crossing his own arms. “There’s always a grain of truth in every lie, so why don’t you give her a job already?”

As the two continue their stalemating conversation, Mingyu moves to your side and whispers something to you, “Seorabeol isn’t the safest place right now, as you know, so you don’t have to force yourself to leave. I mean we all know what your dad looks like, so it’s not just your risk alone to bear.”

It seems like you could either explore where your father had last been seen, patrol the surrounding area, accompany Jihoon as his page, or stay here, from what Mingyu had suggested.

“Then let me be your page, Jihoon,” you say as Mingyu backs away from your side.

The commander looks at you, something of a distressed light in his eyes, “What?” His voice trembles irately as if the thought of you accompanying him troubles him.

“I mean, walking around town with you may help with getting leads to find my father, right?” You suggest, adding on seconds later, “And if the wang-do are questioning my place, wouldn’t it be in our best interest for me to act like your page? It might convince them.”

Jihoon’s expression sours at your words, “There’s no need to take Seungkwan’s words at face value you know, he likes to mess around and have fun with his wor—”

“Now aren’t you happy to have a cute little page?” Seungkwan smirks as Jihoon stares at him bitterly for cutting him off.

“Very well,” Jihoon frowns and looks back to you, “you better make sure you stay out of my way though.”

After nearly five months since your arrival at the Hwarang headquarters, you’re finally able to leave it. The world has changed, green leaves and flowering blooms greeting you as you and Jihoon make your way through the streets of the city. It was more alive than you had left it earlier in the year.

“I don’t know how it ended up this way,” Jihoon grumbles to himself as the two of you walk through the crowds of Seorabeol. “But I can’t not keep my word…” He keeps himself a few paces in front of you, his mood and tone keeping you somewhat on edge. His attitude had the ability to dictate your own inner thoughts, to question if it really was your place to be here with him.

As the two of you pass by what looks to be a tea shop, you hear a voice call out to Jihoon.

“Commander!” A man looking similar in age to you shouts and makes his way over. He doesn’t wear the blue robes that Jihoon had donned in order to patrol the streets, but with the way he was received, it seems like he was a friend. “I have a report that needs to be disclosed as soon as possible.” But if he had called Jihoon ‘Commander’, wouldn’t he still have to be a part of the Hwarang?

The man steps forward and whispers something into Jihoon’s ear. Jihoon’s eyes widen and then his face goes blank before he turns to you, “I have an urgent matter to attend to.” He looks to the shop you’d stopped in front of, “I’m entrusting you to stay here and ask about Heo.”

“You want me to stay here alone…?” You question, glancing at the shop, “Would that be alright with you?”

Jihoon stares at you for a moment as if he’s trying to decipher any of your hidden thoughts, “Did you plan on accompanying me just so you could run away?” The pit of your stomach drops at his words.

“Of course not!” You defend yourself.

“Then don’t bother me with asinine questions,” he sighs, “Do what I told you and wait here for me to come back, okay?”

“Okay.”

And just like that, Jihoon and the newcomer race down the street away from you. Your eyes once again travel to the tea shop, a sigh escapes you before you head inside. The heavy smell of tea rises from every corner of the room, several patrons sit at small tables discussing various topics as you enter. But you aren’t there for that. So, you make your way over to the shopkeeper and inquire about your father.

Asking him had given you no leads, nor had asking any of the customers coming in or leaving the shop over the course of the next hour. It seemed as if no one knew about your father’s whereabouts. You now sit at a table in the shop, the tea in front of you becoming cold as fragments of leaves swirl around the small cup.

“The Hwarang are here to conduct a search!” A familiar voice booms at the entrance of the shop, “Everyone, remain calm. Who’s the shopkeeper here?” The last you’d seen this man, he hadn’t been wearing the blues of the Hwarang. It is Suh Kangjoon, one of the captains of the Hwarang’s Hanseong unit, what was he doing here?

“I’m the owner here,” the frail voice of the elderly man who you’d questioned earlier speaks up, “What is the meaning of your visit?”

A small ‘tch’ before Kangjoon continues, “I shouldn’t even have to explain myself… It’s been brought to my attention that you’ve allowed Baekje revivalists to conduct their business within this shop.” His voice forceful, unabiding, “What exactly are you plotting? If you don’t answer me, I’ll be forced to take you to headquarters where you will be questioned.”

“That’s absurd!” The shopkeeper exclaims, “I would never allow that here.”

“Oh? Then are you questioning the credibility of the Hwarang?” Kangjoon frowns, his eyes narrowing at the elderly man.

“Of course I’m not,” sweat begins to glisten on the elderly man’s brow, seemingly terrified at the respect that Kangjoon was asking from him. Kangjoon then scans the store, looking at the patrons, you manage to look away before he has the chance to recognize you.

“It’s in our best interest to let local shops run unimpeded,” Kangjoon says, his attention returning to the shopkeeper. “So, depending on how well you… cooperate with us, perhaps I could make this little disturbance disappear.”

“Are you implying…” The shopkeeper's voice dies down before he finishes the thought.

“I’m only suggesting that it would be beneficial to you to share some of your… goodwill.” A coy smile etches itself onto Kangjoon’s lips. Although it isn’t explicitly said, it’s clear that he is soliciting a bribe.

“I— I can’t afford something like that,” the shopkeep cries out, “There isn’t even anything suspicious happening here!”

“Hmm?” Kangjoon says, “You’re refusing to help the Hwarang? We’re the protectors of Silla, you know.”

“I would never do such a thing!”

“If you refuse to cooperate then I’ll have to take you back to headquarters,” Kangjoon’s voice grows even more stern, “You must be a Baekje sympathizer.”

“N- No, I’m not!” The man protests.

The whole conversation makes you feel sick to your stomach, you’re about to speak out when someone puts their hand on your shoulder, rendering you unable to move from your seat.

“Shh,” they say, their voice rather soft and melodic in your ear as they continue, “Someone like you shouldn’t get involved in such a dangerous situation. He won’t hesitate to cut down anyone in his way.” By the way he looks, you could think him to be some sort of stage actor, but with the sword hanging by his side you know he isn’t as such. “Just leave this to me.” The softness of his voice calms you, and you sit back down in your seat before watching him proceed.

“Can I ask something?” The stranger says as he walks towards Kangjoon and the shopkeeper, his eyes trained on the malefactor. “You’re with the Hwarang, right?”

Kangjoon turns, obviously surprised that someone would interrupt him in this situation.

“I am, why does that matter to you?” He questions with a sneer.

“The owner of this tea shop has clearly stated he isn’t allowing any Baekje revivalists to meet here,” the stranger says calmly. “So, with what charges were you going to place on him to allow you to question him at your headquarters?”

“How dare you question me like this,” Kangjoon frowns, “You must be one of those revivalists, right? I should’ve known you’d turn up.”

“Just because I question you, I’m an enemy?” The man sighs out, “I suppose a fair investigation is out of the question.”

“You are preventing me from delivering the Crown’s justice, which is enough proof for me,” Kangjoon nods.

“Very well, then,” The man nods, “If things are going to escalate, would you mind heading outside? I wouldn’t want to upset anyone here.”

“You sound afraid of getting your pretty little face bloodied up,” Kangjoon scoffs, “Not surprising.”

Kangjoon then puffs up his chest following the other man outside the store to challenge him to a fight. You quickly follow the pair and watch the scene unfold. Kangjoon’s smirk remains on his face as the two meet each other. He begins to reach for his blade to threaten the newcomer, assuming an offensive stance.

Yet, before he can pull the blade from its sheath, the other man moves to cover the scabbard’s mouth.

“Let go! Or else—” Kangjoon shouts before the other begins to speak.

“You weren’t really going to draw your sword, were you?” The man questions with a small smile and tilt of his head. “If you were, then things between us may get serious, and I’m not sure you’re ready for that.” The duality of the man is easy to see: one side a soft spoken and gentle face; the other is clearly a fighter.

Suh Kangjoon must feel this duality, because after the man says his piece, he makes no move to draw his blade. A crowd had begun to form around the two men, curious as to what the incident was and what would happen.

“It seems as if we’re drawing in a crowd,” the man notes. “Are you still planning on fighting?”

“I never forget a face,” Kangjoon huffs and angrily shakes off the man’s hand. “I will make you live to regret this day.” His face flush with an unholy fury, he spins on his heels and disappears into the crowds of the street.

The tension from the moments prior dissipates, the crowd surrounding the pair is beginning to dissolve as well. You breathe a sigh of relief as things haven't come to a bloodied fight.

“That could’ve been ugly,” the man notes, turning his head from watching his opponent saunter off towards you, “Let’s go inside and check on the shopkeeper.”

“Are you okay?” You ask, there hadn’t been a fight but you’re not sure you could’ve stood up to Kangjoon in that way.

“Yes,” he nods, “that was nothing.”

“Why were you willing to risk your life like that against him? You didn’t have to stop me.”

A slight pink tinges his cheeks as he answers timidly, “To be honest, you reminded me of someone from a long time ago.”

“Me?” Perplexion in your voice as the comment settles strangely inside you.

“Yes,” he nods, a small smile on his lips, “you even get flustered like them.” He studies your face for a moment, noting a few things that must be similar to the person he knew. Even if that is somewhat flattering, you still have no idea who this man is.

“You must’ve mistaken me for someone else,” You bow slightly, and he looks a little taken aback.

“My apologies, then,” he chuckles, “It seems as if I’m simply mistaken.” He glances towards the shop entrance, “Let’s go back inside, I’m sure your tea and snacks are ruined by now.” His demeanor is overtly gentle, nearly impossible to resist as he draws you back into the shop.

Upon entering the store, the owner smiles and brings the two of you freshly brewed tea. And once seated back down at your table, you realize there are an assortment of treats waiting for you that hadn’t been there prior.

“You didn’t have to do this—” the man says to the shopkeeper.

“Please don’t worry about it,” the elderly man smiles, setting the pot down atop your table as the younger man takes a seat across from you. “You saved me and my shop today, it’s the least I can do.”

“It was nothing,” the man says shyly, “I didn’t do anything to deserve such kindness. But thank you, I love sweets.”

“Don’t be shy and have as much as you want,” the owner seems to bow after every sentence, returning to the counter after he’d finished to attend to his other customers.

“Would you like some?” The man asks and offers out the plate of snacks to you.

“I think the owner means for you to eat all of this,” you note, you’d feel guilty if you’d indulged in the treats.

“If you say so,” the man says, setting down the plate and picking up one of the tteok. A smile overcomes him as he enjoys the treat, you’re not sure if you’d ever seen a warrior smile this much. Yet, with every bite he grins like a small child, almost as if he were the happiest man alive. By now you assume it’s safe to surmise that you were close in age with the way he is conducting himself.

“I suppose it’s time for me to pay my tab,” the man says once he’s finished his tea and a few of the snacks from the plate. He moves to stand, saying something to you as he does, “I’ll be leaving now. Please be careful and try your best to avoid trouble, okay?”

He leaves before you have the chance to respond, drifting from the store like a ghost after he’d finished paying his bill. The man had given you little to no time to thank him for his actions earlier, so you stand from your table and rush outside to try and find him.

“Wait!” You call out to him as you race through the exit.

He’d stopped in his tracks when he’d heard you shout after him, turning on his heels to face you, “Is something wrong?”

“Thank you for earlier,” you bow down, “You probably saved my life.”

He chuckles almost humbly as you stand back up, “I really didn’t do anything to warrant this much of a thanks.” His gaze wanders from you to look down the street, “Although it does seem like the Hwarang are losing their grip on some of their members… If today’s incident was any indication of that, I can’t blame people for losing trust in them.”

“Ah,” you frown, wondering how much people like Kangjoon were responsible for that distrust. “Kangjoon is a cruel man, I don’t think most of the Hwarang would ever treat someone like that. Even if someone’s born a noble, or even joins the Hwarang, it doesn’t automatically make them a good person.”

“I know,” he looks back at you and nods solemnly, “I don’t think that he represents what the Hwarang stands for at all.” The man continues to look at you for a moment, searching your eyes as if they held a key to something. It looks as if he has something to say, but before he lets it slip past his lips he turns back to the street, he calls out your name before speaking once again, “I guess I’ll be on my way.”

Your eyes widen as he begins to walk. How did he know your name? The man turns his back fully to you and begins to walk away, disappearing in the thicket of people on the street. You don’t have much time to question who that man was and why he seems to know you before you see Jihoon in the distance, stalking towards the tea shop.

“Sorry for making you wait so long,” the commander frowns, looking towards the shop as he stops in front of you, “Did you find out any information about your father?”

You shake your head at him, a small frown coating your lips, “Nothing.”

“I see,” he sighs, “It’s not like people around here are very prone to talking, either. Don’t let that get you down.”

As the sun begins to make its descent into the sky, the two of you begin to walk back to the Hwarang’s headquarters. You begin to fill him in on what had happened at the tea shop, a scowl forming as he mulls over what you say.

“Kangjoon did what?” It was a palpable rage exuding from him, but not to the extent he needed to lash out at someone. “Don’t tell anyone about what happened today, not even the captains. Alright?” You nod as he continues, “It’s nothing you haven’t heard before but never let your guard down, especially around people you don’t know. The Hwarang has to protect its secrets, sometimes even from its own members. Especially from that idiot.” Sensing that he was talking about Kangjoon, you nod once again.

After that he continues to prod more questions from you about the events earlier in the day. “You mentioned that a soldier, or someone like that, came to your aid in the tea shop. Do you know anything about him?”

Eyes widening as you realize, “I didn’t even ask him his name…”

“How the hell am I supposed to thank him now?” Jihoon sighs out frustratedly.

“It all happened so fast I barely had time to catch my own breath,” you try to explain, mentally scolding yourself for your carelessness.

“I… that’s understandable. If you happen to cross paths again, ask for his name.” He mutters something out under his breath, “Despite that, I’m sorry we didn’t get any relevant information about your father today. Hopefully either Captain Choi or Wen found something of note.”

Upon returning to the compound, it was relayed to you that the sighting of your father at the Inn had been false. It pierced you as the sliver of hope you had of finding your father soon slipped quickly and quietly from your grasp.

𝔍𝔲𝔩𝔶 7𝔱𝔥, 661 – 𝔖𝔥𝔬𝔰𝔥𝔦𝔫 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 Kwon Soonyoung and Boo Seungkwan stand in the great hall as you enter. The past few weeks had given you no information on the whereabouts of your father, despite you going on patrol rounds with the different Hwarang captains. You assume the information, or lack of, was the reason for your summoning today by Lee Jihoon. Although the presence of the other two Hwarang captains makes you feel somewhat more relieved that you wouldn’t have to face the demon commander alone.

“You asked to see me?” There’s a sour look on Jihoon’s face as you ask, something clearly eating away at him.

“It’s about your father,” he begins, and you perk up for a moment. Jihoon’s frown stays on his face as he looks at you, a sinking feeling in your stomach as you can already tell you won’t like what he says. “I think it’s best we stop searching for him for the time being.”

“Why?” You can hardly stop yourself from blurting out the question. You’d only been able to search for him for what felt like a handful of weeks, if you were to stop now there was a major possibility you could lose any leads you have.

Jihoon remains collected, his arms crossing as he speaks again, “We have reports of activity from Baekje loyalists. It would be more than foolish to let you wander the streets in search of your father at a time like this.”

You recall your encounter a month ago with Kangjoon at the tea shop. He’d been in search of Baekje spies… was the issue really becoming that bad? It was surely one thing to lose one’s homeland, but Silla had been nothing but civil to the former kingdom’s people, or so you’d heard.

“Then, are you asking me to stay here until things are resolved with the loyalists?” You question with a tilt of your head, unable to hide the disappointment in your voice.

The commander nods before turning to Soonyoung and Seungkwan, “That being said, as for now she isn’t to accompany any captain on their rounds.”

“So that’s why you pulled us in here?” The question is more like a musing as it falls from Soonyoung. It seems like he too hadn’t known why he was called here, and it was now beginning to click. “You know, she’s never caused any issues when we took her on our rounds… It feels kind of bad now that she can’t tag along.”

“Mhm,” Seungkwan nods, “even if something were to happen, as long as she’s not hopping into the fray it should be alright. Besides,” he smirks at you, “it’s not like she could outrun us if she tries to escape.”

“I won’t run,” you protest firmly, knowing that he was fully joking. Eyes lingering on Seungkwan for a moment before you look back to Jihoon, “I made a promise when I agreed to stay here. I promised I’d look for my father, I can’t hold myself to that if you won’t let me.”

“Staying with us is putting yourself at risk,” Seungkwan shrugs in your periphery, “if you don’t mind that, I don’t mind you joining us.” His gaze travels to Jihoon, his lips parting, “We’ve had witness reports, I don’t see why we should stop looking when we still have information coming in.”

“You might have a point, Boo. But are witness reports a justifiable reason to put her in harm’s way?” The commander rebukes, his hands falling to his sides. “By taking her out with us, we’re placing an unnecessary burden on our shoulders.”

“If I lose the opportunity to search for my father,” fists clenching at your sides, your nails digging into the skin of your palms, “then any future chances of finding him will be nearly impossible.”

Jihoon looks at you, eyes searching yours, his gaze hardening. You think he’s about to refute you before he starts speaking again. “You need to follow the orders of every captain you’re on patrol with. No sidetracking them. Am I clear?”

“Yes,” you nod, “of course.” Unsure of how to show your gratitude, you bow towards him.

“I’m not going to be the one ordering you to join them,” the commander huffs as you rise, “that’s up to your discretion.”

By the way that the commander spoke, it seems as if he doesn’t want you to leave the compound for whatever reason. You’re unsure what’s caused the full shift in his attitude towards you accompanying the men out on patrol, but for now it’s probably your best bet to stay within the compound for the time being.

After a few quiet goodbyes, you return to your room. Jihoon’s words of caution reside in your eardrums, you know they’d plague you should you have chosen to go out with either Soonyoung or Seungkwan. So, until that beast of guilt renders itself immobile, you’ll hole yourself up in the headquarters. Staying inside doesn’t make you happy, it reminds you of the first few weeks you’d spent here. Alone and outcast in a world of unfamiliar faces.

Yet, unlike a few months ago, you now had free roam of the buildings and grounds. Now you find yourself exiting your room, heading towards one of the courtyards littered around the headquarters’ interior. A soft, summer breeze drifts through the almost-gardens as you enter. The sickly-sweet smell of the decaying flowers from the spring hitting your nose.

You sit in the courtyard for a while, the soft gusts of wind eventually dying down and forcing you to take the heat of the sun in all its glory. A sheen of sweat coats your brow as you look towards the white clouds in the sky that refuse to block out the sun.

With little to think about in your ponderance, your thoughts shift from the now blistering heat to your father. You hadn’t thought about it much since your arrival, but the Hwarang had heard of him. Had they been patients of his? Or perhaps he was talking of diseases and how to prevent them the best they could…

The more you think on the subject, the more a pinpoint of a headache begins to grow. You know that the Hwarang have enough secrets without the aid of your father, but you’re not doubtful that your father may be the cause of some of them.

“Did they really leave you alone out here?” You jump at the voice behind you, too lost in thought to hear light footsteps approach.

“Ah,” spinning on your heels, you're met face-to-face with the Hwarang’s colonel. “Seungcheol… is it okay for you to be out here?” Your gaze drops to his bandaged arm, still not yet healed from his wound earlier in the year.

“It’s not like I need to be bedridden,” he chuckles, gently raising his arm as if to show you it had some movement left within it. “There’s nothing wrong with me.” There was a slight bitterness to his words, almost as if he’d taken a bit of an unripe pear and the taste still lingered on his tongue. “Although I suppose my right hand is…”

A sad and twisted smile curls onto his lips as he looks down to his still injured hand. It hadn’t healed, and by now he was probably realizing that it probably never would. You recall the other captain’s concern when the news had arrived of Seungcheol’s injury, noting that he’d probably never be able to wield a weapon again.

“And what are you doing out here?” He questions, the bitterness from his voice gone, “I hadn’t realized you were allowed out of your room.”

Typically, no one batted an eye nowadays if you were walking around the compound. Yet with the heightened tensions in Seorabeol, you suppose being in your room would put more of the Hwarang at ease. The freedom they’d given you was just as easily revoked.

“I just wanted some space to think, that's all.” You explain, your hand playing with the fabric of your robes, “I’m sorry.”

“It’s just that when you sneak around with none of us knowing, it makes it seem like you have something to hide,” Seungcheol’s lips curve downwards as he listens to your explanation.

“Then I’ll go back to my room,” you sigh and begin to walk past him.

Seungcheol’s coldness had begun ever since he’d come back injured. Albeit, you hadn’t known him long enough to gauge his character before that, but there had been a lightness to it that certainly isn’t here now. The loss of mobility in his arm pained him in more ways than physical, more ways than you could possibly begin to comprehend.

“It’s—” You stop and look back at him, “hot outside today. You shouldn’t stay in the sun too long. Please take care of yourself.” A nervous laugh as you finish, finding him returning something of a lighthearted chuckle. For the first time in weeks, his smile didn’t look forced. “

“Thank you,” he nods, the smile still lingering in his voice, “take care of yourself too.”

You don’t find yourself coming across any of the other captains until later that evening, when the sun’s already sunk halfway down the horizon and a golden glow begins to encapsulate the headquarters. As you’re heading towards the main hall you hear a smattering of footsteps behind you, you turn and see Junhui heading towards you.

“What… what’s that for?” You question, looking down at his hands where he’s holding what looks to be an embroidery needed and a thin candle.

“One of those Baekje guys we picked up isn’t really a talker,” Junhui explains, gesticulating wildly with his hands as he speaks. “Jihoon’s with him but doesn’t have the… uh, means to speak with him.” As he sees your eyes widening in realization, he drops his hands behind his back, shielding the objects from vision. “I’ll stop talking and spare you from thinking any more about it.” He lets out a laugh before skirting around you and heading off towards another hallway.

There was even more commotion by the time dinner rolled around. The halls now darkened save for the braziers and candles that lit the entrances and walls. You’re sitting in your room when stomping once again disrupts your thoughts.

“Soonyoung!” You call out, having seen his green robes race by your doorway. Almost as quickly as he had shot past, he returns. “Why’s everyone running around tonight?” You ask as he stands in your doorway, trying to hold himself together with deep breaths. “Did that prisoner say something?”

His eyes light up, his chest puffing out almost proudly, “Yeah, Jihoon finally got the guy to break! It looks like they’re having a meeting right now, we’re actually getting ready for a raid.”

“Wouldn’t that be something the army typically does?”

“It really depends on the severity…” Soonyoung notes, “But since most of the troops are still up in Hanseong, the Crown let us do this.” He goes on to explain that the Hwarang would be dividing themselves into two groups. Youngmin would lead a group of a dozen men to Wonweol Inn and Jihoon would lead twenty-three to Jeolin Inn on opposite ends of the city. “Rumor has it that they’ll be at Jeolin, I’m kind of upset they’re sending me to Wonweol.”

It seems as if Jihoon’s forces were rearing to see action, Youngmin’s more so just to make sure all their leads were covered.

“There aren’t enough men to spread out equally?” You ask, wondering why there was such disparity between the numbers.

Soonyoung nods, “A lot of men get sick right when we need them the most.” The closeness of bunks typically made for unsanitary conditions, making the spread of disease easy. “We sent out word to the Guard but it doesn’t seem like they care all too much,” he sighs, leaning back on his heels.

Someone shouts out to him before you’re able to wish him luck, he gives you a curt wave before racing back down the hallway. Sometime after the able-bodied men had left, Seungcheol calls for you to meet him in the main hall.

“As a courtesy, I assume, Jihoon has asked me to protect the headquarters in his absence,” he relays to you once you’ve settled yourself into the hall. “It’s empty for the most part but that’s a reason they may attack us.”

“Does that mean you’ll protect me?” You question and he laughs almost immediately, his gold-plated earrings clatter together as his head shakes slightly.

“I’m sure I can be of more use than the men who’ve been confined to their beds.” It isn’t as reassuring as you thought it’d be, but it was at least something. His smile was sad at his words, probably feeling more and more unhelpful as the days progressed.

The silence between the two of you stays stagnant until a door to one of the halls opens quietly.

“Colonel Choi,” a man says as he enters, you recognize him as the face who’d pulled Jihoon away from you when you were out on patrol several weeks ago, “We’ve confirmed that the loyalists are meeting at Wonweol.”

Seungcheol sighs, his voice light but his face holding a certain sternness, “I suppose we’ve bet wrong again.” The Hwarang had been certain that Jeolin would be the place of the meeting and finding out that Wonweol was actually the location was certainly a blow to their plans.

“Chan,” Seungcheol looks at the newcomer, “can you do me a favor?”

Chan nods curtly, awaiting his instruction. You’d come to learn of him through the others, while not a resident of Shoshin Temple, he is both a member of the city Watch and an officer of the Hwarang. He’d been made aware of your situation at some point, so you didn’t need to feel as guarded around him as other members of the Hwarang.

“First, tell Jihoon that the meeting is at Wonweol, he should still be on his way to Jeolin.” Seungcheol begins and then looks to you, “And I’m sorry to put this on you, but I need you to take her with you.”

Chan’s eyes widen almost as big as yours as you ask, “Why me? Wouldn’t I only slow him down?”

“Save for Chan here, you’re the most able-bodied person residing in the headquarters,” Seungcheol says, grimacing at his words as the fingers on his right hand twitch, “even if you’re a burden you may just as well save someone’s life.”

You bite your lip, seeing that Chan was probably thinking the same thoughts that you were. Yet neither of you were able to oppose the colonel.

“There’s a chance that the loyalists have called for backup,” Seungcheol looks to Chan, “If your message were to be intercepted then you’d never reach Jihoon in time. Do you see what I’m trying to say?”

Chan nods slowly, piecing together the elder’s thoughts, “If we run into enemy forces, I could hold them off while she delivers the message…”

“You want me to do what?!” You can’t help but exclaim. It sounded as if the two of you were caught out, Chan would sacrifice himself so that you could escape.

“Don’t worry too much,” Seungcheol tries to reassure you, “I doubt it will come to that. We’re short of men right now which means I have to ask you to step in. You’ll need to notify the Guard and the Watch as well.”

“There’s really no one else who can do this?” You ask hesitantly, daunted by what Seungcheol was asking you to do. “What about Jeon?”

Jeon Wonwoo is another spy in allegiance with the Hwarang, yet he mostly dealt with Yamato forces.

Seungcheol shakes his head, revealing that Jeon was already with Jihoon’s team heading towards Jeolin.

As if seeing the nervousness on your face, Chan steps forward and offers you something of a nervous, sheepish smile. “I heard you know a little bit about protecting yourself,” his eyes glance towards the blade tucked away at your waist, “I unfortunately can’t guarantee your safety, but, if you can manage, you’re welcome to join me.”

Despite the gentle tone he was using, you know he’d kill you the instant you tried to run. This mission took priority over anything and anyone else in his way.

“I’ll go,” you nod, taking in a deep breath. “I can take care of myself, there’s no need to worry about me.”

You can see Seungcheol giving you a small smile as Chan steps back. More than anything, you know that Seungcheol wants to join and fight alongside his men, but it is impossible. The least you can do is carry out the mission in his stead.

“Then we accept your request, Colonel.” Chan nods and begins to head towards the exit with you following closely behind him. He turns to you as you close the door, “Run with all you can.”

You take off after him, the slow and itching burn rising from your legs the longer you pursue him. It’s as if the streets were plunged into darkness with how little you could see as you raced by, the sound of dirt under foot sliding with every footfall. You’re beginning to see that half a year indoors with little to no vigorous exercise has done something of a toll to your physique, you aren’t as in shape as you’d once been.

Had you not been paying attention, you may have slammed into Chan, who stopped abruptly after reaching the edge of the street.

“No matter what you see or hear, follow this street and don’t look back,” he whispers and the hairs on the back of your neck stand on end.

“Has someone been following us?”

His head shakes, “You don’t need to know that.”

Your breaths heavy, knowing full well that he’d make it faster to Jihoon than you, “Chan you should go, I’ll stay behind.”

He frowns at you, “What could you do by staying behind?”

“If I distract them then you could slip away,” you push, resisting the urge to take a peek at whatever was coming after the two of you.

“If we need bait, then it’s going to be me,” his hand reaches for his sword as he looks past you, “Now, run!”

It takes no time for him to rush behind you and for your legs to kick off from the ground and begin to barrel down the street in front of you. You hear a clatter of blades behind you, thinking that Chan’s already locked in combat before he calls out, “Keep running until you see white!”

Knees weakened with the adrenaline of it all, you run down the street. You’re sure that the only way you’d be able to stop preemptively was to tear tendon from bone. Even in your haste you felt sluggish, as if everything around you were frozen in time. You run for another two minutes before spotting two silhouettes wearing white robes in the distance, as you near you can see the Commander with Kim Mingyu.

“What are you doing here?!” Jihoon says angrily, a tinge of surprise coating his words. You could almost cry in relief at seeing the two of them.

It’s then you notice that they’re not wearing the typical blue robes of the Hwarang, they’ve instead traded the vibrant hue for a pale white. Maybe it’s for better visibility, but you’re not too certain.

With shaking limbs, you try to step forward, your knees giving way and you begin to fall towards the ground. Mingyu reaches out to hold you up before you collapse entirely.

“Are you alright?” He asks as he helps you back to your feet. “You know if Jihoon finds out you left the compound without permission he’ll kill you, right?”

Rather than explain yourself, you focus on regulating your breath. At this moment you were far too winded to express why you’d left. After one, two breaths you take a third long inhale and turn to the commander.

“They’re meeting at Wonweol,” huffing out in short puffs of air, you try to straighten yourself to the best of your ability. Jihoon’s eyes widen at your words and he turns to Mingyu.

“I knew they’d be there!” An almost hiss escapes through his clenched teeth as Mingyu stares back at him.

Hansol, who you hadn’t seen standing off to the side with another group of men, steps forward. “Are you sure?” He questions you, a grave seriousness intertwined with his words.

“Seungcheol lost his arm, not his brain,” Jihoon says, looking over to Hansol, “if she’s out here looking for us and not hightailing it back to her hometown, then it’s safe to surmise he sent her.”

“It’s impressive that you found us,” Mingyu mutters, “Seorabeol is a big city, after all.”

“It was Chan,” you answer, the burning in your lungs slowly residing. “He told me to find you so he could fight against some of the loyalists.”

“What about the Guard or the Watch, are they on their way?” Jihoon asks, his hand resting atop the hilt of his sword. When you shake your head, you can almost see him trying to piece together their next move.

“Choi, Kim, take the men to Wonweol,” He instructs, a commandeering veneer to his words. “There’s something I need to do.”

The two captains nod and turn back to their men to relay the news and inform them of what their new plans were. Before they begin to move, Hansol looks back to you, “The city’s more dangerous tonight than it’s been on any of our rounds. Either stick with Kim and I or go with Lee.”

It was a relatively easy choice to make, right? You’d stick with Jihoon as the other two seemed to be off to battle. The prospect of being alone with the stoic commander was somewhat intimidating, but it would put you away from the bloodshed.

The two of you watch the rest of the group form together and head off into the dimly lit streets towards Wonweol Inn. Jihoon doesn’t say anything until the ringing out of the warrior’s footsteps dissipates into the humid nighttime.

“Good work in delivering that message,” there’s appreciation in his voice as he looks to you, something resembling a small smile pulling at his lips, “That information may have just given us the advantage we need.” An approving comment from the Hwarang’s demon commander was something that you’d never thought you’d hear; it makes your heart pound gleefully for a moment out of sheer shock of the scenario.

Jihoon and you step from the narrow street and move to one of Seorabeol’s main roads, a deserted place at this time of night.

“Jihoon?” You ask, feet treading on the grit of the dirt walkways, “Why are we out here?”

“The Hwarang don’t hide in the shadows like these Baekje loyalists,” He says matter-of-factly and looks down the street as if he’s searching for something, or someone.

It doesn’t take long for a figure to appear running towards the two of you. For a moment you think it’s an enemy and begin to reach for the blade at your hip before recognizing a familiar silhouette.

“You’re alive!” You gasp out, dropping your hand away from your side as the other approaches.

Chan doesn’t respond to you verbally, only nods his head with a small smile before straightening up and looking at Jihoon. “I assume you’ve been told what's happening at Wonweol? The colonel told me to notify the Guard and the Watch but...”

“I’ll have more orders for you in a bit,” Jihoon nods in understanding, “Just stay nearby for now.” He then turns to you as Chan slips wordlessly into a nearby alley. “I’ve got to have a word with a few useless assholes.” There was a spark of anger in his voice, a fire dimly beginning to glow brighter in his eyes. The commander then looks past you; you turn and see an oncoming group of Silla soldiers making their way down the street. Jihoon mutters something you can’t make out under his breath as they near.

You now realize why he’d brought you out into the main road, neither of you would have seen the oncoming troops had you been tucked away in a side street.

The pace of the oncoming soldiers was lazy, almost unconcerned in a way that miffed you. Shouldn’t they be worried about stopping a near rebellion from a fallen kingdom?

“The Hwarang are still fighting at Wonweol… aren’t they?” You ask into the nighttime, a strange fear gripping you as the dwindled numbers of the Hwarang were putting their lives at stake to quell this disturbance. Didn’t these men before you have some, if not more, responsibility to quash it?

Perhaps the anger and disbelief in your voice was more present than you thought, as Jihoon lets out a small chortle of laughter, “Don’t worry about it, I’ll make sure they stay in line.” He steps out further into the street, directly in front of the group that was now only several meters in front of him.

All he did was move away from you and face them, but he now holds an aura of authority that hadn’t been there moments prior.

“The Hwarang are currently conducting an official investigation of Wonweol Inn,” he calls out as they stop before him, his voice echoing around the surrounding buildings. “You will not interfere or enter the Inn.”

Even you could see the grumblings of protest beginning to stir in the movements of the soldiers when Chan appears from the shadows once more and begins to speak quietly to you, “If Jihoon lets those men walk into Wonweol, they’ll get the credit for subduing the revivalists.”

“How could they…?” You ask, looking towards Chan. “It’s the Hwarang who are risking their lives for this mess.”

“It’s more political than just the Hwarang or the soldier taking credit,” Chan sighs as Jihoon continues to shout orders to the soldiers. “Jihoon’s adoptive father’s high ranking in the court’s aristocracy, so are a few of the other captain’s fathers. The Hwarang, in a way, represent them and the soldiers here represent the more military-inclined families. In the end it’s not the question of whether it was the Hwarang or the guard who subdued the loyalists, but which families were behind the winning team, in the Crown’s eyes.”

“That’s…” Convoluted. Confusing. Complex. Insane. Elaborate. “A lot.”

Chan must’ve been able to see the confusion in your gaze as he laughs to himself, “That’s only scratching the surface. But it shows the utter disrespect each side has from one another and I expect it won’t be resolved any time soon.” Both of your gazes travel back to the commander at the front of the guard, “Jihoon’s single handedly protecting the Hwarang right now. If we allow them to get to the Inn, they’ll lionize themselves.”

You can see that Chan thinks highly of Commander Lee in the way he admirably talks of his staunch resolution in doing what’s best for the Hwarang.

It seems as if Jihoon’s startling tactic was beginning to wane as a few soldiers began to protest his declaration.

“If you really think you can fit nearly, what, one hundred men?” Jihoon’s eyes scan the lines of soldiers for a moment, “If you think you can fit all of them into Wonweol, you’re insane. The best you can do with these numbers is surround it and make sure no one escapes.” He’s trying to dissuade them; you wonder if they can see it as clearly as you. “Unless you really want to lead your men to the slaughterhouse. There’s already a fight happening, and if you value your lives, I’d suggest you stay put.”

The head official leading the troops relents, stepping away from Jihoon as he finds no room for argument against the commander of the Hwarang. Jihoon stays in front of the troops until a member of the Hwarang finds you all standing there, claiming that the battle has ended.

Jihoon, Chan and you had returned to the compound as the first wave of Hwarang were returning from the skirmish. The fight had only lasted a matter of two hours, but to you it had felt like much longer. There had been nearly two dozen revivalists congregating at the inn, the Hwarang had ended up killing seven of their members and injuring four more of them.

Chan tells you later in the night that, with the aid of the Guard and Watch, sixteen more people in the city were arrested in relation to the Wonweol incident. The owner of the inn had also been arrested as he was aiding in the escape of several of the loyalists.

The Hwarang had prevailed, despite having the weaker numbers, in an incredible victory. Yet, with that victory also came some losses. Seungkwan had taken a blow to the chest and fell unconscious shortly after, Soonyoung had been cut across his forehead and the bleeding hadn’t relented, Junhui had injured his hand in a brawl, one Hwarang had lost his life and two others were severely injured. It didn’t seem as if the last two would make it the week due to the severity of their injuries.

With the quelling of the revivalist by Hwarang hands, it seems as if the group were now in a more favorable light with the Crown. As well as with the court members who vied for the organization’s success.

𝔍𝔲𝔩𝔶 8𝔱𝔥, 661 – 𝔖𝔥𝔬𝔰𝔥𝔦𝔫 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 “Thanks for patching me up,” Junhui smiles at you as you finish tying together the bandage wrapped around his hand. “You’re pretty skilled at this.”

“It’s no problem,” you smile at him, rolling the remaining gauze together. “You should really take it easy, though– So your wound doesn’t reopen.”

“Ah,” Junhui frowns, “As soon as you’re done here, I’m supposed to go looking for the revivalists that escaped.”

“I see…” You understand that it was of the utmost importance that the Hwarang find them, but as the daughter of a physician you can’t help but worry about your patients.

“Have you heard anything about Soonyoung and Seungkwan? Have they woken up yet?” He asks as he rises to his feet.

“They’re awake,” you nod, packing away the gauze into a bag used for medical supplies. “Their wounds aren’t that bad, but being kicked in the stomach and slashed on the forehead are still pretty serious. There may be repercussions that we can’t see, like internal bleeding.”

“To think it was enough to make Seungkwan cough blood,” he sighs as you stand, a stern expression hardening his features.

Suddenly, the door to the room slides open and Mingyu bursts in, his eyes looking frantically around at the other aides before settling on you, “Are you free? There’s a warrior who’s in pretty bad shape.”

“Of course!” You nod and quickly follow after him. Many Hwarang were injured after the incident at Wonweol and you made a promise to treat and nurse them the best you can.

Before you realize it, dusk sweeps over the compound. Your eyes are heavy with the sleep you forwent the night prior. For the first time in hours, there was no one for you to treat, but that still doesn’t mean there isn’t work to do. Once you leave one of the injured Hwarang’s rooms, you go to find the others and get direction about what or who to focus on next. Yet, as you close the door behind you, you hear footsteps approaching.

“There you are!” Jihoon says, “There’s a captain’s meeting in the main hall in a few minutes. I’m sorry to bother you when you’ve just cleaned up, but can you make tea for us all?”

“Of course,” you say quickly, stifling a yawn. “I’ll bring some right away.”

A handful of minutes later you find yourself with a tray in hand, a steaming pot of tea and several cups adorning the surface as you make your way into the main hall. Upon entering, you see the captains reunited.

“Here you all go,” you say quietly so as to not disturb them and set about handing everyone a cup and pouring them a serving.

“Thank you,” Youngmin smiles gratefully as he picks up his cup.

Apparently, you’ve come in just as the captains are about to give their reports of their rounds earlier today.

“There was no sign of revivalist activity during my rounds with my division earlier,” Hansol reports.

“I’m sure word has already spread about the incident last night,” Jihoon muses, “I thought they’d be out for blood but I guess I’m wrong.”

“We can’t let our guard down,” Seungcheol reminds him, “They may be waiting until it’s dark again to make a move.”

“A valid point,” Youngmin agrees.

“You just got back from a meeting with the Guard, right?” Mingyu asks him, “What’d they say?”

“Ah…” Youngmin sighs, “They want their own warriors to accompany us on our rounds to catch the remnants of the loyalists.”

“No way,” Junhui nearly spits in anger, “They just want the fame for when we catch them!”

“Precisely.” Seungcheol nods, “If Commander Lee hadn’t stopped them from entering the Inn last night, the Crown would be praising them.”

“Whatever the reason, I cannot refuse an order coming from the Guard with the Crown backing them.” Youngmin looks to Jihoon, “So, I’d like to charge one of you with the rounds in cooperation with their warriors.”

“Not me,” Junhui says almost immediately, “I don’t know them, nor do I want to be responsible for their lives if things do come to a head.”

“Me either,” Mingyu adds, “My tongue may slip and I might say something unsavory to those opportunistic bastards.”

“That’s not… very helpful…” Youngmin sighs, “Hansol…?”

Suh Kangjoon interrupts before Hansol can even open his mouth, “Wait, Chief. Please entrust the Guard warriors to my division. I fully understand how important this mission is to undertake.” He snidely glares at Mingyu and Junhui before continuing, “The other captains don’t seem to have a grasp on the situation, probably because they lack the education and politicking.”

“I dare you to repeat that–!” Mingyu says angrily, nearly rising to his feet.

“If you’re looking for a fight, come with us and get your ass kicked,” Junhui frowns.

“Calm down,” Kangjoon says almost in a way to belittle them. “I’ll give you a simple rundown. Of course the Guard wants to make sure we don’t get full credit. But they also want to make sure we’re not trying to take their place. So it is vital to us that what they see and hear about the Hwarng presents us in a good light.”

Slowly nodding in agreement, Youngmin looks to the Commander and Colonel, “Jihoon, Seungcheol, you’re on board?”

“Suh is so admirably dedicated to the Hwarang,” Seungcheol says.

“Fine.” Jihoon waves, “Suh, you’re in charge of the Guard. But I don’t want any fuss.”

“I won’t cause any,” Kangjoon says with a sly smile.

“If you encounter any loyalists, make sure not to let them slip through your fingers.” Seungcheol warns, “If a mistake is made in front of the Guard, all the work we put into the success of Wonweol will be for nothing.”

“I give my word as a Suh,” Kangjoon says, although he seems already eager to leave. “The interests of the Hwarang always come first.

July 12th - Shoshin Temple, Kingdom of Silla

A few more days passed without any incident, but a rumor has begun to spread that the Guard are going to do something to retaliate for the praise they could have gotten from Wonweol. Everyone at the compound is walking on eggshells.

Even with everyone on edge, there are still things for you to be doing. So, you find yourself sweeping off the entranceway of the temple as the sun just begins to sink into the sky. Most of the warriors that pass nervously glance left and right every time they move. There haven’t been any incidents or injuries on the rounds, and yet the question remains in the air every time someone heads out: Will they come back safely?

“What are you doing outside?!” Mingyu’s voice makes you nearly jump out of your skin.

“Captain Kim–!” You breathe deeply to calm yourself, “Did something happen? You look on edge.”

“Of course I am when I see you like that. It’s dangerous!” He motions you to return inside, “Cleaning can wait.”

“Then something happened?” You take a step forward, you knuckles tightening around the grip of the broom.

“Ah,” he shakes his head, “I’m actually not sure myself, but the Watch might retaliate.”

“The Watch?” Your eyebrows raise as you follow him inside.

“I’ll explain but let’s get moving first.”

You follow him to the main room where Jihoon, Youngmin, and Seungcheol sit with sour faces. Kangjoon stands before them, pale as a ghost. Has something happened on the rounds?

“Dammit, Suh!” Jihoon shouts angrily enough that it looks as if the earring on his right ear may come flying off. “Fuck! I warned you, I insisted like a hammer to a nail but congratulations! You did a hell of a job.” Furious sarcasm drips from his words as Seungcheol disrupts his tirade with a cough to change the tone.

“Explain yourself, Captain Suh.” Seungcheol says with calm fury. “What are your thoughts on this situation?”

“It’s a huge misunderstanding! Please, let me explain myself.” Kangjoon then begins to list a reason of explanations. He and his division had met a suspicious swordsman on their rounds, in an attempt to stop him, Kangjoon had used his swords and injured him, but in the end they discovered that the swordsman was a man of the Watch. “To be fair, if the man had been honest from the start and revealed himself, none of this would have happened.”

“It’s true that trying to stop a swordsman from fleeing can’t be considered a fault…” Seungcheol sighs, “But resorting to using your sword… And all that in front of the Guard representative, who you’ve been entrusted with.”

“What a mess,” Jihoon frowns, “And the Guard can’t go and pretend they didn’t see anything. And of course, the Watch is going to ask for reparation since it’s their guy who got injured… Damn it. Why is this shit always happening to us?”

“May I have a word?” Lee Chan steps forward and whispers something into Jihoon’s ear.

“He what?!” Jihoon’s eyes go wide.

“I got the information from a source within the Watch. He died earlier today.” Chan says and steps back a few feet.

“That’s awful,” Jihoon says with a ‘tch’, “We’d better keep our heads low for a while and see if we’ve got the situation under control.” He rises from sitting with a sigh, “Gukseon Kwak and I will head to both the Guard and the Watch to apologize.”

“It would be wise for us to go to them rather than wait for their direction,” Seungcheol nods in agreement.

“Suh, you’re coming too.” Jihoon glances at the captain, “We’ll leave as soon as we’re ready.”

“Ah… You… You want me to come…?” Kangjoon looks stunned. “But what if they consider me guilty as well…? Being ordered to–”

Jihoon lets out a bark of a laugh before turning fully to Kangjoon, shouting at him, “You’re taking responsibility for your actions! Now get the fuck out and get ready!”

Even though you’re only listening to what’s happening and have no part in it, you can see and feel how stressful and hectic the situation is. Why had the Watch soldier killed himself? Perhaps they had their own code of laws like the Hwarang did the O Gye. But it seems a bit exaggerated to have done that over something like this.

You follow the men out to the front of the compounds with the other captains to see them off.

“Well then, let’s get going.” Youngmin says and looks to Seungcheol, “Colonel Choi, the headquarters are now in your hands.”

“...Chief, Colonel, Commander!” Kangjoon says as he stands before them once more, “I never meant to cause trouble for the Hwarang. Please believe me!”

“It’s not us who are going to judge you,” Jihoon says shortly, “Let’s go.” He immediately starts walking, not wanting to hear any more protests from Kangjoon. But before he gets very far, a figure runs out from the shadows.

“You’re still here? Thank goodness I found you in time.” They say, racing over to Jihoon.

“What’s happening, Jeon?” Jihoon questions as Wonwoo comes into view.

“You see… the Guard who accompanied Suh on his rounds has also committed honorable suicide.”

“Another one?!” Jihoon staggers.

“The Guard want our commanders to join them as soon as possible.”

“I guess that’ll calm down the Watch,” Jihoon sighs, “Now I hope this is going to be the end of it.”

“So I– We don’t need to go to the Watch anymore?” Kangjoon asks.

“You idiot,” Jihoon growls at him, “You’re the cause of this mess! Of course you’re coming. And you’re going to apologize to the Guard and the Watch! Now!”

“I… Of course…”

“I guess this is good to know before we go,” Youngmin smiles weakly, “I’m feeling a bit overwhelmed, but… No choice, we have to go.”

With that, Youngmin and Jihoon leave for the Guard, Kangjoon following them reluctantly.

By the time you settle in your rooms, readying yourself for bed, the men haven’t returned from their meetings. Being too worried to find sleep before they arrive back, you impatient wait for them before you resign yourself to sleep.

Had their negotiations gone well? If they hadn’t, then all of the work the Hwarang poured into the Wonweol incident would vanish in an instant.

You’re pulled from your thoughts when you hear footsteps in the corridor outside of your room. Quickly standing, you make your way to your door and slide it open.

“Huh?” You hear Jihoon sound out and turn towards the sound of your door opening, “Why are you still awake? You could have gone to sleep. You haven’t slept much the last few days.”

“Have you eaten yet?” You question as you step out into the corridor, “Do you want me to prepare something real quick?”

“No,” he shakes his head, “I’m fine. Sorry for worrying you.”

“You look… Drained.” You say softly, noting his pallid looking complexion, “Are you really okay?”

“Yeah, well I’m facing so many problems I’m beginning to think attracting them is a special talent of mine.” With the way he says that, you wonder what happened during the discussion with the Guard. Judging by his face, the worst case scenario must have been avoided, but something is still lingering with him,

“... If you can’t sleep, join me for a bit.”

“Huh?” You feel your cheeks begin to warm, “Our relationship isn’t that kind of… I mean…”

“I’m feeling overwhelmed, too. I can’t go back to my room because I’m sure I’ll be too frustrated to sleep.” He begins to walk, “Come with me, it’s fine. If we talk here, we’re going to wake everyone up.”

In the tranquility of the night, you can only hear crickets as he leads you to one of the empty courtyards. In your sleep-deprived mind, this feels as if time has suspended itself.

“... We’re here then, let’s talk.” Jihoon stops abruptly and you need to stop yourself before you run into him as he turns around to face you. “What do you want to know?”

“You’re sure it’s okay for me to ask?” You pose, “And for you to tell me about it?”

“The more you know, the better you’ll sleep,” Jihoon says simply. “In short, everything that Wonwoo said before we left was true.”

“So the warrior going on rounds with Captain Suh did kill himself…?”

“Yeah,” he nods, “that.”

“I have to admit that I don’t get the big picture of today’s events…” You admit, breaking away from his gaze momentarily, “I don’t understand it well.” As far as you’d heard, none of the men had been guilty of anything.

“In situations like these, we don’t always choose to do the right thing,” he sighs, crossing his arms as you look at him. “The honor of a warrior is more important than his life. The Watch guy chose it to save face. For the Guard one, it’s different. He was ordered to do so by his commander to stop any escalation with the Watch.”

Even as he explains it calmly, a chill still runs down your spine. Regardless of you own turmoil, he continues to speak with the same coldness. “With the Wonweol incident, I managed for the Hwarang to make a name for itself… If we want to have the Crown’s support, their entire support, having good relationships with the Guard is first above all.”

You stand there at a loss for words. This time, the Hwarang were not ordered to fall upon their swords but there is no guarantee that something similar won’t happen in the future. The next victim in this endless power struggle could very well be a member of the Hwarang.

“Our job is to keep order and kill those who stand in the way of it. Do the dirty work if needs be.” Jihoon locks eyes with you, “...That said, do you want to leave?” He sighs, “Well, it’s not like we can let you go, anyway.”

“You know, I… I really want to be useful to you all.” With his shocked expression you wonder if your answer was that unexpected.

“Are you serious?” His brow furrows, “At this point we’re just murderers, it seems.”

“There may be some truth to that…” You murmur, “But without you Seorabeol could have been reduced to ashes by now. I’m from a small village and I don’t fully grasp what it means to be a noble or to embrace a warrior’s code… Still, I hope I can help you, even if only with my limited medical knowledge.”

Jihoon watches your face, not interrupting you. It’s almost as if he’s looking into your heart, seeking the depth of your resolution.

“You look weak but your heart is strong, isn’t it?” He gives you a small smile. “I thought we scared you and made you want to run with what happened at Wonweol.” You find that he looks gentle when he smiles. The longer you look at him, you feel the stiffness that has been there since the night at Wonweol slowly lift away.

“By the way, I forgot to thank you. You really proved to be an asset at Wonweol. You haven’t complained once since then and have been actively working for everyone’s sake behind the scenes…” He pauses for a moment, “I’m in your debt for everything you do for us. If you stay here, we’ll protect you. You’ve got my word.”

You can’t help but return a smile of your own, “...Thank you very much.”

To follow their warrior’s path– you can’t really help with that or like what vicious means they have to expend to dispense the king’s justice. But you don’t feel wrong in wanting to support Jihoon and the rest of the warriors. This thought is as strong as ever as you look at the commander’s face, illuminated in the moonlight.

𝔍𝔲𝔩𝔶 20𝔱𝔥, 661 – 𝔖𝔥𝔬𝔰𝔥𝔦𝔫 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 As you walk down the corridors of the Hwarang’s compound, you carefully hold a book that Jeon Wonwoo had given you several minutes earlier. Coming to work with him, you find that he is more versed in Silla medicine than the Tang that your father had slightly taught you as you grew older. In a small promise, you tell him things you can remember from the trade and he has lent you the very book you hold of his own notes. And seeing that he is far superbly more versed in actually treating people, you find yourself in charge of bandage changing and wound cleaning. You’re happy to be in service to the soldiers, but they don’t make it any easier.

“Are you sure you want to go?” You hear a voice chime out from a room just ahead of you, “She’ll be here any minute.”

“It’s fine! My forehead is as good as new by now!” With almost certainty, you can tell that it’s Kwon Soonyoung speaking.

“Well said, Soonyoungie! The reward for Wonweol should come pretty soon!” You hear Junhui laugh, “Let’s spend a little too much of that money, shall we?”

With widened eyes as you’ve become privy to their plans, you race into the main room where you heard them speak.

“Captain Kwon! Where do you think you’re going?” You call out and Soonyoung turns quickly on his heels to face you.

“Ah–! I thought I told you to call me–” He notices the angered expression on your face, “Oh man– It’s not me! I swear! It’s Jun who wants to go out!”

“Woah, woah, woah,” Junhui raises his hands in defense, “Are you trying to let me carry this alone?!”

“That’s enough!” You say sternly, “I’ve told you many times that alcohol isn’t good for fresh wounds and that you shouldn’t drink until the wound heals!”

“Harp on him some more,” Mingyu nods towards Soonyoung, “Even though he’s not allowed to practice with his sword he sneaks out everyday to show off the scar on his forehead.”

“Argh, Gyu! Stop talking!”

“I’ve repeated on and on how you shouldn’t remove the bandage!” You vent, you could almost feel the steam leaving your ears.

“Don’t bother,” Mingyu sighs and nods towards Junhui, “He’s not much better than a child when it comes to listening.”

“But you’re the ones who are tempting him with alcohol even though you know he shouldn’t drink any, right?” You frown.

“Huh? No way… We wouldn’t do that, right, Mingyu?” Junhui hums.

“S– Sure! Going out for a drink doesn’t necessarily mean alcohol… It can be water.” Mingyu says, trying to cover his ass.

“Gyu!” Junhui whispers loudly, “What do you have to say it like that?! It sounds suspicious as hell!”

“What can I say?” Mingyu shrugs, “I hate lying.”

“Enough!” You interrupt them, “If you don’t respect the rules then Soonyoung’s wound isn’t going to heal!”

“Hey!” Soonyoung says quickly, “I’m not the one fooling around with my injury!”

“True! Seungkwan participates in sword fighting lessons every day!” Junhui nods in agreement.

“Captain Boo does…?!” You take a moment to calm your breathing, “OK… So as soon as I’m done cleaning Soonyoung’s wound, I’ll pay a visit to him.”

“That paste medicine?” Soonyoung winces, “I hate that stuff.”

“Maybe,” you begin to reach for the medicine bag on your back. “But it works wonders so come here.”

After you’re done treating his wound, you go to look for Seungkwan loitering around the compound, but for some reason you can’t seem to find him. It’s not like he’s on patrol– the commander had deemed him too injured for that right now. As you round one of the compound’s hallways you do find yourself almost smacking into him.

“Oh, hey,” Seungkwan greets you as you reel backwards in surprise. “What are you up to, cleaning?”

“That’s the least of my concerns!” You say, noticing that he wasn’t wearing his normal lounging clothes, “You know I was supposed to come and check on your injury, where were you?”

“Ah,” he sighs sheepishly, “The kids from the merchant district wanted to play so I went out with them.”

“You went out–? I told you to rest and not move until your injury was healed.”

“You’re exaggerating,” he waves his hand to dismiss your statement, “It’s not like my wound is going to get worse just because I played jegichagi.”

“You don’t know that! You could be bleeding from inside your stomach, or your organs might be damaged!” You don’t relent, pressing him further. “I also heard you’ve been going to sword practice every day.”

“Right,” he nods simply, “If I don’t practice, then I’m going to get weak.”

“But if you don’t recover, you may never be able to practice again,” You counter.

“Okay, okay,” Seungkwan sighs, “Then hurry up and take care of me.”

𝔍𝔲𝔩𝔶 23𝔯𝔡, 661 - 𝔖𝔥𝔬𝔰𝔥𝔦𝔫 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 You find yourself in a similar predicament a few days later when you fail to find either Soonyoung or Seungkwan roaming about the compounds. Yet, you’re a bit thankful as you’re running low on medical supplies and you need permission from Jihoon to go and purchase more.

“Medicine shopping?” The commander questions you once you’d found him in his quarters.

A nod, “For Captain Boo and Soonyoung. I was going to ask another captain but it seems as if they’re all on patrol…”

“Then do you want me to tag along?” He asks and you look at him, a bit surprised.

“You, Commander…?”

“Normally I’d ask Chan to do this, but he’s currently investigating something for me,” Jihoon explains, “We’ve got a lot of injured men, no one’s really free to go.”

“But surely you must be very busy too…” You murmur, feeling bad if you have to pull him away from work. There are piles of papers on his desk, which you suppose have been sent from the Crown, the Guard, and the Watch. “I was writing a report about the incident at Wonweol, but it’s fine. I should take a break anyway.”

You give him a small smile, “Well, thank you for coming with me.”

The two of you traverse the streets of Seorabeol together. While you hop from merchant to merchant, you try to keep an eye out for anyone that looks like your father but come up empty-handed.

Jihoon sighs as you pay a merchant for some powdered poria, “We still can’t find him…” Even after asking a few of the merchants, they hadn’t come across anyone like your father. Seeing your glum expression he notes, “We will find him eventually. Don’t give up hope.”

“Alright,” you nod as the two of you walk away from the storefront.

Jihoon always appears very strict but when he speaks like this you see a glimpse of his gentler self.

“After the Wonweol incident, it seems like the loyalists have toned it down a bit,” he nods, “The rounds are going to be less dangerous for a while. So you can join the captains again and search for Heo, if you’d like.”

The grip you have on the parcel of medicine tightens, until now you’d stayed behind on the patrols in fear of something happening. With Jihoon’s words, you grow a bit more at ease with the thought of leaving.

“I think we’ve known you for long enough now to trust that you wont run,” he nods with a smile after noting your reaction, “I don’t want to brag but I’m fairly good at reading people… Anyway, where should we go next? Did you get all of the medicine you needed?”

“Oh, right!” You bring out the list of herbs from your robes, “I actually need some ginseng root…”

After you have finished purchasing everything you require, the two of you head back to the headquarters.

“Bandages here… And this one is for wounds…” You mutter to yourself as you rummage through the medicine supply room, storing everything purchased today.

“What’s that?” Jihoon asks as he peers over your shoulder.

“A decoction for curing summer sickness, I think it has gokaju in it…” You note, popping the lid from the pitcher and wincing at the alcoholic scent.

“Don’t keep it in plain sight, the warriors will smell it and take it,” Jihoon sighs, knowing how the rowdier men are. “Hide it somewhere.”

“Ah, right.” You nod, beginning to look for an ideal hiding spot. Looking around the space, you see shattered remnants of storage containers littered in the corners of the closet, “Maybe I should clean up first. If it’s dirty I don’t know how well things will keep in here.”

“Sounds like a lot of work,” Jihoon notes, “And it’s a lot of furniture to move in here…”

“Don’t worry about it, I’ll be–”

“Ask the free warriors to help you, you shouldn’t overdo it.” He interrupts.

As nice of a thought as it is, you know everyone is probably very busy at the moment. “No,” shake your head, “I’ll be alright on my own. Everyone else has more important things to do.”

“You’re sure you’re okay with it?” He asks with a raised brow.

“Yes,” you nod enthusiastically, “I’ll be done in no time!”

“Fine,” he says a bit reluctantly, “I’ll be in my room. Let me know if you need anything.” After you assure him you’ll be alright he spins on his heels, returning to his quarters.

It takes you what feels like years, but you eventually get the closet into a somewhat presentable condition. Things had been missorted into the yakjang and it had taken you nearly an hour to sort through the drawers.

The door behind you swings open and you hear Jihoon ask, “How’s it going?”

“I’m finished with the chest here and the corners… but there’s something strange…” As soon as the words leave you, you hear the pittering sound of an animal’s footsteps in the ceiling.

“Are you kidding me– Mice?” Jihoon’s eyes widen as he looks upwards.

“Probably,” you sigh, “I’ll take a look.”

“Be careful–” he says as you reach for the ladder that accompanies the shelf, it should get you high enough where you can look at the beams that support the roof. You climb up it, raising one of the boards of the ceiling once you reach the top.

As soon as you open it, you’re startled by a mouse darting out and you begin to fall off of the ladder, “Ah–!”

“Watch out!” Jihoon shouts as you begin to fall towards the floor. Surprisingly, though, you don’t hit the ground. There’s a jerk and you open your eyes to see that Jihoon had caught you mid fall, his hands holding your hips as he steadies you on the ladder.

As soon as the fear subsides, your blood rushes and your heart begins to pound hard against your chest.

“Are you okay?” He asks softly.

You find yourself still dazed, never have had a man touch you like this even if it was for your safety. “I’m so sorry!” You say quickly as your face warms.

“Are you able to grab back onto the ladder? Or should I guide you to the floor?”

“Ah,” you say, trying to move but realize the hem of your sleeve caught between two of the rough wooden boards of the ceiling, “My sleeve…” You try several times without success to free yourself.

“Hey, stop wiggling so much!” Jihoon says and his grip tightens to hold you in place.

“R–Right…” You meekly say and try once more to free your sleeve. Eventually, it pulls out and you manage to get yourself back onto the floor. “I– I’m really sorry about that.”

“There’s nothing you have to apologize for,” Jihoon says quickly, “It wasn’t on purpose.”

“I know,” you murmur, “But it’s because I was careless.”

His arms cross, “Just be careful next time and you’ll be fine. It’s a good thing I just happened to walk by. You could’ve injured yourself if you were alone.”

“I’ll be careful,” the heat in your face isn’t residing, moreso out of embarrassment now.

The air hangs awkwardly between the two of you now. It takes a moment for him to speak again, “So… Are you done cleaning?”

“I am,” you say far too quickly. “I just need to put away the ladder and I’ll be done.”

“I’ve got it,” he says, reaching out for the ladder and moving it back to its corner. You note that Jihoon’s behavior is a bit off, not like his controlled, usual self. Perhaps he’s concerned about what happened earlier. “All done,” he says.

“Thank you for your help.”

“I should be thanking you,” he smiles, “You cleaned up this hellhole of a closet… Thanks. Now take the rest of the day off.”

“I will,” you return the smile gratefully, “Don’t worry about me.”

“Hm,” his expression drops and you furrow your brow. “I wish the injured warriors could take after you and rest when asked to.”

“It would make things much easier, wouldn’t it?”

“Yeah,” he laughs, “But most of them aren’t the obedient type anyway… Well, if everything’s fine here, I’m heading back to my room.”

“Please do,” you say, noting how tired he looks. It must be taxing to keep a hold on the men who can be so carefree and hot headed at times. Perhaps you’ll stop by his room later with some tea.

𝔄𝔲𝔤𝔲𝔰𝔱 2𝔫𝔡, 661 - 𝔖𝔥𝔬𝔰𝔥𝔦𝔫 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 Ever since the raids on both Wonweol and Jeolin Inn, the Hwarang had become stricter on their rounds around Seorabeol, looking for and capturing any of the Baekje revivalists that had escaped that night. Rumors had begun to plague the streets that the loyalists were looking for revenge on those who tried to stop their rebellion. On top of that, the Hwarang were under harsh scrutiny of their opposers in the Crown’s court. Despite them having stopped a meeting that was calling for the kidnapping of Silla’s monarch, a fact you had come to learn of after the raids.

Yet as the days creeped more lethargically into the summer, it seems as if the tensions that had arisen earlier in the season were dying down. Life was somewhat steady again. And due to your efforts during the battle, the Hwarang were growing more receptive and encouraging of your involvement with them. A small victory, for sure, but you were now allowed to complete chores in solitude now rather than being watched over by one of the captains. That’s where you find yourself now, sweeping away the dust that had accumulated in the overnight winds in front of the complex.

You’re humming to yourself, brushing the boom atop the agate stone of the entrance when you hear gentle footsteps walking up the stairs to the main gate.

“Excuse me,” a soft voice calls out to you, “Is this the Hwarang headquarters?”

You look up from your work, your lips parting in mild surprise at seeing a familiar face, “It is.” After staring at him for a second longer than what was probably considered adequate, you pose your own question, “Haven’t we met before?”

“Ah, yes- hello,” the man smiles at you, the sunlight glimmering off of the purple silk of his robes, “It’s been a while since the tea shop, hasn’t it?”

This was the unknown man that had stepped in to confront Kangjoon for you earlier this year. It didn’t look as if he’d changed much, that happy-go-lucky aura still exuding from him as he stands in front of you.

“It has,” you return the smile, “Thank you again for helping out that day.”

“It’s no problem,” he says quietly, “Like I said that day, it was my pleasure. In any case, I’m glad to see that you’re doing well.”

It’s not until this moment that you realize that he’d called you by name the last you’d met. You can’t recall giving him it, but your memory was still a little frazzled from that day.

“I’m sorry for not asking you your name despite all you did for me and those people,” you say quickly, remembering how Jihoon had been agitated that you’d forgotten to ask the man his name.

His eyes shine for a moment, a faint melancholy in his voice as he responds, “My name is Lee Seokmin.”

It strikes you as a rather pretty name, or maybe it was because he’d said it so lightly. Regardless, you nod your head in understanding, “How can I help you?”

“Ah, well,” his eyes keep shifting from you to the Hwarang’s main building. You conclude he was here on some sort of business to discuss with the Hwarang. Seeing as the last you’d met, Seokmin had defended the tea shop against a rambunctious member of the group, you wonder if he’s here to report Kangjoon to the higher-ups.

As if he had telepathic means to tell if you’d strayed away from your task, the front entrance of the hall swings open, Jihoon standing in the doorway. He looks from you to Seokmin and then back to you, pausing as if to let you speak.

“Commander,” eyebrows raising in surprise, “This is-”

Before you could finish speaking, Seokmin almost gleefully runs to the commander.

“I knew it!” Seokmin says, an unhidden delight in his words as he smiles at Jihoon, “It’s me, Seokmin, long time no see!”

“Y- Wait, Seokmin?” Jihoon looks surprised as the other announces himself, “What are you doing here?!”

A laugh from Seokmin, “Are you surprised? I’m visiting Seorabeol with the Crown’s orders.” He waves his hand, “But forget about that. I can’t believe it was you connected to the Hwarang! I couldn’t believe it until I saw it with my own eyes. Congratulations, you really followed your and Hoseok’s dream.”

The name lingers in the air heavily for a moment between the two, you’ve never heard of a Hoseok before. Looking at the two of them, it must’ve been at least an acquaintance of theirs.

Jihoon doesn’t let the weight last, breaking it with a small smile. “Come on, if I were to fully do that, I’d be a general by now. The Hwarang aren’t treated much better than the city guard at this point.”

“Still,” a somewhat nostalgic look in Seokmin’s eye, “I’m sure he’d be happy either way. The Hwarang are famous in Seorabeol and gaining even more notoriety in other cities. With the raids last month, you’ve gained even more popular support.”

Jihoon looks humble for a second, breaking his gaze with Seokmin to look at the ground. “We’re still working on that,” he mumbles out as the other laughs at him.

It was an odd thing to see Jihoon flustered, you’d only seen a mild variant of his embarrassment when Seungkwan would really get under his skin. But you’ve never seen his cheeks go flush before. With Seokmin’s teasing and knowledge of something that seemed to have happened years ago, it would suggest that they’ve known each other for a while. Are they good friends?

Once you sense their conversation coming to a lull, you speak up, “Commander, this was the warrior that helped me with Kangjoon at the tea shop a while ago.”

“I see,” Jihoon muses and turns to look at Seokmin, “Sorry for her causing trouble, well, I suppose you saw something you shouldn’t have.”

“It’s alright,” Seokmin nods, “I was just passing by for personal reasons. I didn’t report it.”

“Thanks for that,” the commander offers a smile of appreciation. His gaze looks to the cloudless, sunny sky for a moment, “We don’t need to talk outside like this, why don’t you come in?”

As the two make their way inside, you set the broom that was still in your hands next to the doorway and scurry off to the kitchen. You return to them some while later holding a tray of tea and assorted goods for them. After you’d set down the tray, Jihoon told you to stay, so you take a seat a little way away from where the two are conversing.

“You said you’re here on Crown orders? What are you here for?” Jihoon asks, his hand hovering over his steaming cup of tea.

“I’m currently working in one of the Sodang units.” Seokmin explains. He goes on to say a few more things about his duties, but you are unfamiliar with a majority of the lingo they use, so you try to follow along to the best of your ability.

Jihoon, glancing at you and seeing your viable confusion, says, “He’s in the Naegeumwi, entrusted with protecting King Munmu and his family.”

“Oh wow,” you look at Seokmin, “I’m honored to meet someone with such a high ranking.”

“Please,” it’s the same humbled tone he’d used at the tea shop, “I only acquired this position because of the connections my father has.”

“Why would someone with his rank need to visit the Hwarang?” You question Jihoon. While the Hwarang worked under the Crown, there was no direct connection, whereas it seems as if Seokmin works quite literally with the king.

“Are you asking why he’d know a bunch of washed-up nobles and commoners like us?” Jihoon asks, almost teasingly. You nod gently, so as to not offend him. “You see, not only is Seokmin in the Naegeumwi, but his father’s father was Lee Alcheon.” Once again noting your confusion he clarifies, “A Sangdaedeung under Queen Jindeok some years ago. He opened a prestigious school after his time in office, and now Seokmin here is the heir to it. The school I attended socialized often with the Lee school and that’s how I came to meet him.”

“That’s right,” Seokmin nods, “When I heard that I was heading to Seorabeol I knew that I had to find Jihoon.” His eyes shine with admiration towards the aforementioned, but the commander just scoffs and rolls his eyes at him.

“Flattery won’t get you anywhere, Lee,” Jihoon sighs, “And remember: Seorabeol isn’t exactly a relaxing getaway.”

“I’ll keep that in mind… However, even if it is dangerous, it seems even a woman can join the Hwarang?” Seokmin looks at you coyly before returning his gaze to the commander. He judges both the surprised look and glare from Jihoon for a moment before raising his hand to his mouth in surprise, “Was that supposed to be a secret?” He waits a moment, seeing as there’s no answer, he continues, “It’s not difficult to tell. I mean it’s not her fault.”

“I know,” Jihoon’s probably recalling the first he’d met you; he’d been one of the first to figure it out, “Only a fool couldn’t see.” He resigns himself into a sigh, “Her reasons for being here are somewhat complicated, so we’re having her dress as a man for now. Only a handful of men in the Hwarang know of her circumstance, so I’d prefer if you didn’t speak about it in front of anyone.”

“I understand,” the guard agrees, “would it be too much to ask the reasons for her staying here?”

“Her father is missing, so we’re allowing her to cooperate with our investigation,” Jihoon sets his hand around the now cooled teacup, bringing it to his lips and drinking the contents slowly.

“Her father-” Seokmin’s brow furrows, “You’re talking about Heo Jinsang?” The second the name leaves his lips, the hairs on the back of your neck stand on end. How was it that he knew everything?

“How do you know his name?!” You can’t help but blurt out.

“Wait a minute,” It seems like the commander was also shocked by the revelation that Seokmin knew who Heo Jinsang was. He sets his teacup down onto the tray with a small clatter before looking bewildered at the guard. “How do you know her father is Heo?”

“I visited the Heo Clinic a long time ago,” Seokmin explains and then looks towards you and asks in a timid voice, “Do you not remember me?”

It clicks for you, so that’s how he knew your name and father. You search his eyes for a moment, nothing sparking a memory of him from your childhood. “Were you a patient of my father’s?”

“No,” Seokmin offers you somewhat of a forlorn smile at your response, “I was interested in Tang medicine when I was younger, so I went to your father’s clinic to study.”

“I see…” still trying to recall his face, you nod your head.

“Don’t worry though, I’m sure you’ll be seeing more of me.”

“What?” Jihoon interrupts, “What are you talking about? You don’t have to keep coming back here.”

“Don’t be like that, Jihoon,” He laughs at the commander and glances back at you, “We’re both from Gochang, we're buddies.” Seokmin then moves to get a little closer to the commander, clearly trying to fluster the elder. Normally Jihoon was composed and tried to keep himself together, seeing him easily behave like this was somewhat amusing. It’s almost as if he was enjoying himself.

The three of you talking must’ve drawn the attention of the captains, because as Seokmin was teasing the commander some more, they slowly began to filter in.

“Seokmin!” Junhui says as he sees the guard, running over to him and throwing an arm around his shoulder, “I thought you’d said you’d visit sooner!”

“We thought we heard your voice somewhere, Wen thought he was hallucinating,” Mingyu notes as he greets Seokmin.

“Junhui, Mingyu,” a smile curling onto Seokmin’s lips at Junhui relinquishes him from his grasp, “And everyone else! Long time no see.”

“Can’t believe you’re in Seorabeol too now, are you here to train?” Junhui asks.

“Don’t be stupid, Wen. I bet he’s here to protect something or someone important, right?” Soonyoung questions as he looks to the guard.

A breathy chuckle from Seokmin, “It’s… something like that.”

“If you’re in Seorabeol, then it must’ve been a good job offer.” Hansol notes, as he looks at Seokmin.

Seokmin nods silently to affirm him while Seungkwan speaks up, “If that’s the case: be careful. Don’t be stupid and go off dying on us.”

“Thank you for the warning,” Seokmin looks to the elder, “I’ll keep that in mind.”

“We should go drinking to celebrate someday, hell, we could go now if you want!” Junhui shouts out, eager to get out of the headquarters for a bit.

The rest of the captains surround Seokmin for a while, immersing themselves in conversation and banter with the guard as he, too, seems to get lost in it all. So, he really did know all of them.

“Despite him being in the Naegeumwi, and heir of his grandfather’s school…” Jihoon’s eyes hold a fond warmth as he looks onto the commotion happening in the room. “He doesn’t hold that over the heads of the ranks lower than him. No one can escape his amiable nature.” The commander then turns to you, “Whenever he visits, be sure to let him in.”

“Alright,” you nod, not bothered by that order at all. Seokmin seemed to bring a warmth to the Hwarang men that you hadn’t seen too often, it was probably good for them.

The men spent an exorbitant amount of time regaling about memories and incidents that had happened with their friend, and before they or you knew it, evening descended upon the compound with the orange glow of the setting sun. Seokmin notes this at one point and says he has to depart back to his duties.

“When I return to Gochang I’ll ask about Heo,” The guard notes as he steps out of the front entranceway with Jihoon. You stand a few feet away from them and listen quietly to their conversation.

“If you want to,” Jihoon nods in agreement, “Be sure to not tell anyone about our investigation.”

“Of course,” Seokmin nods and glances over to you as if to affirm himself, “My lips are sealed.”

As the three of you begin to make your farewells, from around the thicket of trees and down the walkway that leads to the entrance of the headquarters, you can hear the approaching steps of a returning group of Hwarang. They’re probably returning from their evening rounds, but you’re not sure who was on patrol today.

“You’re- You’re that bastard from the tea shop, aren’t you?!” One of them freezes in their tracks before angrily storming over to the three of you. Almost instantly you recognize the voice and face of Suh Kangjoon. He stands before Seokmin, his voice irate, “Why the hell are you here?”

Seokmin looks at him, his voice reserved and questioning, “I don’t know what you’re talking about. I don’t think we’ve been acquainted yet.”

“Are you trying to mock me?” Kangjoon huffs, you’re sure if it were colder outside his breath would escape him in large plumes of white. “Name yourself!”

“I am a member of Gochang’s Sodang unit under the Naegeumwi, my name is Lee Seokmin.” The guard states stoically, no inflection to his voice in trying to sound superior or below the man in front of him.

“A Naegeumwi… Lee…” It’s almost as if Kangjoon’s trying to piece together a puzzle, “Are you from Lee Alcheon’s-?”

“Yes. I’m here in Seorabeol on official business.” Seokmin states calmly, “As I had some free time, I’ve come to visit my friends from Kwak Hall.”

“Don’t lie to me! You’ve come to spread malicious rumors about the last time we met!” Kangjoon barks, his chest puffing out as if to intimidate Seokmin.

The guard doesn’t seem in the least bit phased as he responds, “I have come here to see my friends, nothing more.” Seokmin shifts his weight from foot to foot as he brings his hand up to his chin in faux ponderance, “Or… Would you rather me remind you of what occurred when I last saw you?”

His eyes sharpen at the Hwarang, who seems to have been taken aback by the statement.

“If you say so,” the Hwarang cedes, realizing that he was in no place to argue with the commander of his organization listening quietly in on their conversation. “We’re settled. I’ll be on my way.” His voice holds a semblance of respect as he walks away with the handful of other Hwarang he’d arrived with.

Despite the situation escalated by Kangjoon alone, Seokmin seems rather relaxed as he watches the Hwarang storm off into the compound. You only let out a sigh of relief when Kangjoon leaves your line of sight, you weren’t aware you’d been holding your breath.

“Jihoon,” Seokmin asks, a small frown on his lips as he turns back to the commander, “Who is that man?”

“His name is Suh Kangjoon,” the commander’s arms cross as he lets out a sigh, knowing full well how problematic the Hwarang is. “He’s a captain from the Hanseong unit who’s come to stay with us for the time being. I’m sorry about him, I’ll make sure he doesn’t bother you anymore.”

“I’ll be alright but,” Seokmin looks at you before returning his attention to Jihoon, “Keep an eye on her. I’m sure if he found out she was here it wouldn’t go over well.”

“I’ll try to drop by again soon,” Seokmin smiles, a twinkle in his eyes, before he turns on his heels and heads towards the city. You watch him as he leaves, his tall figure becoming smaller and smaller with every step before he eventually disappears down the pathway.

Even if he was an important person and a friend of the Hwarang, he was an enigma to you. Seokmin was assuredly high amongst the bone-ranks, maybe even higher than the Hwarang’s commander, yet upheld himself with integrity and mindfulness to everyone he came across. You’d never been made aware of a noble that was like that before, most adhering to the rigid structure of the realm.

𝔄𝔲𝔤𝔲𝔰𝔱 15𝔱𝔥, 661 - 𝔖𝔢𝔬𝔯𝔞𝔟𝔢𝔬𝔩, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 It’s hot. Blazingly so. The city is blanketed by a heat so unknown to you that you found yourself perspiring as you awoke that morning. You’d thought you’d been sick until you walked into the main hall and saw the other captains in a similar state to yourself. There was nothing to be done about it except for staying in the shade or perhaps cooling off by a river.

Yet, that’s not what was in store for you. Ever since your actions on the nights of the inn raids, Jihoon has been much more forgiving in his attitude, allowing you to resume your patrols with the captains. And seeing as Kim Mingyu was about to head out, you decided to tag along.

You regret that decision almost immediately when you step onto the city’s streets, the crowds not doing anything to damper the rays of sun beaming down onto you.

“Mingyu?” You ask as the two of you walk down the street, “The Hwarang patrol both night and day, right?”

“They do,” he nods, wiping the sweat that had accumulated around the headband on his forehead, “Why?”

“Why is it that you do? Wouldn’t that be more of the city guard’s job?” You question as you pass by an armory, the heat of its fires only causing you to perspire more.

“Because most of the city guard’s been called to the front,” his shoulders shrug, “Emperor Gaozong called them to help his forces root out Gogoryeo last month, so they’ve had a decline in their numbers… I’m not sure when they’ll be back, I heard the King was leading generals to Siigok Garrison so I can only assume it’ll be a while.”

“So, you’ve become the city guard then?”

“I mean, in a way,” he thinks, “We arrest thieves, people who’re looking for fights and who don’t pay for their meals. And then there are those who think they’ll just mooch off merchants...”

It wasn’t fully the answer you’d been expecting, maybe along the lines of it. The adoption of the guard’s role was something new, but you couldn’t fault them for it if the city needed their swords. Before you’re able to continue to question him, a few men in Hwarang blues down the road seem to be trying to wave Mingyu down. Getting closer to the scene, you can make out Junhui’s figure and a few more Hwarang men.

“Hey!” He smiles as the two of you stand before him, he looks to you before asking, “Find anything about your dad?”

“No,” a small shake of your head, “Nothing yet.”

“Ah, cheer up,” he says, gently hitting you on the arm as he sees your downtrodden frown, “There’s always tomorrow.”

“You’re right,” pepping up slightly at his words. Junhui seems to be able to energize and lighten the mood whenever someone was feeling low, it was something you’d noticed over the course of getting to know him. It was almost as if his optimism was contagious.

“Did you find anything fun, Junhui?” Mingyu questions, probably wondering if there was any more reason for Junhui flagging you down other than wanting to say hello.

“Nothing in particular…” Junhui admits, “But, all of the people on this street are acting really busy.”

You think he’s being a little over dramatic, but a closer observation of the pedestrians and shopkeepers has you thinking a little more critically. There was almost a nervousness, an anxiety, threading itself through the air and in their movements.

“It looks like they’re… packing up?” You observe, eyeing one merchant in particular boxing away his things.

“You think they’re worried about the war with Gogoryeo or the Baekje guys?” Mingyu asks Junhui, crossing his arms.

“I thought that the Baekje threat was resolved...?” You say, looking from Mingyu to Junhui, confusion seeped into your voice.

The taller rests his hand atop the hilt of his sword, “We didn’t tell you, did we? Those Baekje bastards have been showing up again, that’s why we’ve been having extra rounds.”

“Even if we did weaken them at Wonweol,” Mingyu frowns, “I can’t really imagine them standing idly around when we’ve put some of their men in the ground. And now that the king’s absent… it’s a little trickier for us.”

“Were the loyalists planning on doing something?” You ask, the way Mingyu had spoken leads you to believe something had been in the works.

“Not sure,” Junhui says with a shake of his head, “Other than what we found out after the raids we haven’t gotten wind of anything else.”

“It doesn’t matter, though,” Mingyu notes, “All we’ve got to do is do our jobs. The loyalists attack Seorabeol, we drive them out. It’s as simple as that.” The Hwarang just accept the cards they’re dealt and never seem to complain.

“If the loyalists continue their stunts then we’re probably going to get orders from the king to do something whenever he gets back,” Junhui sighs, not knowing how long the sovereign would be out of the capital.

“What do you think he’d decree?” A tilt of your head as you ask, unknowing what more he could make the Hwarang do.

“In the past the Hwarang have fought almost as their own regiment, he might do that.” Junhui shrugs, his hand moving from his sword and down to his side.

“That doesn’t happen too often,” Mingyu nods almost approvingly and then turns to you with a joking smile, “You should join us.”

You laugh at the sudden invitation, knowing full well the offer isn’t real. Seeing as the female version of the Hwarang, the Wonhwa, had been thrown away since before the Hwarang themselves were even conceptualized, it was a long shot to think that you could march along their ranks. As much as you want to help these men, you’re not sure that they’d fully accept you into their ranks. But if you could aid them like you had on the night of the raids on the two inns, you wouldn’t mind doing something like that again.

“If you want me to go with you, I wouldn’t be opposed,” you shoot back to Mingyu, cracking a small smile at him. “If you need me to help, I’ll do whatever I can.”

His smile deepens, the dimples on his cheeks beginning to show, “I’ll be sure to keep that in mind if the time comes.”

𝔄𝔲𝔤𝔲𝔰𝔱 18𝔱𝔥, 661 - 𝔖𝔢𝔬𝔯𝔞𝔟𝔢𝔬𝔩, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 “Excuse me,” you say quietly as you make your way into the main hall, the wooden handle of the teapot in your grasp coarse on your palm. The heat of its contents rising to try and weaken your grip on the vessel. “I brought you all some more tea.”

The Hwarang captains and men sit in various spots around the hall, you’re not sure why they’re convening, but they’d been in there for at least an hour discussing some matter at hand.

“Thanks!” Junhui calls out and beckons you over, he takes the pot from your hands and begins to pour tea into his already halfway filled cup, “It’s almost like you’re our servant or something.”

More so a page, but you weren’t going to correct him quite yet. You take back the pot and look around for anyone who might need a refill. Spotting Eunseok trying to catch your eye, you make your way over and fill his cup.

“Thank you,” he says once you’re finished, quickly bringing the cup to his lips, and blowing on the warm contents.

“It’s no problem,” you smile, voice barely above a whisper as you try not to disrupt the main conversation flowing throughout the hall. As you’re about to move away, Seungkwan swipes the pot from your grasp, pouring his own cup of tea and taking a drink of it. His face contorts for a moment and you question, “Does it not taste good?”

“It tastes fine, I guess,” his shoulders shrug as he leans back in his seat, “It could stand to be a little warmer though, maybe you’re just taking too long to pour it.”

“Oh,” you frown, taking the pot back from him, holding your free hand to the side of the vessel for a moment to test the warmth, “I’ll go and brew some more.”

“Don’t worry about it,” Soonyoung butts in, motioning for you to hand him the pot, “I like it lukewarm because it’s easier to drink, right, Hansol?”

“Right,” the aforementioned captain nods, “It’s easier to drink on a hot day like this.”

It looks as if Soonyoung’s about to speak again before Youngmin barges into the hall, a stoic expression drawn onto his face.

“The Hwarang have received an official request from the Crown to head to Ongsan Fortress. All available men must get ready to set out at once,” Youngmin says, a sternness in his voice hinting at a notion of pride somewhere hidden away in its depths. There’s general excitement beginning to buzz among the Hwarang before he continues, “It seems as if they’ve noticed all of our hard work as of late.” It’s then he lets himself break out into a prideful smile; it was clear he was proud of the work the Hwarang had achieved in the past few weeks.

As you scan the faces of the room, there was one in particular that has a sour expression forming as Youngmin finishes.

“We don’t have time to celebrate,” Jihoon says, rising to his feet, “We need to get moving now, so get off of your asses and go!” The captains and other men then begin to follow his lead and stand, “Those loyalists are already in Seorabeol, we need to cut the head off of this snake before it lays any more eggs.”

Once the men filter out and it’s only you and the captains, Jihoon speaks up, “Only when there’s somewhere else to go they tell us to haul ass?” He shakes his head, “We may not be the Guard or the Watch, but it doesn’t mean we’re any less expendable.”

“Soonyoung and Seungkwan,” Seungcheol says after Jihoon’s done mumbling to himself, “You’ll remain here. I know it’s not what you want, but your injuries from Wonweol are still preventing you from active duty.” You glance to his hand, knowing full well that the colonel would be staying behind as well.

“Speak for yourself,” Seungkwan frowns, clearly perturbed by the orders, “It’s not like my injuries didn’t recover. But I’m not at peak performance, even I can realize that. So, if you want me to hang back, I guess I can…”

“That’s bullshit!” Adversely, Soonyoung points to his forehead, the cut he’d received during the raids still an angry pink where the skin had been slashed. “This is just a scratch, Kwak’s just being too careful.”

“Are you being serious?” Mingyu scoffs at the younger, “I heard you in your room crying about how much it hurt still last night.”

“You bastard,” Soonyoung pouts, “Don’t you want me out there with you guys?”

“Oh, believe me, I do, Kwon.” Mingyu shakes his head, chuckling, “I just want you at your best. Not crying into your pillow because of a scratch. Even you heard him, right?” He looks to you for affirmation.

“HEY!” Soonyoung whines, you think he’s going to clamp his hand over Mingyu’s mouth but the older moves away before he can. “Don’t ask her! And can you try to keep your mouth shut for a little while?” Soonyoung then gives you a sideways glance as if to ask if you really had heard him complaining yesterday.

“...Your injury still hasn’t healed, Soonyoung.” You don’t explicitly admit that you heard his grumblings, even though you had. The band he normally wears with the Hwarang insignia hides the scar well, but without it, like he is now, it’s a stark reminder that he isn’t quite ready for the front lines again.

“Hm, you said you wanted to go with us if we ever got the orders, didn’t you?” Junhui interrupts the lull in the room as he asks you a question. “Are you still up for that?”

Even if you said that you’d join Junhui and Mingyu when you were out with them the other day, you thought you’d been joking, or half-joking at least. It would be risky if you did join them.

“I don’t see any reason why you can’t tag along,” Youngmin says with a nod of his head, “Opportunities for the Hwarang to move under Crown command alone are rare.” While he’s supposed to be the leader of the Hwarang, Kwak Youngmin was very easily swayed by his men’s words.

“What?” Soonyoung says, almost confused as he looks from Junhui to Mingyu. “If she’s going with you, then maybe it isn’t such a bad idea for me to tag along too, right?”

“You’re still not where you need to be,” Junhui says, nudging the other with his elbow gently, “Just stay here and heal up.”

“Are you sure it’s okay that I go with you?” You ask, still not fully convinced they want you tagging along with them.

The captain and colonel sigh at your reservations.

“We can’t promise that you won’t get injured, or worse.” Jihoon says, a distressed glint in his eyes as he speaks to you, “I think you should stay here.”

“Staying here would be an undue burden on the rest of us that stay,” Seungcheol argues back, “We’re not here to be a source of entertainment for you.”

“Seungcheol…” Hansol speaks up, “So, as long as she’s not being burdensome, she’s free to go with us?”

Is he standing up for you? It seems to be the case as Seungcheol looks at him in surprise, his eyes widening at the captain.

“You’re really in favor of taking her along with you?” The colonel asks, his brow furrowing as he tries to understand the rationale.

“She was an asset to us as Wonweol,” Hansol’s shoulders shrug, “Taking that into consideration, I hardly believe that she can be considered a ‘burden’, when recalling that.”

“Great!” Youngmin exclaims, relinquishing the two from their conversation as his hands clap together. “I’ll take full responsibility for your inclusion, that is, if you want to go with us.”

“Do whatever you want to do,” almost as if he can sense your hesitation, Seungkwan speaks up. The two of you make eye contact, and a smaller version of the smirk he almost always has plastered on his face curls to his lips. “Just as long as you know that this is a battle you’re going to, not a party.”

Maybe you’d be able to help them out as you had on the night of the raids. It was a strong maybe, but you couldn’t let that hinder your decision making, could you?

“I’d like to participate,” you find the words falling from your lips before you have the thought of saying them in the first place. Perhaps it was your subconscious speaking for what you truly want.

𝔄𝔲𝔤𝔲𝔰𝔱 24, 661 - 𝔒𝔲𝔱𝔰𝔦𝔡𝔢 𝔬𝔣 𝔒𝔫𝔤𝔰𝔞𝔫, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 (𝔣𝔬𝔯𝔪𝔢𝔯 𝔅𝔞𝔢𝔨𝔧𝔢 𝔰𝔱𝔯𝔬𝔫𝔤𝔥𝔬𝔩𝔡) Entering the territory of the former kingdom is more eye opening to you than you had ever thought it would be. Rather than the calmness that had been exemplified by the King’s announcements back in Silla, there is an anxious tension wrought in the villages and towns as the Hwarang sweep through. Even though they were only passing by the inhabitants would warily gaze upon you, the captains, and the rest of the men as if to gauge how hostile their new countrymen would be.

The main goal is to reach Ongsan, a former Baekje fortress that stands on the border between the two Kingdoms. It seems as if the same group of loyalists from Seorabeol had taken over the now-emptied armament and claimed it as their headquarters. The Crown assigned the Hwarang the mission of expelling them, in a way of their gratitude for their performance on the night of the Wonweol and Jeolin Inn raids.

Judging from what the captains were saying this morning, it seems as if you’re not too far from your destination. You don’t know the layout of this land, the towns unfamiliar and the faces just as so.

For the most part, the men have been silent, only the odd gripe from one of the Hwarang. The absence of both Seungkwan and Soonyoung are notable, their voices seeming to fill in large gaps of silence when in attendance. It’s not until your troupe stops in front of a walled gate, presumably leading into a city, that Youngmin speaks up. Before the group stands a few other soldiers, from Silla by the looks of their armor.

“My name is Kwak Youngmin, leader of the Seorabeol Hwarang. I am here on orders from Kim Seokmin, an army general under His Majesty King Munmu.” He stands before an officer of the troupe that was already there.

Kim Seokmin is one of the most influential members of the Crown’s court. The father of Kim Mingyu and former Hwarang himself, he acquired favor from the kingship due to his efforts in a handful of Baekje rebellions in the decades prior.

The officer looks confused, his brow furrowing, “You were told to report here? Did you not meet with the men from Unghyeon?”

“Unghyeon?” You mouth the word in the same confusion the officer was expressing. It’s a Silla fortress some distance away from where you all stand now, it hadn’t been brought up in any conversation the Hwarang had had on their trek.

“Several generals and their troops were sent there to convene before the attack,” Hansol leans over to you and whispers, “If we were meant to meet with them, it’s most likely the message to tell us to do so was intercepted.”

“Does that mean they know we’re coming?” You ask quietly, looking around to the other captains to try and gauge what they’re thinking.

“It’s likely they’ve put the pieces together,” Hansol nods solemnly, “But I can’t imagine they have the numbers to rival both us and the other group.”

“This could still get messy, though,” you sigh, hoping the break in communication wouldn’t be but so impactful to the mission.

“Regardless of that, our aid has been formally requested,” Youngmin stands firm as he speaks to the officer, “If you could relay this to your commandi-”

“If that’s the case then I suggest you try and convene with the King’s garrison,” the officer states as he cuts off Youngmin, “We can’t let you in here because we have no idea what’s waiting on the other side.”

“Our orders say to stay stationed here,” Youngmin frowns, clearly frustrated with the lack of cooperation.

“There’s nothing we can do about this, Chief,” Hansol speaks up, stepping over to Youngmin. “If they won’t allow us access here, maybe it would be in our best interest to try and find the others.” It looks as if Hansol was going to suggest something else before Kangjoon interrupts.

“Find the others?” He shakes his head almost angrily, “Kim’s orders were to stay stationed here until we were signaled to enter the city. Why would we ignore a military command when we haven’t received anything to tell us to do otherwise? I think we should remain here on standby.”

“If this was a camp that we were stationed at, that might make sense, Suh.” Hansol states with a frown, “But this is, or very soon will be, the front lines of a battle.”

“Are you really trying to go against me?” Kangjoon nearly snarls back, the mere thought of someone going against his wishes enraging him, “Don’t forget that I’m the Hwarang’s War Counselor.”

“And I’m the leader,” Youngmin interjects, “Hansol’s made a good point. We’ll look for the other group’s camp and hopefully get a better understanding of the strategy at play.”

And with his words, the Hwarang begin to walk along the narrow pathway surrounding the fortress in search of the other group of generals and soldiers that are on their way from Unghyeon. Your group eventually finds the ally camp to the eastern front of the fortress, wooden spikes that had been hastily made surrounding it. A few soldiers come out to greet a few members of the Hwarang as you enter, they might be friends or family members who haven't seen each other in quite some time.

Almost as soon as you’d entered the camp, Youngmin is ushered into one of the tents to speak with a few generals. You’re not sure who’s in there, but with the pallid complexion of the Hwarang’s leader upon his exit, you can assume it had been higher ranks than he’d been expecting.

The orders are now to travel to the Southern Gate, the opposite end of where your original orders had been to go with a general and his troops.

“If these guys say anything, and I don’t think they will, just let me know, okay?” Junhui says as everyone begins to leave the encampment. “Park Kimsu’s not a friendly face around here.”

“What do you mean?” You ask, not noticing Mingyu saddling up beside you.

“What he means is, his father’s an enemy of my father,” Mingyu says, a gruffness to his voice as if he’s recalling something. “His father’s probably the one that sent the Watch out the night of the raids to try and take credit for what we did.”

“That and he’s a major prick,” Junhui adds, “I can’t imagine his men are much better.”

“Come on you guys,” Youngmin says as he slows his pace in front of you three, falling in line to your steps. “We can’t talk about them like that,” he contradicts his words by letting slip a sly smile for a few seconds before straightening his face and resuming his position at the front of the line.

By the time you all arrived and set up your small camp, night had fallen quickly, plunging the surrounding area into an inky black, save for the lights several fires dotted around the site provided. Youngmin, Jihoon and the captains had gone off to speak with Park Kimsu and his officers, leaving you and the rest of the Hwarang to sit around camp with little else to do.

They return what feels like hours later, their shoulders sagging and eyes looking tired as if they'd just run for that time instead of sitting in on a meeting. Eunseok, who had accompanied them, walks over to you with a small and lethargic smile.

“For the most part they’re being cooperative,” he sighs, “The only reason Kimsu was paired with us is because his father asked for it, though.”

“Why would he do that?” You ask a tilt of your head. Earlier, Mingyu has said that his and Kimsu’s families were something along the lines of enemies.

“I don’t know,” Eunseok shakes his head, “Maybe to rile us up? Regardless of that though, we’re here to watch over the gate and make sure no one escapes.”

“Regardless of that, they’re treating us like reserve troops,” Junhui’s voice is strained as he walks over, his arms high over his head as he stretches. Once he drops his arms down, he speaks up, “They’ve left smaller reserves around the South entrance because the biggest fight is going to happen at the North Gate.” He sounds a little disappointed, as if he were anticipating a big battle.

“We don’t know what they’ll do exactly,” Hansol says as he trails after him, “We may very well see battle.”

But that means waiting and seeing as the sun isn’t to rise for a long time, that means waiting overnight. As the crowds disperse and settle into their tents, you find that the Hwarang, at least, are sleeping in shifts so that if the call to arms were to come at night, there would be someone to rouse everyone else.

“You can rest your head on my shoulder if you need to,” Mingyu says as the two of you sit down to keep watch, the flames in front of you seem like they’re trying to lull you to sleep.

“I’m alright,” trying to stifle a yawn behind your hand as you shake your head. You’d feel wrong trying to sleep when you know these men could get called to face death at any moment.

A nervous anxiousness coils around your stomach until you find yourself falling asleep later in the night, not awaking until the sun’s barely peeking over the horizon. When you sit up from the laid down position you’d slept in, you notice that the men had kept a silent vigil all through the night. Even as you were drifting in and out of consciousness, you noted that there were men posted around the camp, looking for anything or anyone suspicious.

A little while later a large boom reverberates through the surrounding forest. You first think it’s a crack of lightning, or maybe the subsequent boom of thunder that succeeds it, but the sky is clear today, not a cloud in sight. It had echoed like thunder, startling the birds in the nearby trees, and causing more people than just you to jump in shock.

“What was that?” You question Hansol as he walks past you, seeming to look for someone coming in from outside of the camp.

“It looks like the main army is beginning to siege the fortress,” He says, his eyes narrowing as scans the tree-line. The soldiers and Hwarang within the camp are moving by now,

“Let’s get a move on!” Jihoon shouts out from somewhere deeper in the camp, his voice nearing as he continues to speak, “They’re not going to pause the fight until we get there, so get moving!”

“We were told to stay here,” Park Kimsu says as he emerges from his tent, probably stirred from the commotion outside. The general watches the scramble of men in the camp race for their weapons and armor for a moment before he turns to Jihoon, “You don’t command my men.”

“Our job is to siege the fortress, not sit on our asses and wait for this to pass by,” The commander bites back, he was almost yelling at the general. “We’re here to root out these loyalists, that won’t happen if we just stay here!”

“We haven’t even received orders to push!” Kimsu quips, his brow furrowing at the Hwarang.

“If you have any pride in your position, forget the damn orders and move your men,” Jihoon huffs, straightening the band around his forehead, “They aren’t going to willingly surrender.” The commander and general stare harshly at one another for a moment, almost as if they’re testing each other in a battle of wills. Jihoon, seeing as it was useless to try to neg the other any further, spins on his heels and begins to stalk off.

“Where are we going?” You whisper to Hansol as Jihoon passes by, muttering something to himself.

“To face the enemy head on,” He says quietly, “Which, in our case, means the Southern Gate. The main fight is meant to happen at the Northern Gate so I wouldn’t be surprised if they try to divide our numbers to get more support up there.”

“I see,” You nod, the same nervousness invading your veins once again, it was now riddled with an adrenaline that was probably the only thing making you think clearly.

Jihoon’s rage at the general seems to have roused the reserve troops, who now, instead of loitering around the camp, seem to be mostly readied up. Led by both Park Kimsu and Lee Jihoon, the army and the Hwarang march their way to the Southern Gate.

It was only a short trek to the destination, but the remains of skirmishes that seemed to have happened moments prior litter the ground. Soldiers, dead and dying, lay on the ground, chunks of wood from the gate lay in reddened splinters as arrows, both broken and intact, lay riddled where fragments of the gate’s doors once stood. The group that had come before you seems to have successfully made it into the city, but not without losses of their own. You can see both Baekje and Silla armor on the bodies of the fallen soldiers.

Even if you tried to mentally prepare yourself for what you might see, the reality of it all still shatters your heart.

Though the Baekje and Silla forces were nowhere to be seen, had your allies driven them further into the fortress? After a quick moment of assessment, Jihoon orders a few captains to investigate what happened, Youngmin sighing as he does so.

“Had we known a group of Silla warriors were coming in beforehand we would’ve joined them and lost fewer lives.” He frowns as he looks over the scene, looking up once he sees Hansol returning from his survey of the area.

“It looks like our forces attacked the gate earlier this morning, were repelled briefly before the flank on the Northern Gate began,” the captain recounts, looking to Jihoon, “After their forces were divided the army at the Southern Gate was able to advance into the fortress.”

“Do you have any word on what’s happening at the Northern Gate?” Jihoon questions, obviously beginning to silently plan a course of action.

“They’re still fighting,” Hansol nods, his hand resting on the hilt of his sword as if he can tell what Jihoon’s thinking, “The King’s garrison has yet to advance into Ongsan.”

“Lee!” Mingyu shouts out as he returns from his own survey of the area, running from the direction of the pass to reach the stronghold. “There’s supposedly Baekje reinforcements coming from the west as well, not many, but enough to make a dent in our numbers if we let them.”

Jihoon’s expression of confidence wavers momentarily as he listens to Kim as he approaches, but before he can comment on it, Chan also races over to the group of captains from surveying inside of the fortress.

“Commander,” he starts off, a thin sheen of sweat coating his brow, glinting in the daylight now hanging overhead, “It’s believed that the men who led this are heading for the heart of the fortress to try and kill the loyalists trying to run for it.”

The commander thinks after listening to the cumulative reports, contemplating as to what the next move should be. Although Youngmin is the recognized formal leader of the Hwarang, you’d come to learn the most major decisions were given to Jihoon to make. This was no exception, the crowd of captains anticipating his orders while Kimsu was speaking with his own men of what to do next.

“It looks like we’ve got our work cut out for us,” Jihoon’s lips curve into a small smile after a moment of silence. “Kim, take your men to the pass to deal with any incoming loyalists. Lee, Choi,” he turns to Chan and Hansol, “follow the men into the fortress, but make sure to keep an ear out if Kim needs any reinforcements at the pass.”

There’s nods and affirmations from the captains and officer before the commander turns to Youngmin, “I’m sorry for giving you the hardest one, Chief. Can you speak with the higher ups back at the main camp about a punitive measure for the group that got here before us? As far as both Kimsu and I were aware they weren’t supposed to do that, and I’ll bet they’re doing more in there than just routing out the loyalists. If we’re to do anything about that then we’ll need the higher ups permission.”

While an independently run body from the Crown’s army or guard, the Hwarang still need permission to act under that guise of pseudo-Crown rule and dole out their justice.

“I’m sure I can do something about it, and if not me, my father,” Youngmin nods, a smile forming as he thinks it over. You’re not sure who Youngmin’s father is, but if his son is the leader of the Hwarang, his position in the Crown’s council must be higher than anyone else’s father in the organization. It would still be tricky to gain that permission with all of the Hwarang naysayers and adversaries within the council.

“Eunseok, can you go with him?” Jihoon asks and turns to their youngest member, “Someone has to keep an eye on him.”

“Of course,” He nods, “I’ll do my best.”

Jihoon smiles wryly at him before turning to the remaining Hwarang. “The rest of you are following me into the fortress and to the Northern Gate. As for you,” he looks directly at you, “You can’t go with Youngmin, but other than that it’s up to you.”

You know he doesn’t know where to place you. It’s not as if you’re one of the Hwarang he could command to a role and set you there. Maybe having you decide your own fate was a way to take the burden off his shoulders.

“I’ll go with you, then,” You say after a moment of contemplation. Along with Jihoon, a group of Hwarang, and a group of regular soldiers, you’ll race into Ongsan and try to open the Northern Gate for the King’s garrison to make way into the fortress by suppressing the loyalists inside.

The groups disperse shortly after, Mingyu and his men heading to the pass, Youngmin and Eunseok leaving for the main camp, Chan and Hansol leaving for the heart of the fortress, and then Jihoon and you making way to the Northern Gate from inside the fortress itself.

Jihoon, you and the group of soldiers accompanying you race through the fortress. Seeing it from the outside had hidden how expansive it is on the inside, large courtyards and twisting hallways have your mind running in circles as you slowly run out of breath. You come upon another seemingly empty courtyard before stopping in your tracks. There was someone standing in the middle of it, someone wearing neither Silla nor Baekje armor. In fact, they are dressed more like a noble than a fighter.

The sun is shining so harshly onto the courtyard as you approach that it’s hard to get a good look at his face. It’s obscured in the sunlight and the light yellow of his robes and the glinting silver of a blade in his hand is doing little to help that. There’s a strange aura surrounding him, almost as if he's waiting for something to happen.

Jihoon, perceptive to that, motions for everyone to stop before encroaching on the character. The Hwarang stop in their tracks, save for one man too eager or arrogant to follow the commander’s orders and charges towards the figure with his sword out. The stranger seems to have only waved his arm once before the Hwarang falls to the ground, the dull sound of his body hitting the stone below echoing around the courtyard, the clangor of battle raging in the distance.

“What the hell?!” Junhui shouts out, shoving his way through the throng of Hwarang and over to the fallen man. The man’s unresponsive, a thick pool of blood beginning to stain the ground under him. The rest of the men, first taken aback by the stranger, now glare at him for the loss of their comrade.

“You’re Hwarang, aren’t you?” The stranger speaks up, his blade tapping against the agate stone of the walkway, “I can tell because of those blue robes of yours.” He sighs out, “A bunch of pretty nobles playing soldier, aren’t you all old enough to know to stop playing pretend?”

The man’s words are enough to make the already on-edge men agitated. Egged on by the harsh ridicule of someone they’d only just come upon. Each Hwarang, either noble or not, had their reason for joining. Taking their choice into question was cruel and that was clearly painted on their faces now.

“First, you ruin my plans at Wonweol and now you’re trying to play hero,” They snicker, “You’re not even real soldiers, are you?” His gaze travels down to the fallen Hwarang momentarily before lazily and almost arrogantly meeting Jihoon’s eyes, “I’d turn back if I were you, unless you want to end up like your friend here.”

“You’re the swordsman who beat Seungkwan at Wonweol?” Jihoon asks, the tension in the air thick and palpable as he speaks. “I heard you were quite good, but these are pretty big words coming from such a small man.” The smile on the commander’s face is anything but amicable.

“And I heard that you all were talented, for what you are, but this sorry display is telling me otherwise.” The now adversary snickers, once again glancing at the dying, or maybe he was already dead, Hwarang. “The man I fought at the inn, his name is Seungkwan? It’s a bit of a stretch to call him a real swordsman.”

You know from watching the men train that Seungkwan is skilled with a sword, but he had been injured by this man. Is his prowess with a blade more prolific than the Hwarang captain’s?

“Insult Boo all you want,” Junhui stands from the body of the crumpled soldier to face the stranger, his hand reaching for the sword at his hip. “But why did you kill this man?” The hiss of the steel leaving the sheath cries out as he tears it from the scabbard, the captain’s teeth baring. “If I don’t like your answer then I won’t hesitate to tear you down right here.”

“How prideful,” you can almost hear him roll his eyes, “The king says for you to ‘Jump’ and you say, ‘How high?’. Why are you chasing after men who’ve deserted their own movement? Or are you trying to let your own men in at the Northern Gate? Either way, your combatants are going to kill themselves before they’ll let you take this place by full force.”

You glance at Jihoon and the men around him, not even one looking as if the other’s words were outlandish. It seems as if the man in front of you had stopped your assault on the fortress to spare the pride of the Baekje loyalists. From the stranger’s point of view, you can understand what he was doing and why he feels right about it. But that gave him no right to slay one of the Hwarang.

“Is taking someone’s life for the sake of another’s pride just?” You speak up, distraught from this situation entirely, “The only one who can save your pride is you, not letting that responsibility fall into someone else’s hands.”

A grin splits onto the other’s face, “There’s some truth in that, I suppose. Are you saying that I should let the Hwarang demolish any pride these men have just to simply gain favor with the Crown?” Despite the curvature of his lips, his voice is not amused.

“That’s not what I…” The reddish-brown tint of his eyes scrutinizes you as you try to justify yourself, quickly falling away with the harshness of his demeanor.

“Here I was, thinking you were trying to say something intelligent,” Jihoon steps in once your voice trails off, “but you’re just acting like a child. This is war, not a council meeting debating ethics!”

“What did you just say?” Knuckles turning white with the newfound grip on his blade, the stranger questions accusingly at Jihoon.

“The loyalists started a fight knowing their kingdom had been defeated already, and now they’re running away in shame because they’re too cowardly to face the consequence of their actions,” Jihoon argues, a heated tone to his words, “They don’t deserve honor! They’re traitors to their new kingdom by trying to incite a rebellion, you think that deserves an honorable death?”

“Then you mean that they should’ve been prepared to die for their cause when they started this battle?”

“Anyone who starts a fight for a cause they aren’t willing to die for doesn’t know what it means to be a warrior.” Jihoon states, his hand hovering over the hilt of his own sword. “If they have an ounce of pride left in them, wouldn’t dying by your enemy’s hand while trying to stop them be better than falling onto your own sword?”

Jihoon’s own conception of honor and pride aren’t something he can compromise easily, having been ingrained into him at an early age. But even then, you can tell that even if he and the stranger spoke for hours, they would never understand each other’s points of view. The commander finally draws his weapon, Junhui dropping into a fighting stance when he does so. Before either of the two do anything, Jihoon whispers something hastily under his breath that causes Junhui to relent his stance, sheath his weapon, and step back into the group of Hwarang.

“You don’t seem like a coward,” Jihoon states, “So are you ready to accept the consequences of what happens when you kill one of my men?”

“Those are some big words,” The stranger says as he raises his sword from his lax position, the gore from the fallen Hwarang still clinging to the blade, “Do you really think you can defeat me?”

The answer isn’t verbal, but a ringing sound as their blades meet. They step back from one another, Jihoon’s grip tightening on his sword as he glares at the other. Now, the commander’s skill seems unrivaled but the thought that this stranger had beaten Seungkwan, the Hwarang’s best swordsman, lingers in the back of your mind as you watch.

Next to you, you can see Junhui reaching for his own sword. If he were to leap into the fight, it would most certainly help Jihoon gain the upper hand.

“You can’t,” you say and reach out, your hand falling onto his forearm before he turns to look at you. Meeting and fighting with this stranger aren’t why you and the Hwarang are here. The mission is to aid the forces at the Northern Gate. It isn’t any question whether this man was an enemy, a dangerous one, at that.

Even if Jihoon can’t defeat him, he would never let the Hwarang abandon their mission, especially after his speech.

Junhui turns away from you and watches the two men clash for a moment more, gritting his teeth and finally pulling his hand away from his sword. “Lee, I’m going to take your men for a second if that’s okay with you!”

“Just go already, loudmouth!” Jihoon says as he once again falls away from the stranger, “They’re all yours!”

“Alright!” Junhui calls out and turns to the men, “We’re heading for the Northern Gate, run straight there and don’t stop until those Baekje bastards have been put in their place!”

The soldiers roar with a renewed vigor and begin to follow the captain.

The stranger huffs something out as he watches the men run off, his hand clenching his sword as if he’s about to follow them.

“You’re not fighting them, so pay attention,” Jihoon calls out to pull the stranger’s focus back to him. “If you don’t, I’ll cut you down from behind instead.”

“Don’t get in my way!” The stranger shouts, bringing his sword down to meet Jihoon’s, the swing causing Jihoon to reel back once receiving it.

Now that there was more of a distance between the two, the stranger’s gaze once again travels to Junhui and the running Hwarang. You think for a moment to stop running with the men and try to stand your ground with Jihoon, but relent after a moment, continuing to go further on with the rest of the troops.

“Keep running!” Jihoon calls out, closing the distance between himself and the stranger, positioning his sword upwards once more.

“You don’t even know your limit,” The stranger scoffs.

You stop for a moment, finding yourself unable to keep up with the men. Looking back to the fray, you part your lips and shout out, “We’ll see you at the Northern Gates!” Leaving Jihoon without a word felt… wrong, so you yell out the not-so-subtle words of encouragement as you depart once more. “Come back to us in one piece!”

Jihoon almost laughs at this, devolving it into a small chuckle as his gaze narrows at his adversary. “Who do you think I am?” A cocksureness riding along his words as you run past, only hoping that he would survive the encounter.

By the time you and the rest of the Hwarang make it to the Northern Gates, it seems as if the King’s garrison has broken through already. There’re skirmishes happening all around the entrance but are soon quelled by the introduction of the Hwarang into the fight. Jihoon hadn’t arrived as the battles wane to a close and the sun begins to sink down into the sky. Several higher ups order a few of the captains to look for any remaining loyalists in the compound, leaving you to stand and wait for a sign of the commander or a returning captain.

“I’m sure they’ll be back soon,” a voice says to your right. You’re met with the face of Officer Jeon, or Wonwoo as you’ve come to learn. Like Chan, he acts as a spy for the Hwarang but typically deals with Yamato forces, but he had accompanied the men to Ongsan this time, only showing how much more this mission meant to the Hwarang. “I know they will.”

You can only nod your head in response and scan the area, looking for one of the faces you hope on seeing return. Every passing moment feels like an eternity, slowly inching by as the sun sinks lower and lower into the sky.

It’s dusk when you see a figure emerge from the depths of the fortress, the darkening sky obscuring most of their features, but as they near the now lit courtyard you stand in, you can see that it’s a familiar face.

“Commander!” You shout out and race over to him, relief flooding your system.

“I’m glad to see you’re alright,” Wonwoo says, following closely behind you as you stop in front of Jihoon. “It doesn't even look like you’ve been hurt.”

In the light of the fires, you can see that the Hwarang hadn’t been injured, but he wears a dark expression over his face.

“I hoped we would have a real fight, but it looks like it was over almost as soon as you all arrived,” he frowns, “held up by a Hwarang opposer, no less.”

“Who was he?” Wonwoo asks, tilting his head slightly.

“His name is Hong Jisoo. I don’t know if his father’s a part of the council or if he’s just a lackey under one of them, but he’s clearly very anti-us.”

“But if he’s still working under Silla rule, why did he try to stop us from going after Baekje?” You question, confused by the swordsman’s actions, weren’t both sides there to stop the loyalists? Something about this isn’t settling right with you. “Does that mean he was betraying Silla?”

“I don’t know about that, but I do think he was trying to stop us from getting here,” Jihoon sighs out, closing his eyes as if to recall the situation, “The soldiers who broke us up were also confused by whatever game he was trying to play. But they didn’t try to command him to do anything after we’d stopped fighting, so he must mean something to them.”

“He must have some notoriety in their ranks, then,” Wonwoo muses.

“He’s a lazy piece of shit who uses his rank or his money to do whatever he wants, more like,” Jihoon says with a bitter edge to his voice. “If he flaunts that around he has no right to try and teach me what his definition of pride is.”

Before Jihoon can ramble and rant about Jisoo, Junhui and the detachment of men he’d left with returns to the battle site. Junhui stops for a moment upon seeing the commander before breaking out into a large grin. The smile doesn’t last long though as he approaches, the curvature of his grin turning downwards.

“We found a few runaways, but they were already dying or dead by the time we got there.” At Junhui’s words you feel your heart drop. It’s not that you were sad that the loyalists were dead or that the Hwarang hadn’t been able to capture any one of them, only that more lives had been lost in the conflict.

“Honorable suicide, then?” Jihoon nods, not sounding angry at the result. “Good for them.”

“Good?” You ask without thinking, how is that ‘good’? Only hours prior the commander was trying to stop the loyalists from succeeding in that mission, but now that it’s been done he’s lauding them.

“You don’t understand,” the commander says and looks towards you. “As Hwarang, this isn’t good for us. We failed and let them kill themselves. They’re dead, what good would it be for me to ignore what they’ve done? It doesn’t matter if they’re an enemy or my friend, a man who dies with his honor intact deserves at least some respect.”

“I guess that makes some sense…” You mutter, not fully understanding the reasoning or what he was trying to convey.

His expression softens slightly, “The longer you stay with us, the more you’re likely to understand our mindset.”

Now that this group has come back together, you make your way to the campsite to meet with the rest of the Hwarang you’d parted ways with that morning.

The event of the loyalist takeover of Ongsan and their eventual expulsion from the fortress comes to be known as the Ongsan Rebellion to the citizens of Silla. And while the Hwarang had been called to action, their efforts were stymied with unforeseen circumstances and were able to find little in the way of gaining major approval with the Crown. Communication with the King’s garrison and the army alongside him had been poor and much of the Hwarang’s time had been spent waiting for battle with the rest of the reserve troops.

And even when they were called to arms, the Hwarang found a strange opponent at every turn:

Hong Jisoo, who had defeated Seungkwan at Wonweol, had claimed to be a member of the pro-Watch camp of the council during his encounter with Jihoon. It still isn’t determined who his family is and why his stance is so firmly against the Hwarang.

Hwan Minhyun, the man who had injured Soonyoung at Wonweol was also in attendance at the battle. While little more is known about him, he had claimed to be in allegiance with Hong Jisoo.

And then there was Xu Minghao, who also fought along with the prior two men with little mention of his full allegiance.

Whoever these men are, it’s clear to see that they’re no allies of the Hwarang. In fact, it seems as if they’re set to become one of their greatest enemies.

The battle claimed the lives of thousands of men, the king ordering his garrison to behead any survivors they found. Even then, some Baekje loyalists were able to escape westward, further into the territory that used to be their homeland. With the end of the Ongsan Rebellion, the king passes an edict labelling any man that fought alongside the Baekje loyalists to be branded a traitor in the eyes of the Crown and an enemy of the court.

𝔖𝔢𝔭𝔱𝔢𝔪𝔟𝔢𝔯 8𝔱𝔥, 661 - 𝔖𝔢𝔬𝔯𝔞𝔟𝔢𝔬𝔩, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 With the events of the raid on Wonweol Inn and the Ongsan Rebellion taking place within only a few short weeks of one another, it was causing a certain unrest to take hold within citizens of Silla. The Hwarang are doing their best to double up on their work to make citizens feel protected, but with the return of most of the Guard and Watch, it’s difficult for them to receive missions as big as the raids and rebellion had been. And even if they are assigned a task, the Crown overworks them, seemingly wanting to bleed them dry.

The Crown’s approval of any of their missions spreads them thin, even with the newer recruits they’d received from Podang and Gochang, it isn’t enough to keep an appropriate amount of people to instill peace. After many long and arduous meetings, it’s decided that Soonyoung, to slowly introduce him back into his role after his injury, will travel to Hanseong, one of Silla’s northernmost cities, to do preliminary scouting for future recruits.

The burning sun hits your face as Youngmin and you see Soonyoung off, a bag slung around his shoulder having been packed the night prior.

“I’ll be on my way now,” The Hwarang nods at the two of you, “Make sure no one gets in trouble while I’m away!”

“I’ll try my best,” you smile at him. His presence would be missed at the headquarters, even if the other men didn’t want to acknowledge it.

“Find us a solid list of men, it doesn’t matter if they’re nobles or not,” Youngmin notes, putting his hand under his chin for a moment. “But seeing as it’s Gochang, you might encounter more nobles there than usual. I’ll join you there next month to see who you’ve recruited.”

“Isn’t there someone who you’re looking for?” You turn to Youngmin, “I remember you mentioning someone once.”

“Oh, did we not tell you?” Youngmin sounds a tad miffed, “His name is Kim Gongmyung. Classically trained and the rumor is that he’s very well versed in strategy.”

“To be honest, I haven’t met him but only once or twice,” Soonyoung relents, “But at the least I’m sure he’ll let me speak to him.”

“That’s all we need,” Youngmin nods with a small smile, “His father’s on our side in the king’s council, and if we approach him kindly, I’m sure it’ll be within his interest to help us.” The leader seems confident just by his facial expression, but there’s an air of unsureness coming from the Hwarang.

“Alright, I’m going!” He lets that discontentment fall from his features seconds later, nodding his head before speaking. Soonyoung then turns to you, “I’ll do my best to find any information on Heo while I’m there, so just hang on until I get back!”

“Be careful!” You call out to him as he turns on his heels, bounding out from the main hall and towards the exit. As you watch him leave, and the smaller he seems to get the further he is from you and Youngmin, the melancholier you feel. Youngmin looks different though, a small smile residing on his face as he watches the Hwarang set out. “You look excited, are you thinking of all the new members you’re getting?”

“Of course, seeing out numbers increase is great. Even more so if they’re strong and able,” He says as Soonyoung finally disappears outside of the main entrance.

𝔖𝔢𝔭𝔱𝔢𝔪𝔟𝔢𝔯 27𝔱𝔥, 661 - 𝔖𝔢𝔬𝔯𝔞𝔟𝔢𝔬𝔩, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 Time passes quickly after Soonyoung’s departure. So fast that the date of Youngmin’s departure for Hanseong arrives with little resistance. The morning before he’s meant to depart, you find him standing in one of the compound’s courtyards, quietly watching the wind pass through the leaves overhead.

“Is everything alright?” You ask as you approach him quietly, not wanting to startle him.

“Hm, oh, hello,” he looks at you with a small smile, “I’m alright, are you doing okay?”

“I am,” you nod, “I’m just thinking about how you’re leaving tomorrow.”

“I see,” he says with a short chuckle, “I can’t leave Soonyoung alone for too long, can I? Who knows what sort of trouble he’s already found himself in?”

“I’m sure your absence here is going to affect the men like Soonyoung’s is,” you sigh out, already knowing the feeling of having such a pivotal character of the captains gone for nearly a month now. Youngmin is the Hwarang’s leader. If anything, this will be a larger blow than Soonyoung’s departure.

“It’s only a month,” he tries to reassure you, “I’ve been gone for longer before. And besides, Jihoon will make sure everything runs smoothly while I’m away.” Youngmin probably isn’t aware that his kindness and Soonyoung’s strange but bright personality were things that kept you mentally intact day after day here. With both absent from the headquarters, you’re not sure what kind of emotional blow it’ll have on you.

Your discontentment with the situation must have placated itself on your face because Youngmin looks at you now with a sad, small smile.

“Is there anything you want me to bring back for you?” He questions in hopes that it might make you feel better, “I’m going to stop in Toehwa-hyeon on my way back, did you want a memento from your hometown?”

“Oh no,” you shake your head, grateful for his offer, “You don’t have to worry about me.”

“Are you sure?” Youngmin pushes a little more, “If there’s anything I can do for you, and as long as it’s within my power, I will.” You don’t want to ask any more of him, he’s so accommodating already that you’d just feel wrong in asking him to bring you something.

“There is one thing…” You pause for a moment, “Could you train me?”

“Are you-?” Youngmin’s brow furrows as he thinks of your statement, “Are you talking about fighting?”

“I am,” you nod quickly.

“Oh no… I think that would be a bad idea,” he sounds cautious, tentative, “I get really aggressive when I teach, if I ended up injuring you, I don’t think I’d be able to forgive myself.”

“I see…” You probably sound defeated, your shoulders shrugging downwards at his words.

“But that statement came out of nowhere… Did you have a reason for asking?”

“If I’m going to help watch over Shoshin while you’re gone, I want to be able to instead of hiding while everyone else puts in the effort.”

Youngmin chuckles nervously at that sentiment, “But you’re not one of the warriors, so I doubt you’d ever have to raise your sword to an enemy.”

“You’re right, but I still want to be able to protect myself if something were to happen,” you insist gently, trying to sound as reasonable as possible.

Youngmin mulls it over for a moment before perking up into a smile, “Well, if that’s the case, I’d love to teach you a few things.”

The leader runs around for a moment, returning to you with a pair of practice swords and two cords so you can tie up your sleeves without getting hindered by them. Rather than use the traditional wooden practice swords of the Hwarang, Youngmin’s opted for the lighter bamboo variant as to not accidentally injure you with the splintery cousin.

“Let’s start,” he says as he stands beside you, his own bamboo sword raised outwards. “I’ll warn you though, the style we teach at the Kwak school and the Hwarang are a little… arduous.”

“I’m ready,” you state firmly and raise your own bamboo sword out to the open space in front of you.

“Then let’s begin with your stance,” he says, looking towards your feet with a scrutinizing gaze, “You mentioned you’d trained before, right?”

“It was mostly for self-defense, but I was taught how to use the blade I have with me,” you say as you look down to your feet, trying to position them correctly.

“Then I won’t have to worry about teaching you a new form,” he notes, “Just get into the stance you’re most comfortable with.”

With the smooth grip of the practice sword in hand, you fall back into the stance you have memorized from all your practice sessions. Your hold on the hilt of the weapon tightens as you await instruction.

“Too weak!” Youngmin shouts out, different from the calm tone his voice typically carries. “If someone’s coming from your front to attack you, the first thing they’ll reach is your sword and your arm. Tighten your grip more or they’ll knock the sword right out of your hand, be wary of that.”

“Okay!” You nod and try to hold onto the sword even tighter, the knuckles on your hand beginning to ache with the strain. It was somewhat endearing to know that he isn’t treating you any differently because you’re a girl.

“Now you’re holding on too tight,” he notices the tremble from the overworked muscles of your hand, watching the fake blade quiver in the air. “Because you’ll be a bit weaker than most you’ll ever fight against, you should try your best to avoid someone attacking you from the front. To do that you’ll need to dodge or redirect the blow from their sword, but since you’re holding onto it so tightly…”

You’re not sure how much time has passed since Youngmin had begun his instruction, but the sun is hanging low in the sky now as you try and retain everything, he’s been teaching you.

“It’s getting late.” He muses after you finish swinging the sword for what feels like the thousandth time. It’s cause enough for you to look up at the reds, oranges and purples that are beginning to saturate the sky. And almost as if you’re pulled from your training, fatigue sets into your bones and causes you to collapse to your knees. Your limbs shake with exhaustion, clothes dampened with sweat, your breath hollow as you try to suck in more air than your lungs allow you.

Youngmin looks over to you as you collapse, his stern expression from training you softening to one of concern. “I’m sorry!” He says, a panicked tone overtaking him, “I got so into it that I pushed you way too hard!”

“I’m fine,” you breathe out, offering him a weak smile, “You ended up teaching me like that even though I’m not your student, thank you.”

“I see,” he doesn’t sound fully convinced, but the worried edge to his voice subsides a bit, “If that’s how you feel then I’m glad I could help.” His face holds a mixture of guilt and hesitation, though, “I am sorry, I haven’t fully trained someone in years, and I suppose I went a little overboard.”

“You mean before you became the Hwarang’s leader?” You ask as you shakily rise to your feet.

“Right,” he nods with a nostalgic smile, “Jihoon, Seungkwan, and Eunseok all attended my family’s school. Seungcheol, Soonyoung, Junhui and Mingyu joined us afterwards, Hansol never fully joined but would stop by often. We don’t have time for it now, but we used to test our skills out against each other nearly every day.”

The topic of the ‘old days’ often came up when the captains were tipsy or drunk on their alcohol. Youngmin’s father had been high up in the Crown’s council when he was alive, but later left to start up his own fighting school, much like Lee Alcheon had done.

“All of that training must’ve been tough,” you wonder aloud.

“It was,” Youngmin nods in agreement, “But it was fulfilling, in a different way than what our work is now.” He gazes off into nothing as he reminisces, causing a pang of envy to invade you for a moment.

“Earlier you said you weren’t my student,” Youngmin speaks up, looking at you, “Since I am technically a master of my family’s school, and I spent today training you… I think that more or less makes you a disciple of the style as well. That would make you a student like a few of the captains.”

His words cause a smile to break out on your face, “Thank you.” Obviously, it isn’t an official method, and it was hardly a full day’s worth of instruction, but it made an unbridled happiness bubble within you. “I’m so grateful for what you’ve taught me today.”

enjoy what you read? leave a comment! it helps with motivating us writers to keep producing content for our lovely readers ❤

#seventeen #jihoon x reader #seokmin x reader #joshua x reader #jeonghan x reader #hye.favs — hwarang series

49 notes · View notes

ihavethedreamies · 2 months ago

Text

Stray Kids Historical AU! Series Hub

ON INDEFINITE HIATUS

Please Read my Letter

Oh boy! After my poll, Stray Kids was decided as the subject of my next series! Below you will find the overviews for each story and I will be working on them next and uploading them as I finish. Hopefully it won't take more than a week to get them all up, so stay tuned!

I'll be going in age order, so Bang Chan first and I.N. last.

Let me know if you want to be on a taglist! I do those, just not had too many requests to do so.

(I also struggled to find a Historical-type outfit for Changbin that wasn't older so if anyone has something more recent, let me know. I really only check on Pinterest so...)

Only You - Bang Chan [NSFW]

King! Bang Chan x Noble! AFAB! Reader

Summary: You are a nobleman's daughter and your father is struggling to find you a husband. The king refuses to marry all of the women brought to him and will not take any concubines. You end up meeting each other. ~4.6k

Her Hero - Lee Know [NSFW]

Podocheong! Lee Know x Noble! AFAB! Reader

(The Podocheong were like the police of Joseon Era Korea)

Summary: When a political rival of your father kidnaps you for a ransom, your father calls on the Podocheong (Police) to rescue you. An extremely handsome Bujang (Lieutenant) rescues you, but you would be loathe to admit you need (and like) a hero. ~5k

Kept Secret - Changbin [WIP]

Wonsanghwa! Changbin x Princess! AFAB! Reader

(A Wonsanghwa was essentially the guy who trained the Hwarang)

Summary: You are the youngest princess, and because of that you get the most freedom. The only thing your father refuses is to let you learn to fight. So, you get rid of the middleman and go straight to the Wonsanghwa.

Love is Free - Hyunjin [WIP]

Prince! Hyunjin x Merchan! AFAB! Reader

Summary: You run a store for your father that sells all kinds of clothing and accessories. A nobleman comes by nearly every other day and will buy anything you recommend. You figured at first he was there to buy gifts for his girl, but turns out, he doesn't have on. Yet.

Beside Me - Han [WIP]

Noble! Han x Princess! AFAB! Reader

Summary: You often go to spend the day with your best friend at her husband's family's estate, using it as an excuse to leave the palace. Your friend's younger-brother-in-law normally keeps to himself, but you heard he's actually really fun. You're determined to bring him out of his shell.

Getting Closer - Felix [WIP]

Noble! Felix x Handmaiden! AFAB! Reader

Summary: You had been training ever since you were a little girl to grow up and serve the crown prince and later the king. Because of that, you grew up with the prince as well. Though, the one that always had caught your eye, was the prince's best friend.

Favorite Place - Seungmin [WIP]

Noble! Seungmin x Princess! AFAB! Reader

Summary: You are a habitual escape artist, sneaking away from the palace as often as you could to actual live a fun life. Your best friend of nearly twenty years is always on the other side of the wall to catch you. Every so often though, he goes into the palace to see you instead.

Keep You Safe - I.N. [WIP]

Personal Guard! I.N. x Noble! AFAB! Reader

Summary: Your father, because of his political position, he hired a private guard to keep you safe. He was always disguised as either a servant or a suitor. You have yet to see him actually need to protect you, and you were honestly fairly curious how well he'd do.

Master-Master List

Stray Kids Master List

Taglist: @huldrelokken, @estella-novella, @astrobebba, @kayleefriedchicken, @minghaosimp, @cassandramrn, @qwonyoung23

156 notes · View notes

madameaug · 11 months ago

Text

One of Your Girls: KTH x Black Reader

Pairing: Actor Taehyung x Friend zoned Black Reader

Reader is delusional (like most of us), kinda feel bad, down horrendous, love sick for sure. Kinda mopey tone

I never could have imagined myself being a The Weekend girl. A girl who was so desperate for male attention that she convinced herself that being a side-chick was okay. Uttering that stupid phrase "he knows where home is." I actively laughed and made fun of those girls. Side chicks who believed that they would one day become the wife. That the man who was dragging her along would come to his senses. That she had something special and would motivate him to change his dirty dog ways. Ha! What fools.

Yet there was a voice that didn't belong to me , reciprocating that belly-aching laugh.

Look at you in madly in love with a man who sees you as nothing more than a friend.

Even though no one was pointing that finger at me the embarrassment was swallowing me up whole. Yet again here I laid in the California King bed, alone, hoping he would still be here with me. That after he tucked me into bed, that he would be curled up beside me. I wouldn't dare allow myself to hope that maybe in our mutual intoxication, we shared this bed in a more intimate sense. That I finally escaped the isolating box of friendship. Removing the burn of being called his friend, but rather yet just his.

"Ms. Yn? Are you awake?" Judah Tae's assistant spoke on the other side of the door. Huh, I guess he knew about me staying the night. I wasn't a total fool to know that Judah coming to wake me up, was a clear sign from Tae that my window of being a guest was rapidly closing. He was too much of a coward to address me head-on and politely kick me out. So he tasked that to either his softspoken Judah or his rough-around-edges security guard Binky. At this point I would have preferred Binky to wake me up.

"I'm up, Judah." I picked up my belongings that were scattered across the ground. Nothing too serious but a bright red corset top and a slinky black maxi skirt.

"Your phone and purse are on the dining table, and your Uber is outside. No need to rush out, take your time."

Judah added that last sentence to cushion the blow that I was again getting the discreet dismissal from his boss. I was the pitiful girl who couldn't get the hint. Or perhaps refused to get the hint.

I sat in front of the vanity mirror, getting myself together. Yes, I was a bit prideful. Even though I was on the edge of another anti-climatic emotional breakdown, I'll be damned if I showed it. If fake it til I make it was a person, it would be me.

Drunk me in all her right mind, was smart enough to remove the layers of makeup on my face. They weren't smeared across Taehyung's satin pillow sheets. Sheets I like to think he got for me, to protect my natural hair. I just like to think that he's thinking of me.

Catching my eye were two photo frames. The larger one contained Taehyung and his castmates of Hwarang. He was the youngest and his older castmates had bunny ears behind his head. Even though it was hard to see as Taehyung was dressed in a traditional hanbok. His perfect smile on display, his big ears poking out lateral to the black head strap. He looked like a kid in the candy store. Smiling cheek to cheek, that he actually looked like his six year old self.

Should I truly feel shame for allowing myself to fall in love with a man like him. A man who was kind, interested in the things I liked, was single, intelligent, and had a passion within his career. I wouldn't be exaggerating for saying that Kim Taehyung was one of a kind. It would be hard to find another like him. No. There is no one like him. I was already lucky to be in his space as a friend. Someone who he didn't have to worry about betraying him to the gossip-hungry tabloids, airing out his dirty laundry for the world to sift through and mock. I was honored to be his number one confidant, his best friend. But I won't lie to my heart and say I wish we were something more.

I wish I met his grandmother, the most important woman of his life under the guise of lover. That he posted my face on social media holidays like National Girlfriend Day. I wish that I had an initial in his bio, showing that he was taken.

But instead, I was reminded of the reason why none of my wishes would come true. His true love was currently occupying that space. The female co-star that he was currently the lead with. She was a beautiful ray of sunshine inside and out. Everything about her was pretty. Her skin was clear and smooth, not an imperfection is sight. She had a youthful look to her, easily being mistaken as Taehyung's junior despite her being older than him. Even her name translated to 'pretty' in both her native language and Korean. I didn't need intense calculations to understand why Taehyung was in love with her. If I was a male, hell I'd probably be in love with her too.

Which is why it hurt the most seeing the two lovebirds hug each other so lovingly. Her smile was turning into rambunctious teasing. Bragging that she won this little onsided game between us. That she was the victor in this drawn-out battle for Taehyung's attention and affection.

That I YN YLN was a loser. That I earned second place. Nah. That wouldn't stand for much longer. Kim Taehyung was in love with me. A seedling somewhere in that big heart of his was reserved for me. His girlfriend was the overcast, preventing my little seed from growing. Two can play this game. And rest assured, that this time I would be victorious.

Muah Ha Ha Ha Ha Ha!!!!!!

(just jokes- i don't support homewrecking <3)

#bts x black reader #kim taehyung #taehyung #madameaug #bts #x black reader #black fem reader #taehyung x black reader #taehyung x reader #taehyung x y/n #taehyung x you

67 notes · View notes

j1hyee · 2 years ago

Text

tempest loves when

꒰ featuring ꒱ lew, hanbin, hyeongseop, hyuk, eunchan, hwarang, taerae

꒰ warnings ꒱ fluff, romance

꒰ note ꒱ watching tempest videos while finishing this up :))

꒰ lew :: loves when you get closer to him while watching a movie. Even if you do it subconsciously he can’t help, but look down at you cuddling into his side and smile. The way you’re still watching the movie unaware of him looking down at you until you look up to him to see his loving stare.

꒰ hanbin :: likes when you give him sleepy kisses while cuddling. He finds laying in your arms, resting on your chest so comforting. It’s a plus when you sleepily kiss his forehead before kissing his lips just as sleepily.

꒰ hyeongseop :: adores when you pet his hair while he’s trying to fall asleep on your lap. When he’s tired and you offer up your lap to him he can’t help but accept. He finds himself placing your hand on his head once he’s layed down as a sign for you to pet his hair, not being able to sleep without you doing it now.

꒰ hyuk :: likes when you rest your head in his shoulder when you’re tired. He feels like you trust him. Even if it’s not in public and it’s in the comfort of your apartment he loves that you’re comfortable enough to sleep around him.

꒰ eunchan :: enjoys when you guys are sitting next to each other and you just look up at him, smiling. You’ll be watching a video on his phone together, you cuddled up on his side while he’s fully focused on the video. And you just look up at him smiling..when he finally notices he gets all smiley too!

꒰ hwarang :: can’t help but smile when you run up to him with your arms open for a hug because you’re excited to see him. Hwarang lovess hugs and he loves them even more when they’re your hugs. So when he’s meeting up with you after a long time and you run up to him and hug him, he’s so happy <3

꒰ taerae :: loves when you snort while laughing. Most people get embarrassed when they accidentally snort because they think people find it unattractive, but taerae finds it sooo attractive. He loves that you let your true self out around him and don’t hold back your laughter when you guys are together.

86 notes · View notes

dearlyjinie · 7 years ago

Text

we are even

summary : Y/n is the physician at the Hwarang house, one day when she got some mud on her clothes she went to clean it at the physician room, but Han sung came in the wrong moment.

pairing: Suk Han sung x reader

a/n: I had this idea watching hwarang today, it so good. Special note HAPPY BIRTHDAY KIM TAEHYUNG! feedback always welcome.

A loud sigh was heard from the physician room, it was no other Suk Han sung. “what’s the matter Han Sung? You have been siting here and sighing non stop for an hour”.

“it’s just” he sighed once again and stared outside as if he was in some type of deep thought.

He turned towards you once again “ hey I have something to show you“ he grabbed your arm and dragged you out of the room before you were able to say something.

He dragged you outside and pointed at Soo ho and Ban Ryu who were bickering over something stupid. “What Han sung? what did you want to show me?” you raised your voice slightly because of Soo ho and Ban Ryu where shouting so loudly.

“I wanted to tell you something very Important, but I didn’t know how to do it so I came outside but it looks like I can’t do that here either”. Han sung confessed.

To be honest you really liked Han sung, he was really sweet and incredibly handsome. And you really wanted to hear what he had to say, but you weren’t able to hear anything do to the fact that Soo ho and Ban Ryu were screaming their lungs out and your unconditional heart beating. Which usually happens when you stand in a close proximity with Han sung like right now.

You looked up at the tall figure who was standing mere winches from you, his face was so close to yours you were afraid that you might have bad breath.

Both of you stared at one another as Han sung confessed something to you, something which you weren’t able to make out. Your focus on Han Sung left when you heard a loud scream come from behind you.

You turned around to see what was going on when you received a big ball of mud on your chest. You looked down and back at Soo Ho who was trying to hide behind Sun Woo, but ended up getting shoved in front you instead.

You glared at Soo Ho for ruining your clothes, but started to laugh when he ended up dirtying his own and promised you that he would do your laundery.

You closed the door behind you making sure that no one was there, and quickly took off your clothes.

“Hey Y/n-” Han Sung barged in the room, his eyes going wide as the moon when he saw your breasts. He looked at you and then looked down at your chest. Your gaze following his, when it lowered to your breasts and you quickly covered them.

“Get out you” you screamed on top of lungs and Han Sung ran out of the room.

‘‘ goodness’ you sighed out as you calmed your heart.

Han Sung ran as fast his legs would take him, he ended up In Soo Ho’s dorm. He dropped himself on Sun Woo’s bed, “goodness”.

“what happened to you?” Ji Dwi asked. Han Sung breathlessly spoke “bosoms”

You tried to avoid Han Sung at any cost, but that wasn’t something really easy since Han Sung was everywhere you went. So you gave up and moved on, trying to forget the incident, but Han Sung didn’t let that happen.

Since every time you entered a room he was in he would say something like ‘it was the chest’.

And honestly it was both the most annoying thing ever and funniest, since nobody else understood it but the two of you.

You were in the middle of doing laundry with A Ro when Han Sung came and pulled you away “hey what are doing” you shouted.

Han Sung looked at you and started to strip. Your eyes going wide as saucers when you realized what he was doing “ oi stop it! What are you doing?” you asked.

Han Sung looked at you and then at his shirtless body ‘here now we are even. I saw you and now you saw me” he said innocently.

You blushed, trying not to look at the cute shirtless boy in front of you.

“ and Y/n” he grabbed your face and kissed you on the lips “ I was trying to ask you out the other day, but I wasn’t able to so will you go on a date with me?” .

“of course I will” he smiled at your words and leaned down to press your lips against his once again, but both of you were interrupted by A Ro and Yeo Wool who were giggling at both of you.

#taehyung hwarang #hwarang imagine #hwarang x reader #suk hansung x reader #suk hansung imagine #kim taehyung #kim taehyung x reader #kim taehyung imagines #kim taehyung imagine #hwarang #bts imagine #bts taehyung #bts masterlist

508 notes · View notes

drama--universe · 1 year ago

Text

Okta Lover

Requested by @creepypastacrazier93: Warmly greet!❤️How did the exams go, good? Requests are open again, so what do you say we try out our Hwarang boys? How would the boys react to the female reader who served them in Okta, a Hwarang boy tells his friends that she is cute and another of the Hwarang tells the reader that their friend thinks she is cute 😁😁

Pairing: Hwarang boys x fem!reader

Sun-Woo:

he's a very blunt person

so it would be in character for him to just say it to you

but at the same time, he's pretty shy

which is the reason that he doesn't say it in your face

he doesn't mean to say it out loud either

it just slipped out as you walked off after placing down their drinks

Ji-dwi gives a confused look, Suho laughs, Banryu rolls his eyes, Han-sung giggles and Yeo-wool just grins

Yeo-wool is the first to leave, generous enough to pay for the drinks

Sunwoo just groaned, he knew well enough that Yeo-wool wasn't doing it out of the kindness of his heart

especially not when he noticed you look over after Yeo-wool finished talking

you just smiled at him before turning back away from him

it wasn't until ten minutes later or so that you return

a drink placed in front of him while you said opposite

all the others were kind enough to leave then, but not without teasing grins

and Sunwoo says nothing, staring at the cup before him while you served a cup for yourself

"my shift's done, so I hope you don't mind the company."

Sunwoo does not mind it all, the blush on his face said enough

and you gladly take the opportunity

a handsome hwarang and a nice one at that, who would not want someone like that on their side

Ji-Dwi:

this man will say it to your face

no shame, you've seen the same series as me

sure, he' be a bit bashful about it, but he'd say it nonetheless

the other hwarangs just find it hilarious how you just scoff

because it turns Ji-dwi into a lost puppy

lucky for him, Yeo-wool was good at talking

and he was basically friends with everyone that worked at Okta

so, out of the kindness of his heart, Yeo-wool talks to you

basically tells you that Ji-dwi is genuinely interested

so, maybe a week later or so, you saw him again in Okta

alone this time and maybe a bit tipsy

the two bottles of wine said enough, even if he was used to alcohol

you sit opposite of him, smiling as he looked up shocked

"A little birdie told me that you were very interested."

Cue the blush to rise up on his face

he stumbles over his words, trying to sober himself up in a matter of seconds

neither of those things works, but at least he tries

which you find cute, so plus points there

throughout the whole conversation, his stutter did not dissapear

so you're basically smiling the whole time at his cuteness

Soo-Ho:

number two who'd just openly say it

but in a more flirty way

so you shrugged it off

every single time

which is only making Soo-ho more competitive in a way

he'll try anything to make you break, but nothing really works

Han-Sung is the one to step in

kind of blurts out the fact that Soo-ho seems genuinely interested in you

you don't see a reason why the cute boy would lie to you

at the same time, you also like seeing Soo-ho struggle to come up with new ways to flirt with you

it's really funny to watch as you walk past

to see him pout as he struggled to find something new to say

because Soo-ho was not known for trying so much

(let's assume he never falls for the queen, cause that was just weird...)

he breaks after two hours

which basically means that he just pouts for the rest of their time their

when they left, you were quick to end your shift and follow the men

Soo-ho was trailing in the back, a good meter behind the rest

so you took the opportunity to walk to him, linking your arm to his with a smile

he's confused, but switches to happy in a millisecond

"I hope you don't mind walking me home?"

he does not

the smile on his face doesn't leave his face for the rest of the night

Ban-Ryu:

he would say nothing

not even to the others

he remains quiet through the night, but his eyes speaks thousand words

and Soo-ho knows how to read those eyes with ease

(yes that sounds kinda gay, I'm aware)

which means that Soo-ho knows exactly what was happening in Ban-ryu's head

and thus, he starts his usual teasing

because he had long figured out the secret glances to you

and Ban-ryu's reaction are so funny

the blush, the flustered reaction, followed by an angry shout

it gets him some looks, but a glare soon fixed that problem

except for you

you're giggling at him, but stop once your eyes connected

Ban-ryu thinks you're afraid of him

luckily that's not the case, but he doesn't know that

so he's quick to leave Okta

that's when Soo-ho takes fate into his own hands

racing to you, he quickly whispered something in your ear

something along the lines of Ban-ryu having fallen for your beauty

then he just force you out side

you didn't mind, you wanted to go home anyway

lucky for you, Ban-ryu was still outside

he was fiddling with the charm on his belt, looking at it with a sad look as he scratched off the paint

so you approached him

"what did your charm do to deserve that?"

cue a large flinch from this man

then he just stares at you in shock

you just smile before asking him if he was free for one more hour or so

he said yes, maybe a bit too fast

Han-Sung:

well...

he just stares

all his emotions are easy to read from his expression alone

his silly smile easy tells that he just fell in love

which makes everyone at the table smile at how adorable Han-sung was

yes, even Ban-ryu

it is incredibly cute, even more when he starts getting tipsy

he's basically outing his feelings to anyone who will listen

which, at the moment, was Sun-woo

which the man in question didn't like at all

hence why he called you over and basically dumped Han-sung on you

much to the others surprise, you took it well

smiling when Sun-woo told you to just take the man, that was hopelessly crushing on you, with you

you just put Han-sung back in his seat, saying something before leaving

and Han-sung just quietly waits

which is some kind of miracle, because Han-sung is never quiet

then you return and Han-sung is up in minutes

almost falling down in the process

you kindly tell the others that you'd take Han-sung home, Sun-woo telling you the address without any care

which Han-sung calls out by slurring together a sentence that said something along the lines of 'I could get killed'

but he was also quick to hug you after and almost fall asleep on your shoulder

so you're quick to leave

the next morning, Han-sung remembers everything

racing back to Okta to apologize

but you dismiss him with a smile before asking him to hang out after work

Han-sung was glad that sun-woo had dumped him in your arms

Yeo-Wool:

another flirt

problem is, he flirts with everyone

including men...

so, like anyone else would, you ignored the flirty remarks

even when they made you blush

through the night, he continues and never gives up

he isn't know to falter after all

gets a bit more snappy through the night, however

Soo-ho's teasing is relentless

it comes to the point that everyone is fed up

Han-sung is the first to approach you and basically begs you to do something about it

so Yeo-wool's next line is a success

unknown to him is the fact that Han-sung is partially the reason for that

he's a bit arrogant after you say yes to his proposal

which is then quickly dismissed when you invite the others at the table

because seeing Yeo-wool sulk is a one-in-a-lifetime opportunity after all

because the prettiest man in Silla does not usually sulk

"too pretty" you could quote him for that

you did walk next to him the whole time, maybe a bit too close to seem like just friends or acquaintances

which is something you both want

this time you take the first step

simple way of doing so, just holding his hand underneath the long sleeves from your clothes

cue a blushing Yeo-wool who doesn't really know how to react

he talks big, but he isn't used to a response and if he gets one it is usually just stammering or stuttering

and it is exactly the reaction that you wanted from him

57 notes · View notes

whispersatdawn · 7 years ago

Text

Light in Darkness

Pairing: Sam Maek Jong (Park Hyung Sik) X Reader

Genre: angst, slight fluff

Word Count: 3,231

Request: So I saw that you were taking Hwarang requests so I decided to drop by. How about a Sam Meok Jong one where you're ordered to assassinate him or something but you actually like/love him so you're stuck between a rock and a hard place. Angsty with maybe a sprinkle of fluff? - anonymous

You sat still in the middle of the room. The room was dark, and the only thing that helped your vision was the few candles lit around. In front of you was your uncle, True Bone and traitor to the Royal Family. When your father - your uncle’s blood brother - died, your uncle took you in as if you were his own daughter and trained you to be an assassin with hopes of rebelling against the Royal Family. Everything went according to his plans so far, and his time of rebellion was approaching fast. “There will soon be a new ruler of Silla, my niece, and after I get what I want, you will also have whatever you desire,” your uncle told you, a devious smile on his wrinkled face. “How has it been in the castle these days?”

“Queen Jiso is still on the throne, but I have word that she is planning to reveal the hidden King and abdicate the throne to him soon. Several palace guards and Hwarangs have left to Baekje which gives us an upper hand.”

Your uncle stroked his beard, humming, taking in your words. “When do you think you’ll be able to take out your order?”

“King Jinheung has a bodyguard with him always close by, but I will find a way for him to be occupied on a night when the King is asleep.”

“Will you need some of the others to infiltrate the castle and assist you in carrying out your orders?”

You shook your head firmly. “No, Uncle. I am capable of taking out the King myself. Bringing in any of the others will can make things more difficult.”

“Is that so?” Your uncle replied. “And you do know the consequences if you fail to carry out the order and kill the King?”

“Yes, Uncle,” you confirmed, with a nod of your head. “If I get caught by the King, I will suffer with the punishment the Royal Family decides to carry out, most likely death. You will not bother to save me in order to risk them finding your plans. If I fail and make it back here, you will kill me yourself.”

“I adore you, my niece, but this is what we’ve been waiting for. Do not dare to disappoint me.”

“Yes, Uncle.”

You returned to the castle without anyone noticing that night and pretended as if you never left when morning came. Hiding your black assassin clothing deep in your closet, you changed into a pretty pink traditional dress that made you look even more innocent in one’s eyes. “Has the King woken?” you asked a maiden that was walking in your direction.

“Yes, Miss (Y/N). He was last seen in his study room with the private instructor,” the maiden answered.

“Thank you,” you said to her before changing your direction from the throne room to the King’s study.

With quiet steps, you walked towards the door that was slightly ajar. You peeked in and found him sitting in the middle of room, practicing calligraphy. You smiled, watching him. Never have you seen a man so handsome as him. His features were striking from his hypnotizing eyes to his blinding smile. When he spoke, his voice sounded like music to your ears.

You felt sorry for almost all the maidens. Because he was hidden, no one knew what he looked like. At the same time, you were lucky that you were one of the few who have seen his face, and you didn’t anyone else to have the pleasure of seeing him like you. As you tried to lean in to get a closer look at His Highness, the door suddenly flew open, knocking you back on your bottom.

“Ow!” you yelled from the impact and rubbed the part that hurt.

“Seems like we have a little spy, Your Highness,” you heard a gruff voice on top of you say.

When you looked up, you found the King’s bodyguard Pa Oh wagging his finger at you and clicking his tongue. Your face flushed, and you let out a nervous laugh. “I just wanted to greet Sam Maek Jong this morning. Also, good morning to you, Pa Oh.”

“Is that (Y/N), Pa Oh?” Sam Maek Jong asked from inside the room. The private instructor then walked out, leaving. “Let her in, Pa Oh.”

Pa Oh reached his hand out, and you held it so that he could pull you up to your feet. As you walked into the King’s study room, you hoped that your heart would calm down from the sight of him. He smiled when he saw you. “Good morning, (Y/N). What brings you here so early?”

“I should have a reason, shouldn’t I?” you replied with laughter. “I actually just wanted to see you, Your Highness. If you have some time to spare, would you like to walk around the palace with me?”

“He can’t,” Pa Oh answered from behind you. “His Highness has been busy preparing for his inauguration for the throne.”

“I can speak for myself, Pa Oh,” the king said while looking at you, smiling.

“Yeah, but if you did, you’d accompany her in a heartbeat,” Pa Oh muttered under his breath.

Though Sam Maek Jong heard his personal bodyguard, he decided to let the comment go. “Sorry, (Y/N). It will get harder for anyone to come see me now that my mother will soon give up the throne. In addition, Pa Oh is just frustrated since he has to leave the palace tomorrow for a few days.”

“Your Highness,” Pa Oh said sternly.

The king’s bodyguard won’t be by the king’s side for a few days?

“I have to aid some relatives of mine, but I insisted to stay with the king,” Pa Oh said worriedly. “In about a week, King Jinheung will take the throne which means he has to be very careful until then. How can I just leave him alone when there are people out there trying to stop him?”

“I’ll just stay in the castle. There’s nowhere else for me to roam off to,” Sam Maek Jong responded.

“For a king, anywhere can be dangerous. Even his own palace.”

You were supposed to feel relieved. Knowing that the king will practically be defenseless will make it easier for you to carry out your orders, but a part of you felt sick to the stomach. Since you have a chance to take out the king, there shouldn’t be an excuse for you not to assassinate him. You have to do it. If your uncle finds out about your feelings for the king and sees that you decide to let him live, you’ll be the one who’ll pay.

“Are you feeling unwell, (Y/N)?” Sam Maek Jong asked, his brows furrowing, when he saw you spacing out and fiddling with your fingers.

Hearing his voice, you snapped out of your daze. “Huh? I am fine, Your Highness. I actually have to get going. I promised one of the maidens to help with the laundry, but I almost forgot. She’ll have a fit.”

Sam Maek Jong chuckled. “You are quite a silly girl.”

You nervously laughed and stood up, but while you got back on your feet, the king stopped you. “Wait, before you go, (Y/N), I would like a word with you. Pa Oh, please step outside for a moment.”

Pa Oh bowed and hurried to step out, leaving only you and Sam Maek Jong alone. Your heart beat faster. What did he want to speak to you alone for?

“Please sit back down,” the king told you, and you obliged.

You sit across the handsome king. Only a small table separated the both of you. Sam Maek Jong moved one of his hands forward and opened it. You looked at him curiously, but when he nudges his head to his hand, you slowly placed one of your hands on top of him.

His big hand embraced your small, soft ones. Your cheeks flushed a little pink from his movement. “(Y/N),” he said softly, like a sweet spring day.

“Yes, Your Highness?”

“I was thinking of waiting a little while to tell you, but I don’t think I can anymore. It’ll be hard for us to meet until I officially become king, but even after that, I have so many duties to take care of, especially taking care of the people. I think it would be best if you knew my heart now. (Y/N).”

“Yes?” you said again, voice even lower this time. You didn’t how you were supposed to react in front of him.

“No other maiden has ever caught my eye, but ever since you set foot into the castle, I keep on trying to find my way to you. You’re a beautiful, bright woman... and it would really make me happy if you were my woman.”

Was he confessing? King Jinheung of the kingdom of Silla was confessing his feelings for you. The man you grew affection for reciprocated your feelings. The very person you were ordered to kill. You felt like something was lodged in your throat, making it impossible to respond. He had no idea what kind of person you were, and you were scared.

“You’re surprised, aren’t you?” Sam Maek Jong chuckled, oblivious to the situation. “You don’t have to say anything, but I still want to know if you feel the same way about me. A nod would be just fine.”

You slowly nodded your head.

Sam Maek Jong lightly squeezed your hand before letting go. He had a big smile on his face, satisfied with your answer. “I’ll come see you before night falls. You should go ahead, or the other maiden will really throw a fit.”

“I...I’ll be going, Your Highness.”

That night was the most recent time you saw the king. Following that very night and a few more days afterwards, you were determined. You were going to go through it. Looking at yourself in the mirror in your all-black outfit, you knew there was no going back.

Most of the palace were asleep already, minus some of the palace guards watching for trespassers. Your uncle had raised and trained you ever since your parents died. He prepared you for this and told you that it was going to be the greatest achievement of your life. Your uncle would be proud.

Could you really do it? Three days after the king’s confession, you found it so difficult to face him, scared that he would be able to see right through you. You might as well be dead if he found out about your secret. “You need to do this, (Y/N),” you whispered to yourself as you grabbed your sword out of the closet. Pulling up your mask over your mouth, you looked outside to see if anyone was wandering around the area before stealthily making it to the room that belonged to the future leader of Silla.

Quiet as a mouse, you entered the dark room. It took your eyes a minute to adjust to the lack of light. Your footsteps could barely be heard. The only noise was the king’s breathing. He laid in the middle of the room, sleeping soundly. Step by step, you closed the distance between the two of you. When you were able to see Sam Maek Jong’s face, your chest tightened.

“I sometimes wished I was born as someone else...” You remembered him telling you that one day.

“Why? What makes you say that, Your Highness?”

“I’m a coward, and a coward like me will never be able to bear the weight of the crown. All my life, I had to watch my own back. Other than Pa Oh, I can’t trust a single human being. Not the True Bones. Not the servants. Not even my own mother, the queen. I don’t have anyone to lean on because everyone is out to get me. They’d rather have me dead.”

You remembered how you remained silent after he said that. Then, when he called your name, you could barely face him. The guilt was eating you alive.

“But I can trust you, right (Y/N)? I want to trust you.”

Guilt. Even now it continued to eat you. The man in front of you wanted your loyalty. He didn’t have anyone else’s, and you were about to turn on him, too. Reaching behind you, you reached for your sword and wielded the weapon.

Trembling, you tried to hold onto the sword. Before you knew it, your eyes started to become blurry. For what reason did you need to assassinate a member of the Royal Family? It was an order from your uncle, but why did he have to involve King Jinheung? He was shoving his long hatred and vengeance on the Royal Family over to you, making you do his dirty work.

Your own reflection appeared on your sword, and you changed your mind. You didn’t have the heart to do it. You loved the king too much to take his life. “You insolent girl.” You knew that’s what your uncle would say before he killed you and take matters into his own hands. You would have to come to terms with that.

Death. You were prepared to greet it. That was the sacrifice you were willing to make. Then, the king would never find out.

“I’m so sorry,” you whispered to him before you began to back away. You turned around, attempting to leave before someone found you in the king’s room. Before you reached for the door, you heard the sound of sword slashing in the air, and a blade just inches from your throat, scaring you into dropping you own sword. You didn’t dare move.

“How dare you come into my room?” he hissed in a low voice. You’ve never heard him speak this coldly to anyone. “Who sent you? Tell me before I slit your throat.”

You glanced down at your sword. If you could push him back and reach your sword fast enough, you could fight him off to get away before he figured your identity. No. You already underestimated him once. If you moved, it was over. Your mind raced as you thought of a way to escape.

Maybe you would risk that chance. You were dead either way. “Ugh!” you grunted as you quickly pushed Sam Maek Jong, sending him stumbling backwards. At lightning speed, you scooped up your sword. Both of your weapons went up against each other, but still shaken up, you barely found any strength to fight back. Your sword was knocked out of your hands, and you were backed up against the door.

Sam Maek Jong held the sword against your neck once more. Now that you were facing him, you saw the rage in his eyes. “I will not say it again. Tell me who sent you,” he threatened with his teeth gritted.

With his free hand, he started to reach for your mask. “Stop-” Before you could finish, your face cover was yanked off.

Your couldn’t tell if your heart was working anymore. Probably because it had shattered in a million pieces. You’ve experienced it before: anger and betrayal. Those were the emotions your uncle always wore. That was what his people wore all the time. You know what it looked like. But seeing it on the king’s face along with confusion, and knowing you were responsible for it, you wanted nothing more than for him to strike you. You deserved it.

“(Y-Y/N)...” he managed to say while stuttering. His eyes were red, and you were your’s matched. Tears fell down your cheeks. “W-What are you... W-Were you trying to...”

“I...” There were no excuses to give.

“Tell me, (Y/N)!” his voice raised. Angry. Desperate. “Tell me this isn’t true! You walked into my room by mistake, right?! There’s no way. I refuse to believe this. Why would you do this?!”

“I was given an order,” you replied, voice shaking. “You can’t be king. That throne belongs to my uncle. It’s time for the Royal Family to step aside and stop interfering with the real owner of the throne. It is correct. I was sent here as an assassin to watch you and take action when it was time.”

“No...” The king removed the sword from you, and it clattered on the ground.

“What are you doing?!” you shouted as you glared at him. “Pick up the sword! I have rebelled against the king. I don’t deserve to live. I will take my consequence whatever it may be. If you let me go now, my own uncle will throw me away anyway, so pick up the sword!”

“Your own uncle will throw you away?” Sam Maek Jong repeated.

“That’s right! I’ve failed my mission. You think he’s going to give me a chance to live? Well, not a chance.”

“I’m not going to kill you.”

“What?”

“I love you, (Y/N). I stand by what I said about my feelings for you, and I know you feel the same way. Your uncle put you up to this, but you’re nothing like him. You don’t have to be like him, (Y/N). I know you want to be a good person. (Y/N), you are a good person. You don’t have to do this.”

“How are you so sure I haven’t been messing with your heart this whole time, and I have pretended to have feelings for you?” you asked in anguish. You felt sorry for him. A king, his world so cruel, and he was so pure.

“Because...” he replied, smiling sadly. “You could kill me right now. What’s stopping you? I don’t have a sword in my hand.” He raised his hands, showing his defenselessness.

You were going to choke on your own tears. The king bravely made his way towards you. He cupped his hand over your cheek and leaned in.close to you. When his lips touched you, you could taste the salt from his tears. Or were they your own? He kissed you and kissed you, and your whole body felt weak. You wanted to slump against him when he pulled away.

He then reached down, and fear spiked you when Sam Maek Jong slowly reached for your sword and placed it in your quivering hand. He stepped back until he was right in front of the tip of the blade. “It’s okay...” Sam Maek Jong assured you, the melancholy smile still on his face. “Finish your mission and go before the guards catch you.”

“No...” you cried. “I don’t want to.”

A cold assassin? The king was right. You were built to be that person, but that was never you. You were a weak young girl who missed her parents and just wanted someone to please.

You slid down to the wooden floor and placed your clean weapon on the floor. You continued to sob. Sam Maek Jong knelt down next to you and pulled you into his arms as you wept. “It’s okay,” he said again, holding you tight like he wanted to protect you from the rest of the world. “You’re going to be okay.”

“M-My uncle-”

“We’ll figure it out. I’ll keep you safe. If he wants to deal with me, I’m going to face him. I won’t be a coward anymore. I won’t let him get to you.”

536 notes · View notes

streetlight11 · 3 years ago

Text

Devoted Love

Summary: He is one of the top secret guards that was given the task to protect the Kingdom’s Emperor at all cost. Nobody knew about his secret job. Unfortunately, one day, he got badly wounded during a mission to which a local village doctor was sent to saved him. What he didn’t expect was falling in love with her.

Theme: Hwarang au, strangers to lovers

Genre: fluff, drama, action, sad

Warnings: mentions of blood, violence, open wounds, sharp objects, major character death

WC: 9.8k

Pairing: Guard!Taehyung x Doctor!FemReader

a/n: Hello! First of all, so sorry this took so long! I've been pretty busy the past few weeks but I'm back! Thank you for this request @mymisstina and for being patient with me! I hope I don't disappoint too much if it's not exactly how you pictured the storyline to be! P.S I wrote an alternate ending version here if you want a happier ending <3

Your family’s bloodline has been running with doctors all throughout the generations. From your ancestors, to your great great great grandmother, to your great great grandfather, to your great grandfather, to your grandmother, to your mother and now to you. Needless to say, you were slightly more interested in this as compared to your younger brother, but at least there’s someone in the family who would most likely keep the knowledge and skill alive for the next generations to come.

All the local villagers knew you as one of the Jeon doctors. Jeon was your family name and of course, everyone knew who you were for you had begun to slowly take over your mother’s place whenever people came for a treatment. You’re only 25 and yet your mother was already transferring her title to you.

Hence, because of that, you were crowned as not only the youngest village doctor in town but also a very skilled one at best. Despite your amazing ability to treat people’s sickness and wounds to perfection and save lives multiple times, people also see you as the cheerful, friendly, kind-hearted, chatty young adult that just makes everyone feel so endeared to you.

Therefore, people of Silla Kingdom believe that you have a bright future ahead of you.

Everyday was work for you, including today on a Sunday afternoon where you had just gotten back from the local market with your brother to buy some vegetables and chicken meat for your mother.

The minute you walk through those doors, your mother’s voice calls for you from the small room in your home where you treat people. You let out a soft sigh as you turned to your brother and handed him the paper bags filled with groceries.

“Have fun working dear sister.” Jungkook, your younger brother teased as you slapped the back of his head knowing he could do whatever he wanted for he was free from having to treat the ill. Nevertheless, you went into the small room and plastered a small smile to your face when you saw your mother mixing a concoction into a wooden bowl.

“Sweetie, did you buy the ginseng root and rosemary like I told you to?” She asked as you gave her a firm nod before she told you to get some of it from the kitchen.

After a few minutes of helping to lather the herbal medicine all over the man’s open wound on his shin, you helped to wrap the cloth around his leg to protect the wound from any bacteria. He thanked you and your mother for helping him on a weekend, saying he felt bad but didn’t know what else to do.

“It’s okay sir. I wish you a quick recovery.” You smiled as he soon walked out the door after returning your smile. The second he left, your mother placed a firm hand on your shoulder with a proud smile on her face.

“I’m so proud of you Y/N. I’m sure Emperor Choi would be proud to have you as the village’s doctor once I’ve stepped down from this title.” Her words left a huge mark on you. To say you love the job was an understatement. However, it doesn’t stop you from thinking you still have a lot to improve on in terms of your skill and yet, everyone already has high expectations of you.

This didn’t help with the stress being loaded on you.

“I chose you for I believe you master the skills of a true warrior, one that is capable of fulfilling your tasks as a protector towards me, your Emperor. Am I able to say that?” Emperor Choi says from his throne as he keeps his gaze locked on the young man dressed in all black hanbok, a leather wide waist belt, long dark brown hair with a sword attached to the back of his belt, who was kneeled before him at the foot of the steps.

“Yes, Your Majesty.” The young male said without a single shift in his voice.

“Very good. And I believe you understand the rules then?” Emperor Choi tilts his head up high to show his authority as King.

“I understand, Your Majesty.”

The king smiles in satisfaction before he gets up from the throne and makes his way down the steps carefully while he takes the sword that was handed to him by the Chief of Hwarang warriors. The king stops at the last step right in front of where the male was kneeled, only to raise his sword and make the official announcement.

“By the power vested in me, I hereby appoint you, Kim Taehyung, warrior of Hwarang to be my personal guard from here on out. Do not disappoint me or there will be serious consequences.”

“I will not disappoint you, Your Majesty. Thank you for this opportunity.” Taehyung said as the king smiled slightly before he spoke up.

“It never comes twice. Remember that.” Emperor Choi says firmly before he makes his leave and so did Taehyung.

During the day, Taehyung worked as a local fisherman with his father. After he catches the freshwater fishes, he and his dad sell them at the farmer’s market in the village. Nobody knows about his secret job other than himself, the Emperor and the guards at the palace. He was told to keep his identity unknown to the public to protect him from any outside danger.

Taehyung was known to be a cold-hearted person whereby he was someone who isn’t particularly good at expressing his feelings.

He grew up without a motherly figure in his life and to have a father who is always working, almost forgetting he has a child at home, makes it hard for Taehyung to receive or give affection. Therefore, having almost no history of falling in love with anyone. He wasn’t really desperate in searching for one nor is he currently eyeing anyone in particular. That doesn’t mean he does not wish to be with someone one day.

It was a busy day in Silla Kingdom for the local villagers as everyone was so persistent in stocking up their food supplies. Taehyung was by the side, helping his dad cut and remove the intestines of the fishes if someone requests for it.

He had just gathered the sliced raw fish wrapped in paper and gave it to the lady when he heard a cheerful voice coming from where his dad was. He glanced over to see a girl talking to his father.

It was you.

You had a basket filled with vegetables, dried chillies and other food supplies on your right arm, the other hand poking and checking to see which fish you wanted to purchase.

The way your eyes sparkled under the sun while you chatted with his father, how your voice sounded so full of excitement, how you rarely talked about yourself and instead, asked his father about his day, so many more others that Taehyung could probably list out in his head. He was so distracted by you that he didn’t even notice his father holding out a fresh Carp fish to him.

“Oi, are you going to just stand there all day or are you going to help this lady cut the fish?” His father asked as Taehyung shook his head slightly before he apologized.

“Right. Sorry.” Taehyung mumbled as he took the fish and began to make precise incisions to remove the innards. Just as he was rinsing the fish under the running water to get rid of the excess blood, you came over with a bright smile on your face.

“Is he your father?” You asked in a hushed tone, causing Taehyung to look at you with a brow raised.

“Yes.”

“Does he always talk like that to you?” You asked as a small sad pout formed on your lips. You saw the way his face dropped for a second before he replied to you.

“Why do you want to know?” He said.

“I just feel a little bad. I mean, I could’ve done this later myself but your father gave it to you before I could say no. Sorry.” You apologized but was quick to go back to your cheery self when you saw him wrap the fish and hand it to you.

“Either way, thank you! Have a nice day!” You flashed him a big smile, soon placing the bag into your basket. Afterwhich, you waved goodbye to him and his father. Taehyung watched as you did a little hop every now and then down the street. Either he was going crazy or he actually thought you were quite adorable. Maybe it’s the latter.

A few nights later, it was already coming to 10pm and you were just helping your mother stir the new concoction of herbal medication cream she wanted to store in a jar when there was a frantic knock on your front door. This makes you jump while your mother whips her head to stare at the door. She yells at Jungkook to open the door, only to hear shuffled footsteps making its way to greet whoever that came at this ungodly hour.

Your brother pulls the door open, only to be met with two of the palace guards.

“Can I help you?” Jungkook asked slightly confused as one of them replied to him.

“We need one of you to follow us to the palace.”

“What for?”

Before anyone could continue, your mother came to join Jungkook by the door as she gave the two armed men a polite smile and asked, “May I know what is the issue?”

“There has been an unfortunate injury on one of our guards and we need someone to aid him immediately.” With that being said, your mother responded without giving a second thought.

“My daughter will go.” You nearly choked on your own saliva, staring at your mother in shock.

“We need to go, now.” The guard said, making your mother approach you telling you to get dressed while she packs the things you might need. After you came back fully dressed, your mother passed you the satchel and whispered to you saying, “You’ll be alright.” Sure you’ve treated many injuries before but never have you treated someone from the palace. The journey to the palace was shorter than you think, as the grounds were heavily guarded along the whole perimeter.

You followed quietly behind one guard while the other was trailing behind you. They led you around the palace, bringing you to a room. Where inside, lies a man dressed in all black, his face covered by the cloth mask to show only his eyes. The man was badly wounded. There was a deep cut in his left rib and a slash to his right shoulder.

A soft gasp left your lips as the two guards gestured for you to enter, only to then close the door behind them leaving you alone with the injured man.

Without further ado, you kneeled down beside the man to put your bag down before going to get a bowl and fill it with warm water. You came back to hear the man hissing, to which you crinkle your nose out of instinct as you wince just imagining the pain he was going through. You soaked a clean towel into the warm water, squeezing it to remove excess water.

“I will need you to take these off. Can you move?” You asked softly while you pointed to the belt he was wearing. The man never said a word but instead opted for a nod. You carefully helped him into a sitting position before he slowly removed the belt and placed it aside.

Just then, you remembered he needed to take his hanbok off so that you could aid his wounds.

“Uh, I need these off too… okay?” You asked, earning a nod from him. To that, you helped him with the hanbok, pushing the material off his shoulders to reveal his honey toned skin, chiseled abs now coated with drips of crimson red blood from the wounds.

Once he was laying down again, you started to clean his wounds, carefully swiping the towel over his skin where there were blood stains all over. You managed to clean most of it, rinsing your towel again and squeezing it to get rid of excess water. You gently dab on the open wounds to soak the fresh oozing blood, occasionally hearing his breath hitch whenever the towel made contact with his flesh. You would then apologize if he did that.

You took the herbal cream your mother made the other day that was meant to be put onto an open wound for a few minutes then wipe off the excess, then close the wound, put more cream on top then wrap the entire part with bandage to let the medication act as a protective seal from bacteria.

That was exactly the process you did.

Minutes ticked by and you were just waiting for the cream to do it’s healing magic. All the while, having to listen to the man groan and hiss if the herbs tingled on his wound a little harshly.

You were just preparing the curved needle that’s used to suture open wounds, when you heard him speak up.

“Aren’t you a little young for a doctor?”

You turned around to find him leaning against the wall for support, to which you smiled at him.

“I guess my parents wanted to pass down the job to me as quickly as possible.” You laughed but he didn’t. The room fell awfully quiet again so this time, it was your turn to ask a question.

“Do you do this everyday? What is it like to be a palace guard? Is it scary to fight off the bad guys?” Your questions came tumbling in, you probably annoyed the hell out of him now… Great.

“Yes I do. It’s okay, I guess? And… Not scary at all.” He replied, shocking you that he actually did.

“Really? How do you fight them off? Do you use a sword or something?”

“What do you think we use then? Of course a sword.” He said, his voice laced with a tinge of sarcasm but then you heard a very faint chuckle from him.

You didn’t know why but you felt your cheeks burning. You cleared your throat awkwardly, telling him to stay there while you go get a new bowl of warm water to clean the herbal cream off his wounds. You spent the next few minutes finishing up the last few steps, successfully sewing his wounds close as best as you could before applying extra cream over the wounds and soon wrapping his torso and shoulder with bandage.

Once you were done, you cleared the place and discarded all the used items into the trash. You had kept your stuff back into your satchel and was about to leave when he called to you softly from his seat. You turned around to meet his eyes. For some reason, his eyes looked so familiar but you couldn’t point out who or where you knew him from.

“Thank you, Doctor…” He said, thanking you politely with a slight bow of his head. This made you return his kind gesture and gave him a smile too.

“You're welcome. Remember to not move so much. Don’t do anything dangerous for the next week or two at least!” You reminded him as he simply nodded but you could see the way his eyes creased, indicating that he was smiling behind the mask. He never said anything else as you left the room, leaving Taehyung there with the silliest smile on his face.

Is it too fast for him to admit he’s in love?

3 days went by and you were out to the local farmer’s market again to grab food supplies for your mother. You were strolling down the street when you spotted Taehyung just skillfully cutting the fish into smaller pieces before putting it on the tray for villagers to choose from. This made you smile as you walked over to his stall, making sure to sneak up on him. The moment he was going to turn around and face his chopping table again, you leaped forward to scare him.

“Boo!” You said, both hands were out. However, his reaction wasn’t really one you hoped to get because he barely even flinched. Instead, all he did was stare at you like you were an embarrassment. “Psh, you’re boring…” You pouted, crossing your arms over your chest while you walked to the front to choose some fishes.

Taehyung had to hold himself back from smiling despite having the urge to.

“Where’s your father?” You asked as you peeled the Trout’s gills up to check the freshness of the fish.

“He went to get more.” Taehyung said in which you nodded.

“Do you live around here?”

“Not really. Why?”

“That’s weird. So you’re not from Silla?”

“I guess you can say that?”

You nodded, giving him two Trout’s for him to weigh and wrap it for you. He was going to take the fishes and take out the innards for you when you stopped him, “No need for that. I can do it later at home. Thanks anyway.” You giggled, going ahead to hand him the bill while he passed you the fish. Once again, you left him smiling like a complete idiot.

“How dare you step foot into this palace. I will not let you near the King.” Taehyung seethed through his teeth, holding his sword firmly in his grip as he pointed the weapon towards the group of rivaled warriors who were on a mission to kill Emperor Choi.

“You shall not interfere in our business, unless you want your head off.” One of the men said as Taehyung got into his fighting stance.

“Over my dead body.” Taehyung said, drawing his arm back and soon charging straight to his right, slicing the air to cut a good chunk of flesh off two of the warrior’s torso. He quickly used his sword to block the attack from his left, pushing them forcefully only to twirl his sword around one of it and flicking his wrist up. The enemy’s sword flew up into the air as Taehyung grabbed the base, successfully equipping two weapons.

The fight was highly unfair considering it was 10 against 1 but there was a reason why the Emperor chose him to be his secret guard and that was because of Taehyung’s amazing fight skills. He was trained from a young age, learning and gaining knowledge on how to be a warrior.

However, despite all these achievements and training, it is still quite close to impossible for him to win the fight when there’s so many of them and just him alone.

Taehyung managed to injure half of them by swinging his swords around, slicing and cutting their limbs like it was chicken meat. The sound of metal clinking against one another every time their swords come in contact, echoed the palace walls. He was so busy fighting off two of the men that he completely misjudged the man leaping to attack him from the side.

The man drew his sword back and swiftly sliced Taehyung’s back, earning a loud groan from him.

He quickly plunged the swords into the two men’s torso and soon pulled it out, letting their fresh red crimson blood ooze out of the open wounds. Taehyung’s clothes were splattered with blood, his eyes were burning with rage, thankful that he had a cloth mask on to cover his face except for his eyes.

4 down, 6 more to go.

His back was throbbing, he was starting to feel weaker by the second but he was determined to finish what they started.

Hence, with that mindset, Taehyung glared at the four figures running towards him from every direction only to easily run and slide against the pebbled ground in between two of them and make a break for the side roof. He ran across the roof leaping from one roof to another while 4 others were trailing behind him and another 2 followed from ground level. Taehyung led them to the other side of the palace, away from the Emperor.

Once he reached the other side of the palace, hopped off the roof and swung his swords, flicking his wrist to allow the blades to slice through the air and eventually, the two men’s necks. He didn’t decapitate them but it was enough to slit their throats to kill them off.

Now it was left with the 4 men.

With skillful attacks and fast reflexes, Taehyung managed to stay alive despite the cuts he got on his arm and chest.

However, he was weak from the exhausting fight and yet, there was somewhere he wanted to be. Someone he wants to see in the midst of all this chaos. He wasn’t sure if it was a good idea. If he should go. What if his identity gets exposed? What if someone sees him and finds out who he really is? He was supposed to keep his identity hidden. Even with these thoughts, he was already on his way to the one place he had in mind.

Hence, the reason why about 15 minutes later, he was currently standing outside a home which everyone had grown to recognize and soon knocking on it. The minute the door opened, Taehyung couldn’t help but collapse. A pair of strong arms caught his body, mumbling a soft “what the hell” before the former brought Taehyung inside and soon called for the person he wanted to see most. Not long after Taehyung was led to the small room which was specially made for treating injured people, Jungkook turns to you after you enter.

“Who is this?” You whispered.

“I don’t know. He looks like a palace guard. He’s pretty weak and bleeding quite a lot.” Jungkook said as you nodded.

When you gathered all the things you needed and went over to Taehyung, you instantly recognized those eyes. It was the same as the one you treated the other night when you got called to the palace. You have no idea who he was and Taehyung would like to keep it that way for as long as he could. You walked up to him and walked him through the process of what you had to do before you actually did it.

He simply nodded quietly, letting you do your job. Jungkook left after he helped you stir up some herbs for the traditional treatment paste.

The room was quiet as you did your part, making sure you thoroughly cleaned his wounds before putting any paste on it. All the while, Taehyung watched quietly as you lathered the herbal paste on the wound on his chest. Unfortunately, curiosity got the best of you when you realized his old scars were still prominent on his chest from when you aided him the first time at the palace which was not long ago.

“I thought I told you not to do anything dangerous for the next week or two?” You asked slightly disappointed that he didn’t listen to you.

“My duty is to protect the Emperor at all costs. Do you think I get injured for the fun of it?” His voice was deep and almost as if he was pissed.

“No, but-”

“Did you think I could easily take a break whenever I want to?” He raised his voice at you. Taehyung didn’t know why he was getting so worked up when his initial intentions were to see you and feel happy about it.

Unfortunately, it seems like you didn’t understand his job and just simply thinks it’s easy for him to avoid getting injured. You grew quiet, not knowing exactly how to go around the topic so you opted for silence. After you were done suturing his wounds and wrapping him up in bandage, you gave him a small jar filled with the herbal paste for him to put on his wounds tomorrow. Taehyung left without a word, feeling slightly guilty for yelling when you didn’t really do anything wrong.

Maybe avoiding you for now would be a good idea.

“Oi, remove the innards.” His father said as he tossed the Carp onto the cutting table Taehyung was standing at. He lets out a sigh but nevertheless cuts the fish like he was tasked. His mind was somewhere else, he couldn’t get proper sleep last night after the unfortunate encounter with you at your home. He hasn’t seen you in the past week during the day and he hoped he wouldn’t see you today as well. Except of course, luck was never on his side.

“Good morning!” Your voice beamed from his right, making him look up to see you bouncing on your feet towards him. He could never understand how you have that much energy when it’s early in the morning.

“Morning.” He replied monotonously, handing the wrapped fish to the woman waiting to the left.

“Had a good catch today?” You asked, your voice cheery as usual.

“It was quite alright. What are you buying today?” Taehyung asked despite wanting to avoid you. It seems like even he can’t resist your bright personality which just makes people like you.

“What do you recommend?” You asked while putting your hands behind your back. You were wearing a pretty baby blue hanbok today with your hair tied in a half up-do. Needless to say, you were very pretty in his eyes. How he wished he could just ask you out. Taehyung didn’t realize he was staring blankly at you until you waved a hand in front of his face to get his attention. He shook his head slightly, only to hear you giggle. Oh, how that simple laugh makes his heart flutter.

“Is there something interesting on my face?” You asked with a soft giggle at the end, finding this whole situation funnily cute.

“U-Uh, no. Not at all. Um, I do recommend the catfish and white bass.”

“Great. I’ll have one of each. No need to cut for me.” You smiled, allowing him to wrap the fishes in paper while you reached into your wallet to take out your money. After successfully paying for it, you placed it in your basket and soon looked up at him again. Taehyung was already looking at you softly and that’s when you decided to ask for his name. It took him a while to answer, but when he did, you smiled genuinely at him.

“Thank you for the fish, Taehyung. I’ll see you again soon.” You said, earning a soft nod and for the first time ever, Taehyung smiled.

Gosh, did he have such a gorgeous smile.

You thought he was interesting considering he was a little cold and unfriendly at first but as the days went by and you met him a few times while buying groceries for your mother, you managed to get some reaction from him. And that very last interaction you had where he smiled at you, made you realise that maybe he isn’t as cold and unfriendly as you thought. Looks like you were slowly getting to see another side of him and you loved it.

However, the only times you met him was when you went to your weekly grocery run at the local farmer’s market. It has been almost two months now and you start to wonder what he does after selling fish during the day. You don’t seem to bump into him at other times of the day except the afternoon. Even when you meet your friends in the evening, you don’t think you’ve ever seen him anywhere and you wonder why.

It was currently a bright Saturday morning where your mother told you there were still food ingredients in the house so you didn’t have to go to the market. However, you still wanted to head out for a little walk since it was a pretty nice day out.

So you excused yourself to head to the cherry blossom pond that was located just 10 minutes away from your home.

You were wearing a rosy pink hanbok today, your hair flowed along with the wind. The sun was shining brightly down on you, sunrays kissing your skin where your hanbok wasn’t covering. The park was fairly empty with not many people around. Just as you were about to head to the wooden bridge, you looked across the pond where the floating gazebo lies and that’s when you saw a very familiar face just leaning against the barrier looking like he had a lot going on in his mind.

You knew he probably wanted some time alone. But you being you, curiosity kills the cat and in this case, curiosity was really getting the best of you. Hence, the reason why you decided to head over there to say hello.

He was so caught up in his thoughts that he didn’t even realize you were coming until your voice brought him out of his deep thoughts.

“Penny for your thoughts?” You asked as Taehyung glanced over his shoulder to lock eyes with you.

He wasn’t sure if he should be happy or upset to see you.

“No thanks.” He said quietly under his breath, leaving you to frown at the lack of reaction from him.

“Is something bothering you? Perhaps… Am I bothering you? Because I can leave if you want. I really didn’t mean to disturb you.” You began to panic but he was quick to reassure you that you aren’t the reason for his lack of reactions.

“No, it’s not you… There’s just a lot in my mind right now.”

“Do you want to talk about it?” You asked out of curiosity but sometimes, you tend to forget people might want privacy. Which is why when Taehyung turns to you with a raised eyebrow, you quickly apologize.

“I mean, you don’t have to tell me if you don’t want to! I just think it’s never good to bottle your emotions up because you might burst one day when you least- okay I’ll stop talking.” You ended your blabbering when you heard him let out a heavy sigh. You were a naturally chatty person so you tend to talk a lot even when others are not interested in listening to you. However, for some reason, this was exactly why Taehyung liked you. You were different from him. You find everything and anything so interesting even the little things seem extraordinary to you.

And oh boy do you love to talk and find out more about every single thing. Your curiosity tends to get the best of you and he loved it. So when you began to babble earlier on, he sighed not because he was annoyed but because he felt that he wanted to share to you what was on his mind despite not knowing you at a much deeper level.

Taehyung has never opened up to anyone so easily, not even his dad and yet, he felt like he could tell you anything. Maybe it was your charming personality, maybe it was your curious character, or just maybe because he likes you.

“I’m just… thinking about how my life would have turned out if my mother was still here with me…” He paused, allowing you to let his words sink in before he heard you ask very quietly as though you were afraid to click his wrong button.

“I don’t mean to pry… b-but where’s your mother now?”

“I really want to believe she’s in heaven… She passed on when giving birth to me. So I never really had a motherly figure by my side growing up.” He told you, making you feel bad for being so curious.

“O-Oh… I’m so sorry…”

“No, it’s fine.” Both of you fell quiet for a few seconds before he spoke up again, “I don’t have a good relationship with my dad… and you probably know that already. Let’s just say he isn’t the best at showing his emotions…”

With that being said, you accidentally blurted out under your breath, “Now I know where that came from…” Taehyung heard you clear as day, making you stutter an apology but all he did was chuckle. For some reason, he actually felt like a heavy weight got lifted off his shoulders after telling you what was going on in his mind. You stood beside him politely, eyes trained on the fishes that were swimming in the pond beneath you.

“Enough of me… What about you? I heard your entire family tree consists of doctors? Are you one too?” Taehyung asked despite already knowing this bit of information. A little too well in all honesty.

“Oh yes! Apparently my mother’s side are the ones who had doctors all throughout the generations. Except, only I seem to inherit this special skill because my lazy brother couldn’t be bothered to aid people. He said it’s a boring job.” You rolled your eyes at that, only to hear Taehyung chuckle.

“You seem like you love your brother a lot…” He teased you even though he knows it’s not true to a certain extent.

“Love? Please. He’s so useless most of the time. I can’t believe he calls himself a doctor just because of our family background when he can’t even put a bandaid on properly! Do you know how many times I yell at him to disinfect the wound first before applying any cream or putting a bandaid on? He doesn’t even know the difference between a ginger and a ginseng.” You didn’t realize you were blabbering again until he told you to take a deep breath.

“I never thought someone would have so many complaints about one’s sibling this much…” Taehyung said, making you break out into a laughing fit. He loved your laugh. It was always so carefree and loud. He always thought that he would never know how being in love truly feels.

Looks like he finally knows it now.

He couldn’t tear his eyes off you as you threw your head back with your hand covering your mouth politely while you laughed.

This was the first time you ever had a proper long conversation with him and you can say that you enjoyed talking to him. You just wish you could stay here with him forever. However, you remembered your mother told you to be back before noon to help her with some stuff at home. Which was why you excused yourself to head home but Taehyung offered to walk you home.

Of course you couldn’t reject his offer, partly because you wanted to spend more time with him. Needless to say, you tried to take in every minute with him even when you were just a few metres away from your home now. Right before you left him, you turned to him with a bright smile on your face.

“Thank you for walking with me. I hope you’ll smile more often. See you again soon, Taehyung.” You said as the corner of his lips curved upwards and soon gave you a firm nod. However, aside from already getting to have an actual conversation with you, there was just one thing that neither of you seemed to realize up till a few seconds ago.

“I’d hate to break it to you, My Lady… But I never really got to know your name even though we just had a long conversation earlier today.”

“Oh! You’re right! Sorry… It’s Y/N.” You said, blushing in embarrassment when you heard your name roll off his tongue. It sounded so good when he said it.

“Well, have a good day. I’ll see you again soon, Y/N.” Taehyung said, only for you to shyly giggle before running straight to your doorstep. He found the way you bounced with every step you took, simply adorable to him. If this is what falling in love feels like, he wouldn’t mind falling in love with you over and over again.

The next few weeks went by, filling your days with either visiting him at the farmer’s market for you weekly grocery run or meeting him at the gazebo to spend some time with him alone. It was quite obvious that you both had mutual feelings for each other. It’s just a matter of time when one of you would pluck the courage and confess first. Unfortunately, as much as he wants to just tell you he loves you and probably wants to take your hand in marriage, he knows it was going to be hard for him considering his secret job as the Emperor’s guard came with a lot of consequences if he ever goes against the rules set for him.

One of which is having a significant other while having the title of being the Emperor’s secret guard. Of course it was unfair for him considering he’s young and is of that age whereby he wants to feel loved by someone. However, he knows what he signed up for and has no choice but to obey them despite accidentally falling in love with a cheerful girl who happens to be the village’s well known doctor thanks to their family bloodline.

Taehyung didn’t expect any of this to happen when he agreed to the job. If he knew he’d meet you and fall in love with you, he would never have taken up the job no matter how honourable that job title was.

It was a Friday late afternoon and you were just helping your mother with some of the herbal mixture when there was a knock on the front door.

“Jungkook, who is it?” Your mother called from beside you as you heard your brother’s footsteps approaching the door and pulled it open to reveal someone standing there. You could hear their muffled conversation but you don’t exactly know what they were saying. Until your brother appeared at the doorway of the treatment room with a smirk on his devil looking face.

“Someone’s here to see you, sis.” Jungkook said, making you frown. Before you could ask who, your brother steps aside and you immediately locked eyes with Taehyung who had a bashful smile on his face.

“Taehyung… What are you doing here?” You asked as a small chuckle left your lips. All the while, your mother was just quietly watching this with a smile on her face. Taehyung noticed your mother so he politely greeted her before asking her a question.

“Hello Mrs Jeon. I don’t mean to be rude, but perhaps, is it okay if I take your daughter out for the evening? I promise she won’t be back home too late.” Taehyung said, to which your mother happily agreed.

“Oh yes yes, of course you may. I trust that you will keep my daughter safe, correct?” She asked.

“Of course Mrs Jeon.”

“Okay then. You kids have fun.” Mrs Jeon said as she turned to you and grinned.

“Leave it. I’ll get your brother to help me.” This made Jungkook’s mouth fall open, clearly feeling betrayed by her words. You couldn’t help but stuck your tongue out at your brother and made a teasing gesture at him, earning a little punch to your arm but not enough to actually hurt you. With that being said, you changed into your lavender hanbok and soon left the house with Taehyung. The two of you walked around the village, talking about almost everything you could think of.

You didn’t realize this but you were walking towards the park where you usually went to. Except this time, he brought you to the other side of the park where there was a hidden gazebo that was surrounded by beautiful cherry blossom trees and instead of a pond, it was on the lake.

The scenery was so stunning, you went speechless when you stepped foot into the gazebo.

Taehyung silently watched as you got excited over the fallen cherry blossoms and lily pads that covered a good amount of the water’s surface. Your eyes seemed to sparkle whenever you got excited and he loved that about you. He was busy admiring you, not paying attention to when you reached your hand out only to have a cherry blossom flower fall onto your palm. With that fresh flower, you went up to him to show the beautiful pink flower.

“Taehyung! Look! Isn’t it so pretty?” You asked as he gently shook his head to bring him back to reality, only for him to smile softly and take the flower from your hand.

“You know what else is pretty? You.” Taehyung said smoothly, earning a little giggle from you after your heart skipped a beat. Who knew he could be this cheesy for someone who doesn’t know how to express his feelings. No doubt, you remained quiet, suddenly too shy to reply to him. You were just standing at the edge, smiling at the pretty view when you felt him slot something into the top of your ear in between it and your hair.

You turned around and reached a hand up, that’s when you felt a flower sticking out above your ear.

Taehyung smiled as he saw the way your eyes were struggling to look at him. Your pupils are shaking desperately, unsure of where to look. So he took it upon himself to carefully take a step forward just to see how you would react. When he got barely any sign of you wanting to push him away, he slowly took another step closer while he reached a hand up to cup your face.

Your breath hitched in your throat as he leaned closer and closer until you felt his nose brush against your own very subtly. Almost like he was teasing you.

So without further ado, he whispered softly asking for permission which was such a gentlemanly gesture that left you melting into a puddle for him.

“Can I kiss you?”

You didn’t have to be asked twice as you simply nodded and gave him your response. Taehyung smiled, feeling his heart race in his chest. That was all he needed before he finally captured you in a sweet kiss. His lips were softer than you imagined. It almost felt surreal to him. He snaked his arms around your waist, pulling you closer like he was afraid you might slip out of his hands. He didn’t want to let you go. He wished he could stay here with you forever but he couldn’t. He had to go for a special mission tonight in which he wasn’t sure if he would make it out alive by the end of it.

Hence, that was the reason why he decided to meet you now and let you know how he felt for you in case he doesn’t get the chance after tonight. But of course, he wasn’t going to tell you that. All he could do now was pray to God that he will make it out alive not just for himself but also for you. He doesn’t want tonight to be the last time he gets to kiss you, to hug you like he was now.

With that strong will and mindset, he will do whatever it takes to stay alive tonight.

It’s been hours since that kiss you had with Taehyung and if you were being completely honest, nobody has ever made you feel so many butterflies every single time you saw him and that kiss was the definition of a fairytale for you. It was so heartfelt and raw that you feel like you’ve connected to him to a much deeper level now. And for that, you were grateful for him. However, your sleep got disrupted by the loud bangs on your front door. Your parents left after you got home earlier when they received a message from one of the fellow villagers saying that your grandmother was ill.

Since she lived in a different part of Silla Kingdom, they would have to be away for at least a few days. With that being said, you grumbled tiredly while dragging your feet to the door. Unfortunately, you were forced awake when a figure dressed in all black came crashing into your arms, completely limp. What catches your attention though was the very strong smell of copper and the trail of blood he left in his wake down the cobblestones of your house’s pathway.

You recognized this man anywhere, it was the same man you aided two times now who looks to a palace guard. With how much you were struggling, you yelled for your brother who came running down the hall when he saw you struggling with the unconscious man in your arms.

Jungkook carried the man into the treatment room, laying him down on the wooden platform before rushing to the kitchen to get you a bowl of warm water.

This time, the injury was definitely worse than before. He was stabbed in his right rib, his arm has a huge gash from one end of his left forearm to his elbow, a prominent slash on his left cheek and a deep cut on his right shoulder. He was losing a lot of blood, making you panic. However, you weren’t really good at hiding it. You made Jungkook prepare the things you need to treat his wounds, not knowing why you suddenly had a meltdown.

The poor man was growing in and out of consciousness as you couldn’t focus on the task at hand. He was still bleeding out even when you were already putting a lot of pressure on his rib with the towel in your hands. You didn’t know how to stop the bleed, the whole situation was definitely overwhelming for you. Tears were starting to pool in your eyes when all of a sudden, the man reached for your shaky hand weakly. On normal occasions, you might actually think this man was a bad person.

Yet, his touch felt so familiar to you. It actually brought you comfort.

“D-Don’t panic… B-Breathe… I-I know y-you... c-can help m-me… P-Ple-ase… Y/N…” At the mention of your name, that’s when you gasped. No wonder he felt so familiar. No wonder you felt like you knew this person all this while. No wonder his touch felt so comforting.

“T-Taehyung?”

He gave you a weak smile before he pulled his mask off to reveal his handsome face.

You couldn’t believe it but this wasn’t your biggest priority right now. His life is. With that being said, you cupped his face and whispered a promise to him that you dearly held on to.

“I promise I’ll save you but you have to promise me you’ll stay alive… Okay?” Your tears were streaming down your face now, no longer caring about holding it back. Taehyung gives you a very weak nod, only to wrap his fingers around your wrist which was holding his face. Without further ado, you spent the next hour trying your best to treat his wounds and keep him alive. It was tough because of how constantly he went in and out of consciousness due to the lack of blood flowing through his body but you managed to save him and keep him alive.

You left him to rest, knowing he was probably exhausted after the brutal fight. No doubt, you still can’t wrap your mind around him being a palace guard. Did he know what he signed up for? Did he really not care if he would get badly wounded?

After you’ve cleaned up the mess, you quietly went to check on Taehyung who was just fast asleep on your couch where Jungkook placed him. He was laying there peacefully. There were so many questions you wanted to ask him. So many thoughts going through your mind. You quietly kneeled down beside the couch as you caressed his soft cheek where he had the fresh scar from earlier. You begin to wonder just how much longer is he supposed to risk his life like this.

He unconsciously leaned into your touch, making you cup his face fully. Just then, he opened his eyes carefully only to see his pretty brown orbs trying to focus his vision. You smiled down at him, sliding your hand back to thread your fingers through his hair.

“Why are you awake? Go and rest more.” You whispered but he could only smile weakly at you.

“D-Don’t… leave m-me… p-pl-ease.” His voice was barely audible, not to mention lack of any energy. So you nodded. You stayed there beside him the entire night, your fingers locked with him as you held his hand to give him the comfort he needed. Hours later, you aided him until he got better. You cooked for him your mother’s secret recipe to your favourite herbal soup that always heals you from any pain and sickness.

The next few days, you would stop by the farmer’s market to give him two attached steel metal food containers that were filled with rice in one and your mother’s herbal soup in the other, after seeing him work despite telling him to rest. However, now that you know what his job requires him to do, you couldn’t really nag at him considering it was his job. All you could do was give him your moral support by visiting him at the lake gazebo before he goes off to his secret guard duties. Every evening, before he leaves you at your doorstep, he repeats the same words to you and seals the deal with a kiss.

“I promise to protect you with my life. I love you, my princess.”

You woke up this morning to being frantically shook by your shoulders. It was still quite early for you to function but it looks like there was something far more important than your sleep. Jungkook’s voice beamed over you as he roughly shook your shoulders to wake you up. You groaned in annoyance, thinking he was just messing with you. Unfortunately, he wasn’t.

“Noona! Wake up! We got a message from the locals saying that someone from the royal guards was going to be executed today for disobeying the Emperor’s words! I… I think it’s Taehyung.” His words made you jolt up on the bed, staring at him dead in the eyes worriedly.

“What?! Why?!”

“They said that the guard was seen meeting a girl at the lake gazebo every evening and shared romantic feelings with each other. Noona, it’s definitely you and him.”

“Shit!” You cursed under your breath as you ran out of the room to change out of your sleeping gown and into a hanbok. Jungkook decided to follow you along, wanting no harm to come your way. After what felt like hours of running, you finally arrived at the palace where both you and Jungkook had to squeeze past the crowd to get to the front. Only to be blocked with the palace guards. There in the main courtyard, kneeled before the crowd was Taehyung dressed in his all black fit. His mask was still on but his eyes were still the same brown ones.

Except they were swollen and bruised, probably from being tortured last night. His hands were bound behind his back. Your heart swelled seeing this. You couldn’t take it. You watched as the Emperor stood up from his throne and took closer steps towards the back of Taehyung and the executor who was holding onto a sharp sword that was wider than a normal sword. One that was made for punishment.

“I have appointed this young man to be my protector, my guard. He knows the rules and regulations and yet chooses to defy me as King!” Emperor Choi states out loud, only to get a mixture of response from the crowd.

“He’s still young! He deserves to be in love!”

“Off with his head!”

“No one should go against you, Your Majesty!”

“Give him a chance!”

“He just wants to feel loved!”

“Behead him, Your Majesty!”

“He deserves to be punished!”

You glanced around to where you heard those sentences being shouted towards the Emperor, knowing the King can be very selfish sometimes. Which is why he raised his voice to stop the commotion.

“Silence! Because of his defiancy to me as King… this young man will be executed for his actions.” He stated as the crowd began to get rowdy. You watched as the executor began to circle Taehyung until he stopped a little to his right. The minute he raised his arms high with the sword in his grip, suspense was killing you and you had to do something. You’re not going to let them kill the love of your life right in front of you.

Never in a million years.

“STOP!” You yelled at the top of your lungs, hoping your voice was loud enough to reach both the executor and the King’s ears. Luckily, it did.

With that being said, everyone turned to look at you. However, your eyes were stuck on the King and eventually, glancing over to lock eyes with Taehyung’s frantic ones. Everyone in the crowd of villagers were confused. What are you doing? Why were you telling them to stop? Aren’t you one of the Jeon doctors?

You ignored their whispers and stares as you pushed past the guards and continued to walk closer to where Taehyung was.

“Please don’t punish him, Your Majesty… It was me. I was the one who insisted on having this relationship despite knowing his commitments to you. So please, punish me instead. I beg you.” You said, only to hear Taehyung’s gruff voice clearly in distress.

“What are you doing?! Get out of here!”

You ignored him as you kept your eyes firmly on the King. Emperor Choi looks at you from head to toe, giving you a look of disapproval but you couldn’t care less.

“What a disappointment to the family.”

“I’m asking you to drop his punishment because he deserves another chance. So I’m begging you, please punish me instead, not him.”

“Fine then. Guards!”

With that, two of the palace guards came storming over to grab your arms on either side while another guard freed Taehyung’s wrist from the ropes before holding him down along with three other guards. Jungkook was yelling for them all to stop, he couldn’t get past the guards so easily. Just then, the executor takes a sword that was smaller than the one he had minutes ago. You turned around to face Taehyung, only to see him struggle against their holds. He was crying and it hurts you.

“I love you… I’m sorry…” You said.

It all happened so fast. The next thing you know, the sword was plunged into your lower abdomen, leaving you breathless. It felt like your entire body just stopped working for a second. Thick crimson blood began to leak out of your mouth, feeling like your air supply got restricted heavily.

“No!” Taehyung’s voice was prominent but there were two other voices that echoed from the crowd.

It was Jungkook and your mother.

You gasped for air as the guard pulled the sword out hastily, making you clutch onto your stomach where he plunged the sword through. Almost immediately, you fell on your knees like a ragdoll. However, before you could collapse to the ground, Taehyung managed to elbow the guards in their ribs, kicking their shins to release their grip on his arms and soon sprinted to you, catching you just in time.

“No! No! No! Y/N stay with me! Please! Please stay with me! Don’t leave me…” His words got softer and softer by the second as he cradled you in his chest. You were already on the brink of dying, your mind was all over the place. Right at that moment, heavy footsteps came rushing to you and soon, your mother and brother surrounded your limp body. Your mother was devastated, and your brother? He was furious at the King and palace guards.

“My sweet daughter, please stay with us. You’re strong. I know you are.” Your mother said as she cried, holding your face desperately, hoping it would give you some life or energy.

Taehyung on the other hand was furious, upset, devastated, every single negative emotion was starting to surface. He looked back down to your pale face, growing weaker and weaker by the minute as he cupped your face and whispered against your forehead where he planted a soft kiss.

“I’ll make them pay for what they did.”

With that being said, Taehyung gently passed you over to your mother before he got up on his feet and glared at the King.

Taehyung didn’t waste any time as he charged straight for the King. He fought off the palace guards as best as he could, successfully stealing a sword from one of the fallen guards. His skills were extraordinary, managing to kill a number of them despite being heavily outnumbered. It was starting to be a massacre as he killed them off in cold blood. He was so angry that he wouldn’t let anything come in the way of him wanting to kill the Emperor.

“I-I’m s-sorry, mom… I n-never full… fullfilled y-your… your dre-ams…” You said.

“No, sweetheart… Raising you and your brother up was the biggest dream of mine and I got it… I love you so much, my darling.” Your mother smiled through her pain as you glanced over to your brother who was crying beside you.

“K-Kook ah… You k-know noona… l-loves you, r-rig-right?”

“Of course. And I love you too, so please, please don’t leave us…” Jungkook begged.

However, you were slowly losing rhythm in your heartbeat. Your brother held your wrist the entire time to make sure your pulse was still beating. Your mother was stroking your hair when all of a sudden, you began to take short breaths only to then release on long breath.

That was your final breath.

“No… No… Noona, wake up… Noona, wake up please…” Jungkook’s voice breaks as he pressed two fingers against your neck, disappointed to find that your pulse had stopped beating. Your mother cradled you in her arms back and forth as she finally broke down hysterically. Upon hearing this, Taehyung already knows what happened. This only riled him up even more. With one last scream, he sprints towards the King who was just about to run from his throne when a guard came out of nowhere from behind the throne and stabbed the sword through his heart.

Taehyung’s steps faltered as he gasped. His breathing got choppy as soon as he got stabbed. He stumbled back only to tumble down the steps. He laid in such a way that his head was turned to face your direction as he saw your mother and Jungkook crying while holding your limp body. Taehyung watched through hazy vision as Jungkook turned around only to lock eyes with him, witnessing the sword standing up right through his left chest where his heart was.

All Taehyung did was flash your brother a small smile before whispering to himself during his last breath.

“I love you, Y/N.”

~~~

#bts scenarios #bts imagines #bts v #bts taehyung #bts kim taehyung #v scenarios #taehyung scenarios #v imagines #taehyung imagines #taehyung fluff #taehyung angst #taehyung x reader #bts v x reader #bts taehyung x reader #bts fluff #bts angst #hwarang au #bts hwarang au

183 notes · View notes

lovrehani · 2 months ago

Text

spoilers undercut

Another chapter with everything amazing to ponder about. First of all, I love how the chapter has followed an intense theme all throughout. Minghao saying “She said she wanted to stay,” “You have to learn to respect a woman’s wishes.” made me so giddy for no reason at all & i wonder if Jisoo's “Minghao, do you really think I’d let you hurt a female Demon?” means something more than just respecting a woman; is there a scarcity of female demons? or if she's a rare one.

Finally some insight on father heo whereabouts, he chose to leave the crown? i wonder how much truth is behind that statement. I personally stand on Jisoo's & doc. namekawa's side of the argument of stopping the use of serum. Seungcheol & Jihoon's characters have been a little annoying this chapter (which only tells how great of a writer you're to be able to manifest those specific emotions from the reader) considering they are the brains of hwarang, how to do they fail to realise the cons of the reasearch they are trying to do even after seeing all the gore and jisoo's very clear warning (as it was pretty obvious he knew much more about it than csc & ljh). However, I do understand it is for the sake of plot and it adds to the story A LOT skskks. I wish later, jisoo & protagonist get more time to talk about this demon thingy.

Also, who was that female in the street who supposedly knew seungkwan and looked alot like the protagonist. As usual I've many questions waiting to be answered in the next chapter & you never fail to surprise me with your beautiful writing!! 🤍

𝔥𝔴𝔞𝔯𝔞𝔫𝔤 - 𝔩𝔧𝔥 || 𝔭𝔞𝔯𝔱 𝔦𝔦

pairing: lee jihoon x female!reader genre: historical au, fluff, angst, smut (later routes), supernatural members: choi seungcheol, wen junhui, kwon soonyoung, jeon wonwoo, lee seokmin, kim mingyu, boo seungkwan, lee chan, xu minghao, hong jisoo warnings: crass humor and language, blood, violence, mentions of suicide, alcohol, minor character death, 660's sexism, crossdressing, medical procedures, political upset, historical innacuarcies for the sake of plot progression word count: 16.6k summary: riding the highs and lows coming from the crown ordered raids and sieges, the hwarang find themselves in deeper trouble when mysterious figures begin emerging and demanding something strange- you.

taglist: @hipsdofangirl

𝔭𝔞𝔯𝔱 𝔦 || 𝔭𝔞𝔯𝔱 𝔦𝔦𝔦

𝔉𝔢𝔟𝔯𝔲𝔞𝔯𝔶 6𝔱𝔥, 662 - 𝔖𝔢𝔬𝔯𝔞𝔟𝔢𝔬𝔩, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 The new year sweeps in not unexpectedly, but with a gust of cold that chills you to your core. Seorabeol sits under a blanket of snow, much like it had when you first arrived a little over a year ago now.

You finish eating breakfast with the captains a little earlier than they do, you excuse yourself to make them some tea before their morning briefing. Thankfully, the halls remain warm, so you don’t need to worry about the winter chill as you make your way back to the main hall, the smattering of captains sitting around.

“Thank you,” Eunseok says as you set down a cup for him, a smile on his lips as he wraps his cold fingers around the steaming cup. You make your way around the hall to give the captains their drinks, most giving you a curt but appreciative nod as you do so.

“The monks at this temple have been nice enough to let us stay here this long,” Jihoon calls out, disrupting your thoughts as he speaks to the captains, “but Shoshin is getting crowded.”

“Especially with all of the new guys coming in,” Mingyu agrees, nodding his head.

“If we could get a bigger space, that’d be good,” Junhui adds, a tinge to his voice as if he’s thinking about how little room there is to move around these days. “Even in the overflow buildings it’s stuffy.”

“Most of these kids are nobles too, not accustomed to living like this,” Mingyu sighs, not vouching for them, just knowing it would take some time to acquaint themselves with their newfound home.

“If we can find somewhere bigger to host us,” Seungkwan says, “I’m sure the newbies would be more appreciative.”

“What about Bulguksa Temple?” The man sitting next to Youngmin speaks up, glancing over to the map hanging in the front of the room.

“Bulguksa?” Suh Kangjoon frowns, looking towards the map, “Isn’t that a bit far?”

“Maybe,” the man shrugs, “But it’s one of the only places big enough to accommodate the Seorabeol Hwarang. And its position would allow a tactical advantage in times of panic, it’s a relatively easy place to fortify.”

After he’s done speaking, the man leans back in his chair to see what the others have to say. Kim Gongmyung had joined the Hwarang on Soonyoung’s excursion to Hanseong in early autumn of last year. His family’s school is quite popular there and his academics gained him notoriety with the nobles of the area. “Besides, it’s closer to the border so if there’s a need to intercept or fend off any Baekje loyalists looking for trouble, it’d put us in the best spot to do so.”

“Those are good points,” Youngmin nods enthusiastically, “An exceptional amount of detail as always, Gongmyung.”

Even if the chief thought it to be a good idea, a few voices rose in opposition.

“Isn’t it a bit… presumptive to do something like that?” Seungcheol frowns at Gongmyung, his hands atop the table, fingers tapping along the wooden grains.

Gongmyung’s smile flickers as he turns to the colonel, “Then would it be better to be negligent of the possibility, the high possibility, that the loyalists are up to something again?” His question leaves little room for the colonel to answer before he begins speaking again, “It’s a lovely thought, thinking that we’re safe now, but we all know it’s not true.” His deflection of Seungcheol’s statement leaves a bitter taste in everyone’s mouths.

“I agree that the loyalists need to be stopped, but to place our personal interest there instead of being directed to do so by the Crown or the council is…” Seungcheol trails off, clearly thinking more inwardly than he was expressing outwardly.

“So, then, what should we do?” Another voice piques up, questioning Seungcheol. “Wait until the bastards are knocking at our door to actually do something about it? Or maybe wait until they’ve actually captured Munmu and have burned the palace to the gro-”

“Dongyoung,” Gongmyung interjects, “Watch your mouth.”

“My mistake,” Dongyoung scoffs after a moment of staring at his brother for interrupting him, “Couldn’t stop myself.”

Kim Dongyoung is the younger brother of Kim Gongmyung by blood, and only by the same father. Dongyoung had joined the Hwarang with Gongmyung in autumn and had accompanied him to Seorabeol.

“He has the tendency to run his mouth like a child still,” Gongmyung explains, “I apologize.” His attention then turns back to Seungcheol and away from his brother, “So, don’t take it too personally, please. I’m sure someone like you is needed to make the Hwarang successful. Even if your arm is unusable in a fight, your smarts and tactical abilities will prove all the more useful.”

You see Seungcheol biting back a retort towards Gongmyung’s sour wording, the tension between the two only cut by another voice.

“I don’t think I heard you correctly, Gongmyung.” It’s Jihoon, his voice low as if he’s trying to stabilize the tone so as to not sound angry. “Seungcheol is smart, as you said. He is not useless and not replaceable, make sure you don’t forget that.” The commander only speaks when there’s something important to be said, having spoken up now means that Gongmyung’s words must’ve gotten to him.

“My arm, though…” Seungcheol mutters out, seemingly unable to finish the thought. Jihoon’s words remind him of what he once was, causing him to frown at the reality of it all.

“I didn’t mean to cause such a disturbance,” Gongmyung sighs out with false sympathy, “I’ll be sure to keep my thoughts to myself next time. Seungcheol is quite a beloved member, I see, it’s nice to see such a tight knit group. I can only hope the new members share that sentiment.”

Jihoon’s eyes seethe with anger as he glares at Gongmyung, but before he’s able to snip back, Youngmin steps in and tries to calm the air.

“For now,” He begins, looking at each member of the opposing parties, “Let’s just keep matters on finding a new headquarter location. Gongmyung, would you mind coming with me? I’d love to continue our earlier conversation.”

“Of course, Chief.” Gongmyung says and rises to his feet at the same time Youngmin does, the two begin to leave the room, quickly followed out by Kangjoon.

“May I join you as well?” The latter asks before the two step out of the hall.

“Of course,” Youngmin accepts, “I’d like you to hear what Gongmyung has to say, it may help you with strategy points.”

“Thank you,” Kangjoon says with an appreciative smile as the three exit, shortly followed by Dongyoung who scoffs at the encounter before slinking out after them.

“Who’s the asshole that invited them to join us?” Seungkwan frowns once the sound of their footsteps falls out of earshot.

“That asshole’s still in Hanseong,” Junhui huffs, “When Soonyoung gets back I might just wring his neck.”

“The Kim’s father is friends with a few pro-military councilmen,” Mingyu muses, “Interesting to see that they’d join us if they share those same beliefs.”

“They’re probably playing some sort of superiority game,” Jihoon says, his arms crossing over his chest. “Just listen to the bullshit that Dongyoung spouts off, and it looks like it’s rubbing off on Youngmin. And that’s definitely not good.”

“Youngmin’s always been like that,” Seungkwan adds, “Easily deceived by those who act nice and appear virtuous but are just vipers waiting for the right time to strike.”

“And Gongmyung’s the deputy commander with Dongyoung in a captain’s position,” Mingyu shakes his head, “They’ve rooted themselves deep.”

Jihoon’s gaze travels to Seungcheol, who’s been staring at the patterns in the wood since his conversation with Gongmyung. “Don’t listen to him,” the commander says to him in hopes of cheering him up.

“Gongmyung is a skilled orator with a proficient education to back it,” Seungcheol laughs dryly, “And not only that, but he’s also skilled with a sword and bow. With a gifted Deputy Commander, the Hwarang have little need for a colonel now.”

“Seungcheol-” Jihoon begins to protest as the colonel rises to his feet and starts to head for the exit. The commander’s voice trails after Seungcheol as he leaves quietly, no one daring to stop him.

“Of all people…” Mingyu sighs out, crossing his arms as he leans back in his chair, “Even the wang-do are avoiding him now.”

“Why?” You question and turn to the captain, “It’s not like he’s done anything wrong.”

“It’s his attitude,” Junhui responds in the elder’s stead, “It doesn't matter what you say to him, he takes it the wrong way regardless.”

“Not to mention the smartass tone he’s been taking up,” a twisted frown settles onto Mingyu’s face, “it’s no wonder the men are scared shitless of him.”

Their words confuse you, even though you haven’t been here as long as the other captains, Seungcheol was well liked among everyone in the Hwarang. After he’d received his injury, it seems as if that demeanor has taken a turn for the worse.

“Can’t you come up with an excuse to get Gongmyung the hell out of here?” Seungkwan asks, turning towards Jihoon. “There’s barely been a moment of civility since he got here.”

“You know I can’t do that,” Jihoon’s expression turns sour, “Youngmin’s all over the guy. Besides, he brought in a bunch of warriors from Hanseong, their allegiance doesn’t solely lie with us yet. They’ll pack up and leave the second we tell him to get lost.”

“Fuck him though!” Seungkwan does little to quell the irateness of his voice, “You’re the goddamn demon commander, make the impossible happen!”

Jihoon barks out a snarkish laugh, “Fine, Boo. How about I make you commander so you can kick Gongmyung and his thugs out?”

“Hell no,” Seungkwan snickers, “That’s too much work.”

It eventually comes to fruition that Gongmyung isn’t to be trusted, having no other captains speak out on his behalf.

You’re going around once more to distribute tea to the men when you stop by Hansol, who’d been quiet for most of, if not all, of the prior conversation. He looks up at you, as if he had felt your thoughts wander over to him.

“What are your thoughts on Gongmyung joining?” You ask as he sets down his teacup onto the tabletop.

Hansol sighs as you begin topping off the cup, “As any group begins to grow in numbers, it’ll have more and more people with differing opinions.” You pull the pot away from his cup, staunching the flow of the liquid, “Although, if one intends to be the catalyst for change instead of it occurring naturally, the group will begin to kill itself from the inside out.” His words hang heavy as you stand next to him, unsure of what to say next.

Gongmyung’s acceptance into the Hwarang, from your perspective, wasn’t to tear them apart, but maybe to cause dissension among the members. You’re not fond of him, but his treatment towards Seungcheol and the colonel’s receptiveness to the critiques is what worries you the most. It’s not as if his arm would work again overnight, it would take a miracle to happen, and Seungcheol doesn’t seem like the type to frequent shamans.

Sometime later you find yourself wandering back to your room, the meeting dissipating with little to be done with the newest arrivals. Although cold outside, the setting sun gives off little warmth as you trapeze yourself through one of the gardens. The reddish-maroon of the sinking star unsettling you.

You still have Seungcheol in mind as you pause for a moment, staring up at the shifting hues of the heavens. A conversation you’d heard in the news of Seungcheol’s injury had spurred the conversation of the Furies as well as a serum. By the way they’d spoken of it, it made it seem as if the item was only used in dire circumstances, and it was highly secretive. You weren’t even supposed to know about it in the first place, but Soonyoung had let slip some information on it and now you can’t help but think about it.

If you were to try and learn of it yourself, it’s no doubt that you’d find yourself in a world of trouble. Yet, you are the daughter of a physician, surely you have more medical knowledge than them?

Falling onto your better judgment, you return to your quarters. Even if you’re worried about Seungcheol, you’re not sure that there’s much you can even do for him at this point.

When the sun finally drops below the horizon, it seems as if Shoshin Temple bursts to life with activity. But the sounds aren’t boisterous, not the gaiety induced ones of the captains rough-housing, these were more ominous. You hear footsteps charge past your room, never seeming to cease as the men run off to an unknown location.

Despite trying your best to keep out of it, your curiosity overtakes you, amalgamating in you slowly creeping out into the hall and following the sound of the commotion. The sounds take you to the main hall, the door left ajar so you quietly make your way inside.

“To think that Seungcheol would’ve…” You can hear Youngmin’s voice, a seriousness in it as he comes into view. Jihoon and the other captains stand around him, each looking to be in a different stage of shock or disbelief.

“What the hell were you all doing?!” Jihoon shouts out towards the other captains, his grief seeming to take shape in the form of unbridled anger, “I told you to watch out for Seungcheol! Was there some fucking part of that that you didn’t understand?”

“You can’t blame us for this,” Junhui retorts defensively, “Who would’ve thought that he’d drink that shit? He was also in charge of that stuff so how were we supposed to know he had it?”

“If he’d hidden it in a vial we wouldn’t have known,” Mingyu adds, glancing from Junhui to Jihoon, “And suppose that it does treat his arm… Everyone who took it went crazy. It didn’t work.”

The serum… is that what the captains are referring to? You don’t have enough context on the situation to understand fully, but has Seungcheol taken whatever it is?

“Seungcheol had been trying to improve it,” Hansol interjects, “He’d hoped his arm would heal before it deteriorated too much… Maybe he felt as if there wasn’t any other way. Regardless of that, when he realized his failure he ignored Seungkwan and tried to kill himself.”

“Kill himself?” You gasp aloud, momentarily forgetting that you aren’t supposed to be here. Slowly, all eyes shift to you, Jihoon’s gaze quickly meeting yours.

“What are you doing here?” He asks and suddenly you’re unable to speak. His gaze holds an iciness that causes your throat to clam up, restricting any words that are trying to form. It’s the same way you felt upon entering Shoshin the first time, a mixture of anxiousness, suspicion and animosity.

“Jihoon,” Youngmin says, his hand moving to rest on the commander’s forearm, “I think it’s time you tell her what’s going on. She is Heo’s daughter, after all.”

Your eyes grow wide at the mention of your father’s name. Why is he being brought up all of a sudden?

“I’m going to make this clear,” the commander stares at Youngmin with a grimace, looking back to you after a moment and sighing out lengthily, “The Hwarang don’t need you. There’s a chance that you’ll help us find Heo, but even without you, we’ll find him one way or another. Do anything strange and we’ll have you killed.” Your limbs feel frozen in place as he speaks, you’re able to stutter out an ‘Okay’ before he continues. “I’m going to tell you what’s happening here, but keep in mind that if you tell anyone else about it other than those that are in this room: it’s your own head.”

“Are you… going to kill me?”

“Not yet, but don’t think that means you’re free to run off.”

“We never told you why your father was here in the first place,” Youngmin steps in, allowing you to break your gaze with Jihoon. “He was developing a… treatment of sorts.”

“Like the one Seungcheol took?” Words forming on your lips, testing out how shocked you sound.

The leader of the Hwarang nods solemnly, breathing in deeply before responding, “We first learned of it when one of the Crown’s men brought it to us. They told us it was obtained through trades with merchants in Tang.”

The curiosity of it all, as dreadful it may be, swirls inside of you. Culminating into something you’re not sure you have the words to describe.

“A foreign drug said to augment a man’s healing and bolster their strength,” Hansol sighs out, “Anyone who drank their fill would, supposedly, be able to fight off a guhin with no issue.” His voice serious, despite having alluded to a mythical beast, “Any of their injuries would heal almost immediately, unless they were decapitated or pierced through the heart.

This all sounds like something your father would’ve told you as a child to fuel your imagination, not something that was feasible now.

“Yet, that power comes at a price. It spirals whoever drinks it into an unreturnable madness, they seek out human blood to satisfy their hunger instead of food or drink.” Hansol continues, looking at you with a wary gaze, Heo took it upon himself to try it out on some of the Hwarang so that an attempt to perfect the serum could be worked on.

“My father?” You’re not sure how surprised you sound, something within you twinges but it’s probably the knowledge somewhere deep inside that you knew your father is connected to all of this. Yet knowing that he was using his skills to try and work on this… serum, makes a pit begin to form in your stomach. “So that night where you all found me...”

“We keep the men who’ve taken it to a temple just outside of Seorabeol, if they were kept here people would’ve become suspicious,” The explanation doesn’t tell you how you’d come to find them, but you can infer that they’d probably escaped. “As long as they don’t get any blood they stay relatively quiet.” With the way Hansol relays the information, it makes it seem as this is just a nonchalant topic for him, and it may have very well been. But to you, it’s alien but helps you put together a few things you’d been wondering since your arrival here.

“Are you okay?” Mingyu asks, a tinge of concern to his voice, “You don’t look great.” He stops himself, scoffing inwardly before continuing, “Of course you’re not, this information would sicken anyone.”

“I think we’ve told her enough,” Jihoon interjects before Mingyu can continue, “We need to think about what to do with Seungcheol.”

“I guess…” Junhui frowns, crossing his arms, “But he was practically dead when Eunseok took him out of here.”

“This was a new draught of that shit, though,” Jihoon sounds as if he’s trying to contain himself, to keep his hopefulness on the floor, “we don’t know if the effects are any different from the last batch. And if it’s supposed to do what it's meant to, then that cut isn’t going to kill him.” His eyes flicker to the leader, “Youngmin, can you watch over him? I know Eunseok’s taking care of him but he’s just a kid and I don’t think that-” A pause as he catches himself fretting, he gives himself a second to straighten up, “Tonight will tell us if he’s meant to live or die, and whether he’ll be sane or not by the end of it.”

“Of course, isn’t Seungkwan with him as well?” Youngmin asks before he turns on his heels and heads towards the door.

“He’s guarding the room,” A curt response from Jihoon before Youngmin nods and exits the main hall, the sound of his footsteps dying down after a moment.

“I want you to keep everyone away from the captain’s wing,” Jihoon looks towards Mingyu, a frown dancing on his lips, “Especially Gongmyung’s men.”

“I know,” Mingyu huffs looking to where Youngmin had exited.

“Junhui, go and check on Hwangnyongsa.”

Another order from Jihoon, Junhui nods wordlessly and begins to head towards the main exit of the headquarters. As he passes, you see a glint of the same hostility he’d held towards you on the night of your first arrival. It’s tense and suspicious of you, an itch of gooseflesh overcoming you as he walks out into the night.

“Hansol, go to the inner courtyard, if the Kim brothers or their men show up, keep them busy,” And before Hansol’s even left the room, Jihoon’s gaze settles on you. “I want you to stay with one of the captains.” His concern stems not for the care of your well-being, that much is evident in his gaze, but more to the fact that tonight isn’t a good night to be wandering around alone.

“I’d stay away from Hwangnyongsa, they get rowdy at night,” Mingyu notes, his teeth biting at his cheek.

You nod, thankful for the suggestion, but even with his warning, you’d be limited in where you could go.

“I think I’ll stay here,” you assert to the remaining men, nodding to yourself that this is probably the safest place you could remain within the compound.

It doesn’t take long for Hansol and Mingyu to take their leave, heading for their respective locations around the headquarters before you’re left alone with the commander.

The main hall feels suffocating, mostly from Jihoon’s quietness and the thoughts of what had transpired here merely an hour beforehand. Your gaze shifts from looking out of the main entrance to the commander, his brow furrowing and eyes looking sullen. It’s easy to see that the events of tonight are eating away at him, his concern for his second-in-command utterly gnawing at his very being. His eyes close and he lets out a quiet sigh before speaking again,

“You might think you know who Seungcheol is, but this… It’s not really who he is. He’s an intelligent man who is more than just a sword. The colonel sees the full picture rather than what lies duly in front of him.” Another sigh as if he’s reminiscing, “His guidance helped me through a lot more than I’d like to credit, but his words were always more commandeering than his blade. In a way he was more powerful than me, without him, the Hwarang would’ve regressed to the likes of the Wonhwa.” A subtle smile curling on his lips, “He was like my big brother.” Hands balling into fists atop the table, there is a sincerity that drips from his words bitterly.

“He must mean a lot to you,” you say softly, your own hands falling into your lap, your back hitting the back of the chair as you lean.

“It sounds a little childlike when you say it aloud,” the absinthian smile still clinging to him. He sits, probably thinking the worst outcome for his longtime friend, reminiscing on their past and contemplating what it may mean for the future. Jihoon’s position leaves him unable to divulge this with most others, yet by sharing them with you, he can hold off on the truth for a while longer.

“The only reason we didn’t get rid of that serum is because we thought we could heal his arm with it somehow… Because I thought we could heal him,” the smile fades away, replaced with a grimace. “I should’ve seen this coming.” His own hands fall away from the tabletop and to his sides, a relent in the tension building in his shoulders, “We need Seungcheol. We can’t lose him.”

An anguish coming over him due to the morality of his friend. It’s hard to watch, and you’re nowhere near close enough to him to offer him substantial comfort or advice.

“It’ll be okay,” quiet words leaving you as you straighten up in your chair, his gaze flickering over to you.

“Do you have anything to back that statement up?”

“Back in Toehwa-hyeon, I saw my father treat a lot of people. Most of them believed that they’d recover, and my dad said it was because they had a strong heart,” you say slowly, trying to space out your words coherently. “Seungcheol never seemed like the type to give up fully, and if we all think that he’ll recover then…”

Jihoon lets out a small laugh with a smile and shakes his head, “The Commander of the Hwarang being cheered up by a physician’s daughter. Who could’ve ever imagined this?” A spark igniting in his eyes, returning to the glowing embers and eventual blaze that he so often carries. “You’re right, though. Seungcheol drank the medicine with the intent of getting better and fixing his arm, we just have to believe that he’ll recover.”

𝔉𝔢𝔟𝔯𝔲𝔞𝔯𝔶 7, 662 – 𝔖𝔥𝔬𝔰𝔥𝔦𝔫 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 The night breaks into dawn long after you've retired to your room. A clattering of noise and the rise of voices rouse you from slumber and pull you back to the main hall. Upon entering, you find that the captains have gathered, each in conversation with one another. This scene isn’t interrupted until Eunseok enters.

“It seems as if the hardest part for him is over,” The youngest nods, a collective ball of tension in the room dissipating instantly.

“How is he?” Mingyu asks, looking to Eunseok.

“Still asleep,” he nods, “he was in and out of consciousness the entire night, but he looks peaceful now.”

“Has he gone crazy like the others?” Junhui’s question is blunt as he blurts it out into the space.

Eunseok shakes his head in the negative, “Not seemingly. But we won’t know until he wakes up. But as for now, he looks as he always has.”

Before another captain is able to ask Eunseok of Seungcheol’s status, the doors open and Gongmyung strides into the room.

“Good morning everyone,” A cheap smile painted on his face, “How are you?”

You can hear Junhui let out a soft, “Fuck,” at the sight of him.

Gongmyung scans the faces of the captains after their muffled hellos, “You all look… gloomy.”

“Isn’t it obvious that it’s because we’ve got to see your beautiful face every morning?” Junhui bites with a snicker.

“What a… cute response,” Gongmyung’s quick to brush away the insult as he turns to the other captains. “Is the reason you all look so down because of what happened last night?”

“Ah, actually,” Youngmin begins, fumbling over his words. His gaze hops from captain to captain, looking for someone to relieve him of trying to offer an excuse to Gongmyung.

“Jae,” Junhui’s elbow finds the older’s side as he whispers, “make something up!”

“You see,” Mingyu says after a moment, he too, stumbling over his words, “Well… Uh, yesterday…”

“Didn’t you say you used to act for the nobles in your village?” Seungkwan scoffs at him quietly, “Be quiet and let someone else do the talking.” You think he’s talking about himself, but instead of speaking up, Seungkwan looks to Hansol, who begins speaking almost immediately.

“As you may have heard, an incident occurred last night at the headquarters,” voice plain as he speaks to the Deputy Commander, “We have yet to gain full knowledge on the situation. If we were to make a statement now, it is a risk of polluting fact with falsities. Later this afternoon I’m sure we’ll be able to provide a much more detailed report.”

“Hmm,” Gongmyung mulls over Hansol’s statement for a moment, “I’ll look forward to hearing all about what happened later this evening, then. For now, I’ll return to my men.” He waves everyone on his way out, a strange smile cutting across his face before he exits.

“That was easier than it should’ve been,” Seungkwan huffs, watching the door close with a soft slam.

“What do you mean?” You ask, attention turning from the door and to Seungkwan.

“Gongmyung isn’t stupid, unfortunately,” Jihoon frowns and looks at you, “We shouldn’t have let him in here. The only person missing from our ranks is Seungcheol, it’s not going to take him long to realize that something’s happened to him.”

The Deputy Commander had most likely suspected what had occurred but decided to not press the issue. Before you can think on it for too long, the door opens once more and Choi Seungcheol shuffles in.

A small laugh as he looks at them, his voice sounding a little weak, “Come on, it’s not like I’m some kind of monster.”

Eunseok rushes to him, offering assistance to stand but is waved away by the Colonel, “You should be resting, are you okay being up like this?”

“I’m tired… sore… but I suppose that’s a side effect of my new condition,” Seungcheol’s brow furrows slightly as he looks down to his hand, “Those who’ve taken the serum have found it difficult to do work in the daylight.” His face is a bit pallid, but with the way he stands and moves, it doesn’t seem like he’s hindered all too much. “I’m no longer human,” the words echoing around the room with a chilling effect. Each and every captain fell silent to them.

“Who cares about what you are?” Youngmin speaks up after a moment and steps towards Seungcheol with a bright smile, trying to lighten the mood, “All that matters is that you’re alive.”

“How’s your arm? Healed?” Seungkwan questions, looking down to the colonel’s once bandaged limb.

“I don’t think I’ve fully recovered yet,” Seungcheol notes, flexing his fingers at his side, “It seems to have healed for the most part.”

Despite the disturbance and subsequent chaos of the night prior, it seems like Seungcheol’s wish to use his arm again had come true.

“You can’t go out in the sunlight though, right?” Mingyu asks, voice concerned, and his brow furrowed, “Will you still be able to fight with us?”

Seungcheol nods, slowly moving his head as if he’s mulling over a thought he’d been holding in for some time. “I think you should tell everyone I died.”

“What!?” Junhui shouts out, unable to hold in the burst of confusion. “The fuck are you on about?”

“I should serve in the Corps from now on. It’ll show them, and even more so, us, that success isn’t some far off dream.” Seungcheol says, looking at the frazzled captain.

“Have you lost your goddamn mind Seungcheol?” Junhui’s voice shakes with every word, “Do you know what you’re saying?”

“Of course, I do,” Seungcheol frowns, “The Crown has ordered us to keep the serum a secret, and if I,” a small hum as he postulates his next word, “die, that secret remains so. Researching in secret will give me more ability to track side effects and even give me the potential to remove them. What reason do we have for me not to if we’re going to use it?”

The movements of the captains easily show that they’re against Seungcheol’s idea, although no one but Junhui has said anything against it. None of them wish to banish their friend to a life of hiding and secrecy.

“We were given this task by the late King himself, carried on by his son…” Youngmin trails off, “This may be our only choice.”

“This is what you asked for, isn’t it Seungcheol?” Seungkwan shoots him a look, “You’ve always been the type to take things into your own hands so I can’t fault you for that.”

“Sometimes I think you know me too well,” the colonel chuckles.

Jihoon, who’s stayed silent for a majority of the conversation, scoffs at the remark. “This means moving the Hwarang to a new location can’t wait any longer. If we’re going to hide Seungcheol from Gongmyung and his crowd, Shoshin wouldn’t allow us to do that easily.”

“You’re right,” Hansol affirms, “If the Colonel intends to begin researching again, then we’ll have to expedite our move.”

A nod from the commander as he turns to face the captains in full, “Even though none of you slept well, we need to get to work.” He looks to you, “You should get some rest, I know you didn’t sleep well either.”

You want to stay and help them, but with how fatigued you are from staying up so late you can only nod your head at him before quickly shuffling back to your room.

The same thoughts that had plagued you last night as you tried to fall asleep plague you as you now lie on your bedding. Your father’s work… Are you safe under their pretext of safety still? Thoughts still buzzing around your head as you eventually find yourself drifting off into a dreamless slumber.

𝔍𝔲𝔫𝔢 4𝔱𝔥, 662 – 𝔅𝔲𝔩𝔤𝔲𝔨𝔰𝔞 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 Bulguksa Temple has proven a better headquarters than that of Shoshin Temple, you’d come to this conclusion in the subsequent weeks of your arrival in March of this year. There’s much more room for the men to freely roam and train, and the view was even more astonishing than the last. The only downfall is the longer trek to the city of Seorabeol itself. On some days you still find yourself lost on the winding paths to the temple, but for the most part you can guide yourself around with little assistance from the monks who reside there.

On this particular day, you find yourself wandering the seemingly endless grounds for the Hwarang’s colonel. When you think you spot him standing in one of the shaded courtyards of the temple’s grounds you shout out to him.

“There you are, Colonel,” You call out, a tray held tightly in your grasp. The sun hangs in the sky above you, a slight burn beginning to burgeon on your clothed shoulders as you approach. “I’ve brought you your lunch.”

“Oh, hello,” he turns to you with a smile and beckons you closer, “Thank you.” A bird chirps in the branches of the tree above him, you look up to find the small creature before returning your gaze to him. You offer him a smile before extending out the tray to him.

“It’s really gotten warm lately, hasn’t it?” You note, stepping into the shade once he’d taken the tray. Fingers rising to your shoulders to feel the heat of the sun that had soaked into the fabric.

“It has,” he nods, moving to set the tray down on a stump beside him, “Although the increased sunshine has been more disagreeable than the warmth.”

“Ah, is it?” The sun doesn’t feel but so harsh on you, but the heat that swells around the compound has been making you sweat since the sun broke over the horizon. Yet, to Seungcheol his disposition probably found the light unbearable from his days in the shadows.

Sometimes it feels unreal to call Seungcheol dead, the night where he’d taken that serum to transform him into a creature lustful for blood, feeling more so like a dream whenever you recall it. As he stands before you now, you can hardly imagine it.

A light breeze wafts through the greenery around you, parting enough leaves in the tree from a few beams of sunlight to fall onto Seungcheol. For a moment, his hair turns a silvery white and his eyes seem to turn a deep crimson.

Your eyes widen and you take a step back, unsure if it were a trick of the light or your own imagination.

“Is something wrong?” He asks, his hair now normal and his eyes once again brown. “You look like you’ve seen a ghost, and I know I’m not at that point yet.” Maybe you had imagined it.

𝔍𝔲𝔫𝔢 6𝔱𝔥, 662 – 𝔖𝔢𝔬𝔯𝔞𝔟𝔢𝔬𝔩, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 Soonyoung had asked you to accompany him on his rounds this morning with an excitedness in his voice that would’ve been hard to turn down. So, now you find yourself briskly walking with him through the crowded streets, the blues of his robes shining brilliantly in the midday sky.

“It’s been a while since you’ve asked me to come on patrol with you,” You note as you pass a vendor selling sickeningly sweet treats.

“I know, right? Hanseong kept me pretty busy.” He sighs out, having only just returned from his trip to the northern city just a few weeks ago. “Junhui and Mingyu didn’t mess with you when I was gone, did they? How was it when I was away?”

“Everything was fine, and they didn’t bother me,” You assure him with a small smile.

“That’s good,” He returns the smile as you continue to walk. “Any updates on Heo though? Did you find any leads?”

“No,” the smile from your lips quickly leaving.

“I see…” His own smile quickly disappears as he watches you, “I stopped by his place with the information you gave me but… It didn’t seem as if anyone had returned.” The somberness of the male begins to transfer to you, a feeling of hopelessness beginning to overtake you momentarily.

“Thank you for taking the time to check for me, I know Toehwa-hyeon isn’t on the direct path back.”

“Don’t thank me for that,” He waves you off, “The fact that you can’t freely come and go as you please is completely the Hwarang’s faul—”

“Soonyoung?” You question as he’d stopped himself mid-sentence. He’d looked glum ever since his return from Hanseong. “How about you, though? I know it’s been a while since you’ve been back in Seorabeol.”

“I do feel like the city’s changed, the people too,” he muses, glancing at the faces that pass by. There’s a solemness to his tone that wasn’t typically there in conversations you’d had with him prior, had something happened in Hanseong? Before you can question him on it, his head jerks to look above the crowd, standing on his toes and waving to someone across the way.

“Find anything over there, Seungkwan?!” He shouts out above the clamor of the street.

“Nope,” the older replies as he saunters over, “Nothing out of order here.” Seungkwan is out for patrol too, but his route takes him through a different path through the city. “Normal for now, at least. Things will change once the king comes back from his family villa. Rumor has it that he’s going to address the Hwarang.”

“Is he really?” You question, brow raising in surprise.

“Yep, it’s got Youngmin all flustered,” Seungkwan chuckles, “Our dear leader really respects the Crown, as well all have to, I guess.”

“I see,” you nod, “I hope it actually happens, then, right, Soonyoung?”

Soonyoung looks lost in thought before he hears his name, stumbling out his words as he responds, “Ah, yeah, right.”

You look to Seungkwan to see if he’s caught on to the other’s oddness. But he’s stifling his mouth with his hand, coughing into it.

“Are you alright?” You question him as his hand falls away from his mouth.

“I’m okay,” he waves you off, “I probably just caught a cold from patrolling late one night or something.”

“Well, try to take care of yourself,” a sigh leaving you. As strong and intelligent as the men were, they hardly ever took care of their basic needs, “I have some cold medicine back at the headquarters, I’ll give you some.”

“Thanks,” Seungkwan smiles, “I guess it is good to have you around at times.” Something catches his attention, and he breaks his gaze away from you and into the crowds of the street.

“Is something wrong?”

“What do you mean ‘no’?” A voice rings out and you follow it to see a man holding the wrist of a woman trying to get away from him.

“Let go of me!” She cries out, trying to pull herself away from his grip.

“We’re soldiers of this great kingdom, fighting hard every day to kick these loyalists’ asses! You owe us some drinks, and maybe even a little company.” The man says, and it’s then you realize it isn’t just him, but two other presumed soldiers are harassing this woman.

“Are you guys seeing this?” You question the two captains.

“Yeah,” Soonyoung frowns, “Stay here.”

Yet, before Soonyoung could step forward, Seungkwan seems to be several steps ahead, reaching the group already.

“Soldiers don’t seem to be what they used to,” he tuts, “throwing that rank aloud doesn’t mean you’re owed anything.” The crowds coming to watch the scene shuffle away from Seungkwan as he hovers his hand on his blade, glaring at the men. As the harassers catch the blues of the Hwarang’s robes they seem to stiffen.

“You’re a Hwarang, aren’t you?” One of them asks, furrowing their brow.

“And you must be the smartest one out of these men,” Seungkwan’s tone is condescending as his hand now rests on the hilt of his sword. “Now, what’s it going to be?” A snide, predatory smile as he grips the hilt, no happiness deriving from the grin as the soldier’s faces pale.

“Why don’t you leave us alone? This doesn’t involve you.” The one presumed to be their ringleader remarks.

“If you really want to get out of here unscathed, you should probably follow your own advice,” Soonyoung scoffs, now saddling up beside Seungkwan.

The sight of two Hwarang seems enough to deter the men from their endeavor. Their faces draining of color before they scamper off like scolded dogs.

“If they’re just gonna run off like that when they see us they shouldn’t have tried to start anything in the first place,” Soonyoung sighs, watching them disappear into the crowds.

“Aren’t you going to go after them?” You ask, looking at them as you walk over.

“And charge them with what?” Seungkwan questions, retracting his hand away from his blade and crossing his arms, “Didn’t think you were the iron fist kind of person.”

Before you can protest that that’s not what you meant, the woman whom the two Hwarang had intervened for speaks up, “Thank you for saving me.” She gives both Seungkwan and Soonyoung a bow, more grace in her movements than you could ever hope to have. Even if you dressed like a girl you’re not sure you’d even come close.

Seungkwan’s hand lands on your shoulder before you’re able to feel any sorrier for yourself. “Seungkwan?” You question as he pulls you forward to stand next to the girl.

“Just go with it,” he says and steps away from the two of you, his hand under his chin as he looks over both of you. You smile softly at the girl, embarrassed as to what the Hwarang is making you do. She returns the smile, beautiful on the outside but there is something almost… strange about it.

“Just as I thought,” Seungkwan nods, “They look just like each other.”

And then it hits you, the girl standing before you looks just as you do whenever you catch a glimpse of yourself in the mirrors dotting the headquarters.

“Really?” Soonyoung questions, tilting his head at the two of you, “I don’t think they look alike at all, Boo.”

“Dress ‘em up like a girl and you wouldn’t be able to tell the difference,” Seungkwan insists.

“Captain Boo…” The woman says, looking at you, “She seems troubled.”

She? Had the woman caught on to you so soon? Stuck in your thoughts she smiles at you once more, “I want to thank all of you properly, but I’m afraid that I’m in the middle of something important. My name is Ahro, I hope I’ll be able to repay you soon, Captain Boo.”

And with that she too disappears like a wisp into the crowds of Seorabeol, the strangeness of her presence lingering long after she’s left.

“It looks like she likes you, Seungkwan!” Soonyoung nudges the elder with his elbow.

“Is that really what you think, Soonyoung?” The other laughs, “You’ve got a long way to go before you’re at Junhui’s prowess levels.”

“What’s that supposed to mean!?” Soonyoung shouts at the other, clearly offended by the remark.

Their bickering fades away as you look to a puddle on the ground left from the rain the night prior. Looking into it now you see the resemblance that you and that woman had had. “Ahro…” You hum as a gust of wind causes the water to ripple and distort your figure.

“Let’s get going!” Soonyoung calls, now further down the street as he’d begun walking back to Bulguksa.

“Coming!” You shout out to him as you look up from the puddle and begin to chase after him.

𝔍𝔲𝔫𝔢 11𝔱𝔥, 662 – 𝔅𝔲𝔩𝔤𝔲𝔨𝔰𝔞 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 The main hall of this temple is open enough so that most, if not all, of the Seorabeol Hwarang can fit inside of it with ample room to spare. It’s a little strange to see all of these faces in one place, seeing as at Shoshin, only the captains and a few other members took priority of occupying the main hall. Yet, as Kwak Youngmin stands proudly in front of his men, any thoughts of the prior location escape your mind.

“By now it’s probably not our best kept secret, but King Munmu has asked us to act as his guard as he returns from his family’s villa to Banweolseong.” Youngmin beams excitedly as the hall begins to erupt in chatter.

“Guard him?” Junhui looks shocked as he turns towards Mingyu, “What’s that about?”

“I don’t know,” he shakes his head in disbelief, “I thought we were just going to get the usual ‘Keep up the good work’ spiel.”

“Our work at Wonweol and Ongsan must’ve gotten through to them,” Jihoon nods, a hidden smile pulling at his lips.

“The leadership of Silla resting on us,” Seungkwan muses almost gleefully, “That’s big.”

“Exactly right,” Jihoon agrees, “We’ve got to do beyond our best for this.”

On the opposite end of the hall, you can hear Suh Kangjoon speak up, “Guarding the king… That’s quite the promotion for us.”

“It truly is,” Gongmyung notes with a sigh, “If only Seungcheol were alive to see it. He would’ve been overjoyed.” Another lamenting breath tiptoeing on faux sympathy, “To have lost such an ally…”

Kim Gongmyung and all of his followers had been told of the colonel’s passing. Actually, the incident surrounding Seungcheol’s transformation had been hidden, only a few of the Hwarang knew the reality of the situation.

“I think doing our best to serve and protect the king is what Seungcheol would’ve wanted,” Youngmin interjects himself into their conversation.

“Yes,” Gongmyung nods, “Of course. This is an excellent opportunity for us to gain favor with the masses.”

“We ought to assign roles at this point. I’d like Jihoon, Seungkwan, and myself to—” Youngmin begins before being cut off by Jihoon.

“Sorry Kwak, but do you think Boo can sit this one out?” The commander’s arms cross over his chest as he glances towards the third party.

“Why’s that?” Youngmin questions, confusion sweeping his features.

“His cold hasn’t recovered fully. And despite me telling him to take care of himself, he neglects to do so,” He sighs out, looking back towards Youngmin.

“Is this true, Seungkwan?” Youngmin looks at the swordsman, “Are you alright?”

“Lee’s just babying me again,” Seungkwan says with a dismissive gesture, “I think I’m alright.”

“Don’t give me that shit,” Jihoon frowns, “You nearly coughed up a lung earlier.”

“Are you trying to sell me medicine?” He scoffs, crossing his arms with a frown, “There’s no way in hell I’m taking what your mother’s doctor prescribed anymore. It tastes like persimmons.”

“That’s not what I’m trying to—” a frustrated grunt from the commander, “Just do what I say, for once.”

You recall giving Seungkwan medicine some time ago after he’d been coughing while out on patrol, had it not helped him? It could be dust particles in the air, you know that the buildup of dust in the temple caused you to sneeze incessantly some mornings.

From the corner of your periphery, you see someone raise their hand.

“Is something wrong, Soonyoung?” Youngmin asks, having seen the younger calling for attention.

“I’m uh, I’m not feeling so great either,” Soonyoung frowns, his eyes looking panicked.

“You too?” Youngmin hums in defeat, “You should try and take care of yourself. I was hoping we could all go and guard the king.”

“I’m sorry,” Soonyoung bows his head in apology.

“No, no, don’t worry about it. Your health comes first, always!” Youngmin tries to brighten his tone to detract from the now somber mood. “I’m sure we’ll have another chance to do something great together!”

Jihoon and Youngmin continue discussing the precession that’s to take place, when suddenly, the commander turns to you.

“What’re you going to do?” Jihoon asks, an eyebrow raised as he poises the question.

“What do you mean?” You say as you look to him, “Are you asking if I want to go with you?”

“I am,” He nods and after a moment of silence asks, “Are you?”

“Is that really okay?”

“Of course it is!” Youngmin smiles, “We won’t mind. Besides, you’re practically one of us, I’d love for you to accompany us.”

Another moment of hesitation before Seungkwan laughs aloud, “Why don’t you go? It seems a lot safer than what happened at Wonweol and Ongsan.”

“Yeah,” Soonyoung nods, “I can’t imagine any loyalists would try to do anything when the king’ll be so heavily guarded.”

“I’ll go, then,” you nod firmly towards the commander.

“Alright,” Jihoon nods back with a small smile, “I thought we’d give you the job of running messages when needed. It’s not going to be the easiest job but I figure you can do it.”

Later that day you and the able captains and Hwarang left Seorabeol. Traveling about an hour or two outside of the city as you wait for the king’s caravan to greet you in a small village that you can’t remember the name of. You never actually saw the king, but you follow the Hwarang back to Seorabeol, arriving at the gates of the city just as the sun dips below the horizon. The walk through the city is brisk, and in no time the caravan disbands and you and a few other Hwarang stand outside the palace gates. By now, Youngmin, Junhui and Gongmyung are probably greeting officials and other important members of the king’s retinue.

You shift on your feet for a moment, the sole aching slightly from the trek earlier, but you have a job to do. Jihoon had tasked you to tell the Hwarang when to change their shift and to carry any important messages when needed. It’s something of a glorified page position, but it’s not an entirely useless role… probably.

“You’re the messenger?” A voice says as you approach them, “This isn’t a vacation, you know.”

“I’m not here to relax, Dongyoung,” you sigh as you stand before him.

“Is that right? Then why did we take someone here who can’t even use a sword?” Dongyoung scoffs, the light from a nearby brazier flickering across the sneer on his face.

“I’m here to do what I can,” You state firmly before beginning to relay your message. “The Chief is currently paying his respects to members of the court, everyone else should continue guarding.”

“Message understood,” he says flippantly, causing you to look confused with how he didn’t retort on it. “What? Surprised I actually listened to you?”

“Oh no—I just—”

“It’s a job,” He frowns, “It’s not personal. Now you’ve delivered your message, get going.”

You don’t ever speak much to Dongyoung, mostly on account of his brother being Gongmyung, but maybe he’s more responsible than you thought him to be.

After he shoos you away, you continue to make your rounds, delivering messages to the Hwarang stationed around the castle. They’re easy to spot, wearing their white robes instead of their normal blues. They seem laxer now, maybe because the loyalists had been driven out of the capital for the most part, the Baekje revivalists fleeing back to the territory of the old kingdom.

As you think that, and begin to approach another member of the Hwarang some distance away, your blood runs cold. A prick of gooseflesh running along your spine as your heartbeat reaches your ears. You can taste the blood in the air, looking around the trees encasing the palace and finding nothing. It’s not until you look at the castle walls and the walkway situated on top of it, does your stomach sink. Three figures jump down from the wall, landing on the dirt ground with a cloud of gritty dust.

“You’ve found us, then,” A familiar voice sighs out as they turn to you, stating your name somewhat cooly. The figure, flanked by two others, is haloed in the moonlight as you squint your eyes to try and get a better look at his face. “Not too slow.” Their piercing gaze fires into you, the name ‘Hong Jisoo’ battering through your mind as you remember the distinctive voice and way he carries himself. The last you’d seen him had been at Ongsan, and you face him now with much more dread than you’d had that day.

The two figures beside him must be Hwan Minhyun and Xu Minghao, the people whom other Hwarang had encountered during the battle at the fortress. You know they have ties with the inner court and had tried to stop the Hwarang’s efforts during the battle at Wonweol and Ongsan.

“Why are you here?” You question, trying to keep your voice steady.

“You mean ‘how’ did we get here, don’t you?” the one on Jisoo’s left, questions. “Man made obstacles are meaningless to a Demon.”

“We’re here for only one reason: you.” The other speaks up, crossing his arms.

“Me?” You take a step back, the pounding of your heart unrelenting as you stare at them. “I don’t understand.” How do they know your name? “What do you mean by Demon? Is this some kind of joke?”

Jisoo scoffs, “You of all people are asking that? Maybe you’re the one who’s joking.” He steps forward, toward you, the shadows seeming to cling to his robes as he walks.

When the man you now presume to be Minhyun speaks, it’s soft, almost caring in a way, “When you’re injured, do you heal quickly?” Your breath catches in your throat as he continues, “You heal faster than anyone around you, right?”

This knowledge about you is unknown to almost everyone except for you and your father… How do they know this?

You’re about to try and pull yourself together to defend yourself from the accusations when the other man, Minghao speaks up. “Wouldn’t it be better to just give her a demonstration?” His hand begins to reach for the quiver on his back before Jisoo speaks up.

“Minghao, do you really think I’d let you hurt a female Demon?” His voice slightly agitated as he glanced at the other.

“Don’t tell me what to do, Hong.” He scoffs, “She’s being stubborn, what do you suggest we do?”

Jisoo breaks his glare, only for his eyes to settle on the blade at your hip. “Her family’s name is a demon’s, she carries the Demon of Taebaeksan’s blade. Isn’t that enough evidence?”

“My… name?” What’s wrong with ‘Heo’? His narrative, largely unknown to you, is cause enough for you to continue to panic.

“Then again, it’s not like we need your permission to kidnap you,” Jisoo muses, looking at you with a frown, “Come with us or we’ll have to take you instead.” His hand outstretches towards you like a lure trying to bait in a fish. You step back, away from him, when you feel two figures brush past you.

“Woah there,” Mingyu says as he stops, feet hitting the ground as his hand reaches for and pulls out his sword, “This really isn’t the place to try and pick up a woman.”

“You again?” Jisoo asks as he steps back, a sneer on his lips, “For a noble you really do like to keep it simple.”

“The same could be said to you,” Hansol says to him, also reaching for his blade. He looks back to you, “When we heard you hadn’t given your messages out on time we came to look for you.”

You nod and step back once more, your legs becoming unsteady as if the adrenaline that had been coursing through you suddenly left you at once. A hand catches you before you fall, pulling you further away from the skirmish.

“Stay back here,” Jihoon says sternly, looking towards the trio of assailants. His hand guides you to his side before he lets go of you, reaching for his blade. “I thought you’d be here for the king,” He says to Jisoo, “What do you want with my page?”

“I don’t have any interest in you or this kingdom right now,” Jisoo says, looking past the commander and at you, “This matter only concerns us Demons.”

“Demons?” Jihoon scoffs, narrowing his eyes at the foe. He seems confused by the statement, perhaps hoping there’d be a more coherent and understandable reason for Jisoo’s presence.

“Haven’t seen you since Ongsan,” Minghao notes, looking over to Mingyu and Hansol.

“Looks like it’s fate,” Mingyu huffs out, “not that I’m particularly happy about it.”

“I don’t feel great about this reunion either,” Hansol sighs and pulls out his sword, Mingyu following suit.

The tension lays thick in the air, settling into your throat so that you find it hard to speak or breathe. With the slightest movement that could set them off, you reflexively reach for the blade at your hip so that should anything arise, you’ll be ready.

“Don’t worry about them,” A voice from behind you speaks up. Cloaked in the shadows from the nearby forest, Chan slowly approaches you. “Jihoon’s asked me to escort you back to headquarters.”

“Are you telling me to run?” You ask, gaze shifting from Chan to Jihoon, who’s still locked eyes with Jisoo.

“I am,” Chan nods, reaching out so that you might take his hand, “Even if you stay there’s little you can do.”

You shake your head, his hand falling away back to his side, “I’m going to stay.”

“What do you think you’ll be able to do here?” Chan doesn’t sound condescending, just confused as to why you’d wish to stay and endanger yourself further.

You think to what the three intruders had said to you prior, the want to know more about what they’d called you sought itself out with more priority than your own safety at the moment.

“You have a reason, I see.” The Hwarang shakes his head, not waiting for a response as he sees the conviction already dead-set in your gaze. “I can admire that. But I do have my orders. You may want to stay because you want to do what you believe is right, but I have to do the same.” His hand outstretches towards you once more, a pleading look in his eye as he quietly asks for you to go with him.

Before his fingers are able to brush against the linen of your robes, an arrow whizzes by, buzzing before it lands with a solid ‘thunk’ in a tree behind Chan. Gaze traveling back to where it had been fired, you find Minghao lowering his bow, his hand still hovering over his quiver should he need to take another shot.

“She said she wanted to stay,” Minghao sighs, grabbing another arrow before loosely notching it, “You have to learn to respect a woman’s wishes.”

Mingyu lurches forward with his sword in retaliation for the attack on his fellow Hwarang, hoping to land a blow somewhere on Minghao’s abdomen. The strike though, is easily dodged by the bowman, who merely steps aside and watches as Mingyu’s feet falter as he moves to sling his bow over his shoulder and reach for the sword at his hip.

“Minghao’s temper is going to get him in trouble one day,” you hear Minhyun note with a frown as he witnesses the event.

“Evidently so,” Hansol agrees, sword still clenched in his fist, “You don’t seem like you’re going to stop him, though.” He then moves to strike the unarmed foe, swinging his sword in a downward motion to try and disrupt the lax stance Minhyun was in.

“And here I was,” a clanging of metal as Minhyun seems to unsheathe his sword in a blink of an eye and move it upwards to counter Hansol’s blow, “thinking we could just talk this through!”

“Who the hell are these guys?” Jihoon says through grit teeth as you hover your hand over your blade once more. Behind you, you can hear Chan slip back into the tree line, presumably to go and fetch help for the commander and captains. Minghao and Minhyun are showing much more prowess with a blade than you’d thought, and with Jisoo still standing, you know it’d take more men than the three Hwarang to defeat them.

For now, though, you put your faith into Jihoon and step back from the fight, an action that draws appraisal from the commander, “Good. Don’t be an idiot and draw your sword. Leave this to me.”

“Don’t you remember the last time we fought?” Jisoo frowns and you recall the fight that Jihoon had found himself entrenched in. The way that the stranger speaks of it unsettles you, as if he’s taunting the commander with the memory of it. “Maybe instead of going easy I’ll just get rid of you.”

Jihoon laughs at the absurdity of the statement, “I’d love to see you try. I still haven’t paid you back for killing one of my men at Ongsan.”

The rivalry sparks between them, a fire igniting in their gazes before Jihoon takes the first step. They run towards each other, their swords clanging together and ringing out through the nighttime sky. Blades screaming against one another as they’re pulled apart by the respective opponent, Jihoon seeks to swing again only to be parried by Jisoo with ease.

“What the hell are you?” Jihoon asks as the two part once more, his breathing heaving as it seems as if he’d thrown his all into his last strike.

“Haven’t I already said what I was? A Demon,” Jisoo frowns, barely looking scathed by the short skirmish, “but not just me, or them, but her too.” His gaze flickers over to you for a moment before looking back to Jihoon. “We’ve come to relinquish you from watching over her.”

“Sounds like bullshit to me,” Jihoon snorts before tightening his grip on his blade. This time, it’s Jisoo who strikes out first, their blades greeting each other with a shuddered clangor. They exchange a few more blows, a strand of Jisoo’s hair edging too close to Jihoon’s blade and quickly getting cut away. The cut strands flutter to the ground and settle by his feet. Instead of looking scared at how close a blade had come to his body, Jisoo shows what seems to be the tiniest bit of surprise before lowering his sword.

Jihoon, seeing his opposition falter, lowers his blade as well, taking a step back. Around them, you see that Hansol, Minhyun, Mingyu and Minghao have stopped fighting as well.

“Fighting like this is going to get us nowhere,” Minhyun frowns and looks over to Jisoo, “We’ll only attract more people.”

“I can’t help but feel that that’s targeted at him,” Minghao bites, “I know when to stop, the only one here who’s got an issue with that is—” His gaze trails towards Jisoo as he speaks, biting back a retort.

A deep, almost exasperated sigh from Jisoo, “We don’t have to stay. We’ve only come to verify that the lead was correct.”

“Do you think we’ll just let you walk away?” Hansol questions, his sword still raised towards the trio.

“You three might survive,” Jisoo nods, moving to sheath his sword, “but how many of your men will we have to kill before we escape? Are their lives that expendable?” Jihoon, Hansol and Mingyu remain angrily silent, knowing full well they can’t accept that risk. Jisoo smiles at them, he and the two others begin to make their way to the forest’s edge, but before they disappear completely, their leader turns and says one last thing to you.

“I will be back for you.” Not wanting to meet his gaze, your eyes travel to the embroidered yellow azaleas on his robes before they vanish in the denseness of the forest.

The words whip through you like an icy chill, curling around your stomach with a fear you haven’t felt since you were a child.

“Are you okay?” Mingyu asks after he’s sheathed his sword and takes a few steps towards you.

“I’m… alright,” you nod weakly, clenching your fists so they won’t shake.

“You’re bad at lying,” he laughs lightly, “Just wait here for a bit, we’ll have some other men take a few rounds and make sure those three don’t come back.”

“Thank you,” trying to sound as appreciative as you can, you look from Mingyu to Jihoon, who continues to stare into the darkness of the woods as if to try and spot the three figures.

“Do you have any idea why they came after you?” He questions after a moment, locking eyes with you as if to probe your mind.

“I’m not sure…” you relent, not knowing whether Jisoo’s words were accurate or not. Were you really what he said, a Demon?

𝔍𝔲𝔫𝔢 20𝔱𝔥, 662 – 𝔅𝔲𝔩𝔤𝔲𝔨𝔰𝔞 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 The incident on the night of the eleventh never comes to the attention of any other members of the Hwarang, save for the commander’s most trusted captains. In lieu of that, life at Bulguksa remains relatively unchanged, the usual grumblings from Gongmyung and his crowd continue as usual and the captain’s antics remain unbothered.

On this balmy morning, you walk through the halls, coming upon a line of Hwarang gaily chatting among themselves as they wait. Suddenly a door opens from the beginning of the line and Gongmyung comes racing out towards your direction.

“Never have I felt so violated,” He huffs exasperatedly, coming towards you. “This is absolutely horrendous!”

“Is something wrong, Gongmyung?” You ask with a tilt of your head, wondering what has the Deputy Commander in such a tizzy.

“Everything!” He pants out, a thin line of panicked sweat trailing down the side of his face, “Why am I meant to disrobe in that room of utter brutes!?”

His sentence makes you furrow your brow, what exactly is going on?

“Someone who calls themself a physician who Youngmin met while conversing with the King’s council arrived today,” the Deputy Commander does his best to straighten his robes and adjust his long strands of hair that had gone askew. “He’s holding physical examinations.” With a frown he nods his head towards the door he’d raced out of moments prior, “That monster said I should take my clothes off in front of near strangers! When I refused, he tried to take them off of me himself! And the other captains just stood there! Without doing anything!”

Seeing as your particular… situation might not be the best for a physical examination in a group full of men, you think about returning to your room before you ask, “What’s the doctor’s name?”

“I think it was Namekawa Yasuo, some man from Yamato,” Gongmyung huffs indignantly.

“Doctor Namekawa!” You nearly jump at the familiar name.

The other takes a step back in surprise, “Do you know him or something?”

When you’d arrived in Seorabeol with your father’s letter and a few fragments of some from your father’s collection, his name had been among the signatures. It was your intention upon arrival to seek him out, your father had always called him a trustworthy man. Once in Seorabeol, you found that he’d been away on some patient’s request, and after that you’d quickly gotten swept up into the world of the Hwarang.

“I’ve got to go!” You brush away his question and barrel past him towards the door he’d exited from.

“You’re going in there willingly?” Gongmyung calls out from behind you, shaking his head in disgust.

Almost immediately when you open the door you wish you hadn’t.

“Alright, next,” the man you presume to be Dr. Namekawa calls out, motioning forward a Hwarang. A nearly fully disrobed Hwarang.

“My turn!” Junhui shouts and steps forward, only wearing the pants worn underneath his Hwarang robes. “You’re looking at years of training right here,” he laughs almost comically as he approaches the doctor’s station.

“I think you’re fine, Wen,” Soonyoung scoffs, in a similar state of undress as Junhui, “it’s your head he should be looking at.”

“Are you asking me to beat the shit out of you?” Junhui turns to look at him, a grin split across his face.

Dr. Namekawa rolls his eyes at him before speaking, “Wen Junhui, you’re fine. Next!”

“Hold on!” Junhui says, taking a step closer to the doctor and flexing his arm, “You’ve gotta make sure I’m in prime condition!”

“As healthy as a horse,” Namekawa reels, sitting back in his seat, “I’ve seen more than enough, thank you.”

“You’re holding up the line, Wen,” Mingyu calls out, and you spot Hansol standing next to him, both with unamused expressions on their faces. “For the love of— please get moving.”

“I just don’t think he’s had enough time to fully make sure I’m okay!” Junhui complains, “I’m trying to make sure I can bulk up more!”

“This is supposed to be about finding medical issues, not boasting,” Hansol sighs, his arms crossed over his chest, “Move.”

Your mouth hangs open in shock, it’s now easy to see why Gongmyung had made such a hasty retreat. Shaking your head, you pull yourself from the room and back into the hallway, feeling a creeping heat of embarrassment rise up your neck.

“What are you doing here?” The Hwarang who’s first in line questions, “Is something wrong?”

“Oh!” Turning, you see Chan gazing at you perplexedly. “Hi, I heard Doctor Namekawa was here.”

“Ah, so you want to speak to him?” A tilt of his head. “I’ve been briefed on your situation, so I understand what you’re trying to do… But I’m not sure that this is the way to go about it. I’m sure he can speak to you once the physicals are complete.”

You nod, “I just think they might take a while, some of the captains…”

“I’m aware,” he laughs, “if you want me to, I can try to get things moving a little faster.”

“Would you?” Eyes widening, “I’d be thankful if you could.”

“Of course,” the smile still lingering on his lips, “Just leave it to me.” With that he walks into the room and towards the doctor, “Excuse me, Doctor Namekawa? Please let me look after those whose symptoms are minor, I’m sure you could use a break?”

You stand in the doorway, unable to hear his response, so you step back into the hallway and wait for the doctor to exit. Namekawa Yasuo leaves the room a few moments later, his attention turning to you when you call out to him.

Namekawa’s eyes narrow as he looks at you, inspecting you as if you were one of his patients. “I need to fetch some medicine from my things, would you mind giving me a hand?” He questions, his gaze softening once you nod your head.

On the way towards his things, the two of you walk through one of the courtyards and come across Kwak Youngmin walking towards you. He nods at the doctor before glancing at you, “I see you’ve found her already.”

“Thanks to you,” Namekawa nods with a smile at the leader.

Your brow furrows as you search both of their expressions before the doctor speaks up once more, “I came to Bulguksa to see you. Youngmin told me that Heo’s daughter was staying with the Hwarang.”

“I see,” you realize, your eyes widening as you look towards Youngmin.

“I knew that Namekawa and Heo knew each other,” Youngmin smiles softly, “So I thought that maybe the doctor knew of his friend’s whereabouts.”

Even if the Hwarang wanted to find your father for reasons other than yours, this slight clue was still enough for you to feel happy.

“Thank you,” a bow to Youngmin and one to Namekawa, “both of you.”

Namekawa then goes on to say how you’d left just before he arrived at your father’s clinic in Toehwa-hyeon when you’d gone off to Seorabeol. He’d received the letter you sent but once arriving had no idea of where you’d gone or how to find you.

“I apologize for not seeking you out sooner,” he sounds remorseful, “It must’ve been difficult. If there’s anything I can do for you, please let me know.”

“About my father…” the words leave you and Namekawa’s face turns grim, you already feel as if you know the answer.

“Unfortunately,” he says once your words have trailed off, “I do not know where your father is residing.”

“Oh,” utter defeat lamenting in your voice as you speak the singular word. You almost feel bad now for feeling so hopeful that Namekawa would have some earth-shattering news about the whereabouts of your father.

“I hear, though,” Namekawa coughs into his hand to clear his throat, “that you’ve become involved with the treatment… You do know what I’m referring to, right?”

“Are you able to explain it any more?” You’d learned of the serum, seen what it had done to those who’d taken it. But why, why is your father involved with it? “I want to know what my father was experimenting for.”

“Heo was working under Crown orders with the Hwarang to create what are called ‘Furies’,” Namekawa’s voice is low as he speaks, gravelly with a seriousness that permeates into you. “Furies are humans with near supernatural strength and speed. They heal incredibly quickly as well.”

“Furies?” The word lingers familiarly on your tongue, it takes a moment, but you realize you’d heard the word before. Soonyoung had tried to explain to you what they are on the night that Seungcheol had been injured last year.

“The contents of the serum are called pimul,” Namekawa crosses his arm, tone still low, “in Tang they call it ‘al iksir’ and in Yamato it’s ‘ochimizu’. It’s meant to grant immortality.”

These words sound like some sort of fantastical fairytale than what’s meant to be real life. Yet, the seriousness of the doctor assures you that it isn’t a sick joke.

“I’ve heard of its healing and strength giving properties,” you nod, “but doesn’t it cause the drinker to go mad?” Recalling the night you had stumbled into Seorabeol and the nobles who’d been attacked by the rouge Hwarang furies causes you to shudder. “And even if that doesn’t drive you insane, the smell of blood can set you off too…”

A heaving sigh as Namekawa nods solemnly, moving then to pinch the bridge of his nose with his thumb and forefinger, “So you’re aware of that as well…”

“Why was my father doing this?” You plead more than ask, trying to search the depths of your mind to reason with yourself and come to a believable situation that would’ve caused Heo Jinsang to work with such a vile creation.

“That may have been why he left,” Namekawa suggests softly, “His morals would no longer allow him to work on such a thing.”

“And yet we were given the pimul by the Crown to help strengthen the Hwarang…” Youngmin frowns and looks towards the sidewalk.

“It was an experiment,” Namekawa shakes his head, “and it failed. It’s probably best to leave it behind, I’m sure the Crown has abandoned its ambition with it as well.”

The leader looks up and frowns at the doctor, probably unhappy to hear that Namekawa would question the Crown’s once official decision.

“You’ve seen what it’s done to your men,” Namekawa insists, “It’s inhumane and you know it better than I do.”

Youngmin lets out a huff of air and then falls silent. You know that he knows how detrimental it is to his men, painfully so. Yet, the pimul was given to him on official orders and a secret request from the former King.

“I understand that you’re one of the King’s doctors, yet…” A voice from behind after a moment of silence. Your eyes widen at the sight of Seungcheol in the daylight, knowing that the sun’s rays have an adverse effect on him. “You’re not a member of the Hwarang, you have no right to object to our methods.” His face paling in the light, lost of all color, almost as if he were a walking corpse.

“Are you okay walking around like this?” You ask him quietly, your voice teetering on worry and a whisper.

“You look pale, Seungcheol,” Youngmin frowns at the colonel, “You should be resting.”

“Don’t mind me,” Seungcheol shakes his head and then turns to the doctor. “We use the serum effectively and at our own discretion.” His gaze hardens when they lock eyes, his voice becoming gravely serious, almost as if he’s been offended.

“It’s far too dangerous to—” Namekawa begins before being interrupted by Seungcheol.

“We have and will continue to work on Heo’s research.” His voice, behind the veneer of quiet anger, sounds weakened. “I am living proof of its effectiveness.”

“You may be right,” Namekawa cedes before raising another point, “But that doesn’t mean you’re not forcing your body in ways unseen with the eye.”

“I’m perfectly healthy,” Seungcheol insists, “With continued research and alterations to the serum, we’ll have less casualties and more success.”

“And are you planning on sacrificing your men for your success?” Namekawa frowns, “These men aren’t just common folk, many are the sons of nobles, aristocrats! Sons who will be missed should they just disappear.”

“It’s not as if we’re force feeding them pimul.” Seungcheol’s agitated at the doctor, you don’t know the last time he was able to see his own family since becoming a Fury. “The men who devote and give their lives to the Hwarang are the foundation of my work, they did not and will not die in vain.”

“But—”

“I think that’s enough,” Youngmin steps in before the doctor can say anything else, “from either of you. Let’s discuss this at another time.”

To you it seems that neither Seungcheol or Namekawa would ever come to a civil agreement on the ethics of the serum’s usage. But that was an opinion you feel is best not said at this moment.

The anger in Seungcheol’s face subsides, and the corner of his mouth turns up into a smile before he bows and leaves the three of you wordlessly.

“So…” Youngmin says as Seungcheol recedes back into the headquarters inner buildings, “How did exams go?”

“About that,” Namekawa begins, “It’s a bit troubling.”

“Troubling?” Youngmin asks, confused, “What do you mean by that?”

“What do you mean ‘What do you mean’?” Namekawa frowns, “The amount of injured and ill men you have is nearly a quarter of your forces!”

“That’s—” Youngmin’s voice catches in his throat, “Are you sure?”

“I am not only sure, but it is the definite truth,” A disparaging shake of his head, “What have you been doing to these men? Cuts, lacerations, bowel pains… Need I mention the lice?”

“I’m embarrassed to hear that, I really am,” Youngmin looks as such, his ears pink as he drops his shoulders. “What can I do?”

“Set aside a space for the ill and those needing medical attention, for starters. I can send some pyrethrum powder for the lice,” Namekawa lists off and you can see Youngmin mentally making a list, “Second, this place needs to be cleaned. I can’t help you otherwise.”

“Of course,” Youngmin nods, the tinge of embarrassment still riding his tone, “I’ll have everything seen to immediately.”

And so, the Hwarang are ordered to clean. Those who are able-bodied enough to hold a broom or a rag are sent to the main hall, Youngmin quickly barking out cleaning orders and sending them all over Bulguksa to thoroughly scrub the temple down.

“Why the hell are we doing this?” Junhui grumbles as he sits on his knees, scrubbing at the wooden floors. “I can think of nothing less I would want to be doing right now.”

“Stop complaining so much,” Mingyu sighs and calls him over, “Help me lift up this cabinet, it’s a great way to show off your muscles from earlier.”

You’re walking into the main hall with a bucket of water when you hear Soonyoung cry out, causing you to jump and spill some of the liquid onto the floor and your shoes.

“A RAT!” He nearly screeches, hopping behind Hansol when he spots the gray creature dart out from a bookcase.

“Calm down Soonyoung,” Hansol looks as if he’s holding back a smile, trying to keep the reserved demeanor he usually has, “It’s not that bad. It actually looks like it’s eating that—is that dried up tteok?”

“Yeah!” Soonyoung says, leaning forward to get a look at the rat’s snack, “Who the hell hides their sweets back here?!”

A grumble from the other side of the room, you look over to see Kangjoon holding a boom, “Why are we bothering ourselves with work a servant should be doing? I’m a strategist, not a cleaner.”

“Why don’t you show us your school’s technique, then?” Mingyu scoffs, “You said it’s prized knowledge, maybe it can help us here.”

“Shut it!” Kangjoon says angrily, “The Pohang style wasn’t designed to help with housework!”

“You’re a little bit of a bully, huh, Mingyu?” Dongyoung snickers as he peeks out from behind one of the various shelves, “Those old-timey tactics of his wouldn’t even allow him to hold a broomstick, let alone make a dent in this mess.”

Kangjoon’s stare hardens at Dongyoung, “You should watch your mouth… Compared to the techniques from Tang it may be outdated, but I can assure you it still holds up.”

“Oh,” Mingyu looks past Kangjoon and out one of the doorways, “Youngmin’s coming.”

“Chief!” Kangjoon spins on his heels towards the door, “Look at this, the room was so filthy you couldn’t even walk properly, and with my guidance it’s—” He stops once he realizes there’s no one standing in the doorway, “Where’s Kwak?”

“You’re an idiot,” Mingyu rolls his eyes.

“Damn you, Kim,” Kangjoon spits venomously, “You tricked me!”

“An idiot and a kiss ass,” Mingyu hums, “Quite the multitasker. Don’t you ever get tired being such a two-faced asshole, not knowing which mask to wear?”

Kangjoon fumes and angrily stomps down towards the other end of the hall. You see this as an opportunity to proclaim your findings.

“I brought you all some fresh rags and water to help you clean the floor with,” you announce, holding out the bucket and handful of cloth to the captains.

“Thanks!” Soonyoung says as he bounds over, swiftly taking the items from your grasp and heading back to his work station.

𝔍𝔲𝔫𝔢 21𝔰𝔱, 662 – 𝔅𝔲𝔩𝔤𝔲𝔨𝔰𝔞 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 “This looks to be adequate enough,” Namekawa Yasuo had arrived early the next morning to check the cleanliness of the headquarters. He now stands in the main hall, a look of approval on his features as he notes the sheen of the floorboards.

“Right?” Junhui beams, “See? The doc can acknowledge my hard work.”

Kangjoon lets out something of a guffaw at the statement, “Compared to the nuances of strategy, it’s not like tidying up is a magnificent feat or anything.”

“All you did was complain,” Junhui frowns.

“Yeah,” Soonyoung nods, “And Seungkwan got to rest all day! Sounds like he was getting special treatment while we worked our asses off.”

“Not my fault,” Seungkwan raises his hands to show he’s innocent from that decision, “Jihoon’s the one being overprotective.”

“It is your fault,” Jihoon snaps at him, arms crossing over his chest, “You’re not taking care of yourself, that’s why you’re coughing up a lung.”

“I will admit,” Hansol say, looking around the space, “It is nice seeing the headquarters put together.”

“It does look different,” Jihoon nods, also taking a moment to admire the cleanliness of the main hall, “I hope to keep it this way.”

“Then we should clean every day,” Mingyu laughs aloud.

“Great idea! Make sure you scrub the baseboards Soonie,” Junhui jokes along with the other while Soonyoung’s eyes go wide.

“But you’ve got the most energy and the biggest muscles, Junhui! Don’t think I’m letting you slide on this,” the younger argues to the two others.

“I’ll help you,” you offer with a smile, knowing that he’d need it.

“Really?” He perks up, “Yeah, we don’t need them anyway, you and me against the world!”

“Hold on,” Junhui interrupts, “I didn’t say that I wasn’t going to help…”

Jihoon lets out a laugh, “Wen, there’s some trash over there, mind taking it out?”

“Hooold on, we’re not starting until tomorrow, right, Soonyoung?” Junhui looks to him for help.

“If you keep flailing your arms like that you’re only going to stir up more dust,” Hansol sighs as he watches Junhui scramble to big up the assorted pieces of garbage.

You laugh at the scene until something catches your eye, you spot both Namekawa and Seungkwan duck out of the room and head outside. Brow furrowing for a moment, you think to follow after them but stop yourself as it isn’t any of your concern.

After the ruckus in the main hall dies down, you grab a broom and head outside to sweep away fallen debris from the walkway leading to the main hall. You’ve just started to sweep the broom across the agate stone when a figure appears before you.

Head turning up from looking down at the azalea embroidered robes, all you can spurt out is a “You!” before taking a step back.

“You’ve got ancient blood running through your veins and yet you clean up after these humans?” Jisoo sounds saddened on the verge of disgust as he looks at you.

“What are you doing here?” You question as the grip you have on the broom handle tightens as he chuckles at you.

“Don’t tell me you’re going to fight me with that?” He shakes his head, biting back a laugh, “Was your family not blessed with brains?”

You don’t respond, instead look around for anything or anyone who could help you. Of course, the entrance lies empty, all of the captains still squabbling somewhere deep in the compound.

“Calm down,” Jisoo sighs, his laughter ceasing, “I’m not here to fight today. I only want to know what, if anything, you have to do with Heo Jinsang.”

Stunned by his statement, your lips part in shock, “My father?”

“…Father?” Jisoo looks surprised by your answer, “Heo Jinsang is your father?”

“Yes,” you nod, “he is.”

The man seems shocked at first, then that emotion melts away as it looks as if he’s putting the pieces of a puzzle together. He opens his mouth to say something else but a voice behind you stops him.

“Sneaking into your enemy’s base alone?” Jihoon’s voice rings out as his footsteps approach, the sound of dirt under foot crunching growing nearer and nearer. “I thought you’d be smarter than that.”

A few other pairs of footsteps and you turn and see him flanked by both Mingyu and Soonyoung.

“In broad daylight too,” Mingyu shakes his head at the intruder, “Figures.”

“Get away from her!” Soonyoung’s more than a little adamant, his hand already hovering over his sword.

“The Hwarang only come in bushels, huh?” Jisoo says, seemingly wanting to egg the men on.

“Watch it,” Jihoon says sternly, the tension between the two becoming more palpable by the second.

Surprisingly, it’s Jisoo who tries to sate it. “If you want to fight, then I’ll be happy to do so… But I’m here for other reasons, more specifically, to issue a warning.” His eyes grow dark and his tone more serious at his next statement, “Stop trying to turn humans into Demons.”

“You don’t know what you’re talking about,” Jihoon frowns as he watches the other carefully.

“What makes you think that we’re going to listen to you?” Mingyu pokes at Jisoo.

“You’re all idiots,” Jisoo shakes his head warily, “Can’t you see that I’m trying to help you?” He rolls his eyes, “Forget it, it was useless trying to say anything to you.”

“This is our base,” Soonyoung raises his voice, “You should shut up before we decide to do something about you being here.”

Jisoo ignores the captain’s words and turns to you, a coldness in his eyes as he speaks, “Heo is with us now, don’t you understand what that means?” He searches your eyes for a spark of recognition, but it doesn’t seem to click so he elaborates further, “Your father has abandoned the Crown.”

“What…?” You say, still puzzled by what he means.

“Why are you here?” A cold smile to match his gaze creeps onto his lips, “I think you should ponder on that. Carefully.” With that final statement he turns on his heels and seems to disappear into the shadows. You’re not sure if he just did, your mind too caught up in what he just said.

What or who were the Demons? Your father is with them? You thought Hong Jisoo’s family to be just opposing the opposite side of the court that favored the Hwarang, was it a ruse and he’s actually some sort of revivalist? Does this mean that your father is working with them?

Who are these people that call themselves ‘Demons’? And what do they want with you?

“Who are they?” You look at Jihoon, “The Demons?”

“After fighting them, I can say that they’re not like any human I’ve ever fought,” a shake of his head, “Not even close. I’ve fought against people from each kingdom but none of them… They’ve never been that powerful.” He muses for a moment and nods, “I’d say ‘demon’ is a pretty accurate descriptor.”

“If the commander thinks they’re demons, they really just might be,” Mingyu says, his brow furrowing at Jihoon.

“He is the Hwarang’s Demon, after all,” Soonyoung notes, the same concern from Mingyu’s tone riding in his.

“This is serious,” Jihoon looks at them, trying to quell the playful argument. You feel the tension in your shoulders ease after a while, the dread of seeing Jisoo on familiar ground eventually dissipating as the moments pass. With his arrival, and how easy it was for him to come unexpectedly, you’re sure that you’ll have to have a higher guard now as you walk the headquarters.

𝔖𝔢𝔭𝔱𝔢𝔪𝔟𝔢𝔯 7𝔱𝔥, 662 – 𝔅𝔲𝔩𝔤𝔲𝔨𝔰𝔞 𝔗𝔢𝔪𝔭𝔩𝔢, 𝔎𝔦𝔫𝔤𝔡𝔬𝔪 𝔬𝔣 𝔖𝔦𝔩𝔩𝔞 Compared to the year before, it seems as if the Hwarang aren’t being called on to do as much. Both the raid on Wonweol and the attack on Ongsan seem like a distant memory as you look up at your ceiling from your bed. In a way, you’re thankful for the peace wrought on by this year. It’s allowed you to take up looking for your father again and help more around the temple. The night rolling in and covering your room in a shroud of darkness, the sound of the crickets outside chirping away keeping you awake.

You push yourself from your bedding and rise to your feet, maybe a walk would help you become sleepy. Right now, you are anything but tired.

Treading quietly across the floor, you open your door, the hinges creaking as you push it open. The halls are quiet as you trapeze through them, in some rooms you can hear loud snoring, in others, nothing at all. You don’t catch sight of anyone until you reach the end of the hall that opens into a courtyard, a figure standing in the shadows as they look up towards the sky.

As you edge nearer to the greenery, you can see that it’s the commander, standing still as the moonlight cascades down onto him. His foot taps in subtle anxiousness, as if he’s waiting for someone.

This isn’t something for you to see, but a quickening curiosity takes over you as another figure approaches the commander from the other end of the courtyard.

“I’m sorry for asking you to come out so late, Jihoon,” Seungcheol’s quiet voice rings out through the nearly empty space.

“Don’t worry about it,” Jihoon turns from gazing up at the stars and looks to his friend with a small smile, “It’s a little difficult to talk during the day.”

You’ve lost all chance to either leave or inject yourself into the conversation, so you just stand and watch their conversation unfold before you.

“How are you doing?” Jihoon asks, his once soft gaze hardening with concern, “Don’t bullshit me, I’ve barely seen you since you went to Hwangnyongsa.”

Seungcheol merely smiles softly, “I’m feeling alright since the sun’s down. If I was going to complain I’d talk about the heat or humidity.”

“I know you don’t like the sun,” The commander notes, “and everybody hates the humidity and heat. But you know what I’m asking, Seungcheol.”

“Are you asking if I’ve gone mad?” The colonel asks simply, his brow raising. “If you’re worried about me, I’ll let you know that I don’t regret taking the pimul; I’ve regained the use of my arm, I’m able to carry a sword when I thought I’d never do so again.”

Seungcheol’s smile doesn’t seem to be the answer that Jihoon is looking for, and a frown overtakes him. “At what cost, though?” His voice low as he asks, pressing further, “When you become a Fury, you lose a part of yourself… Maybe even too much. I’m sorry if I’m not taking this lightly, I’m worried about you.”

“You’ve always worried too much, Jihoon,” Seungcheol says, brows knitting together as he cannot fully understand his friend’s concern. “This was a gift, a miracle, even!”

“One man’s miracle is another’s curse,” Jihoon sighs out with a scowl, “I don’t like the monkey’s paw aspect of it.”

“How scary!” Seungcheol chuckles, “I’d be a fool if I ignored one of your famed hunches.”

“You’d be a fool if you joked about this,” the scowl still present as Jihoon crosses his arms, “I’m not trying to be funny.” His fingers tap along his robes as he shakes his head, “You should be standing side by side with Youngmin and me, you’re a colonel, our colonel.”

“You’re acting odd,” Seungcheol’s lighthearted tone vacating, “Are you okay?” He suddenly looks over to you, locking eyes with yours as a small smile dances along his lips.

Jihoon follows his line of sight and catches you eavesdropping into their conversation. “What are you doing out here?!” He questions as you panic in place.

“I’m sorry,” breaking your gaze with Seungcheol you look to the ground, “I wasn’t sure if I should say something and then the two of you began talking…”

“You’ve got more important things to worry about than me, Jihoon,” Seungcheol sighs out and looks at the commander. “Gongmyung and his men, for starters. I’ve heard he’s been acting stranger than usual these days.”

“I’ve been working on that,” Jihoon relents, dropping his arms to let them fall to his sides.

Seungcheol nods, a gleam of satisfaction in his eye before he gives you a simple nod and walks away into the depths of the compound. You’re about to return to your quarters before Jihoon calls out to you.

“I haven’t dismissed you yet,” he says as you begin to turn. You freeze in place only to turn to face him fully once more. “I know you’re not an idiot so you shouldn’t act like one.” His voice is low, almost a whisper as he doesn’t wish for anyone to overhear him, “The more you know about us, the more danger you’re putting in front of yourself. It’s easy to die around here, you’ve seen that… Do you understand?”

“I’m sorry for imp—” you begin before he cuts you off, raising his voice.

“Don’t be sorry,” his head shakes, “Just be careful and stay out of trouble.” When it seems like he has nothing more to say, he raised a hand to the bridge of his nose and pinches it, quelling some sort of thought before he turns of his heels and begins to walk back towards his room.

“Commander,” you find yourself calling out. Jihoon looks so… dejected and lonely after his talk with Seungcheol, you have to say something. “Can I help with the research?”

“What the hell?” You hear him say before he turns to look back at you, “Of course not.”

“I don’t have my father’s knowledge or expertise… but I want to do something to help,” you insist, feeling responsible as if your absent father’s duties had been passed to you. “I can read his notes and help explain them, he left a lot of research material at his clinic in Toehwa-hyeon… There’s got to be something useful there. I can find something to help.”

“Heo continued his research here, don’t you know that?” Jihoon takes a deep breath as to not fume so much, “Even if we tore his clinic down to the foundations to get any scrap of information, the chances that we’ll find some new research is slim to none.”

“I can do my own research!” You push, hands clenching at your sides.

“You’re not thinking about this hard enough,” His gaze hardens, “Could you accept responsibility for things if they go south?” A sigh as he sees you begin to stumble and scramble for words, “Look, your father’s one of the top doctors in the kingdom with the knowledge of Tang medicine. He couldn’t figure that shit out. Someone like your or me with no outstanding medical knowledge isn’t going to do much better.”

Jihoon’s right and you know it, even if you don’t want to admit your faulty thinking. It’s highly ambitious of you to think that you could find a cure-all to the pimul and what your father had done to the Hwarang. As you look to Jihoon, you try and look as stoic and unbothered as possible to stop him from seeing how heartbroken you feel.

His mouth turns into a wry smile at your attempt, “You want to help and that’s what’s important. I won’t forget that.” Jihoon nods his head to show appreciation, “But you have to wait for now. The Hwarang dug themselves into this hole so that means we have to find a way out.”

Even if his demeanor is cold most of the time, there’s a hidden sincerity behind that face that only peeks through sometimes.

“I get it,” he continues, “your father was a part of the research team and you feel responsible, right? We’re still looking for him, and either we find him, or we don’t, you’ll just have to wait.” When you continue to silently object him, he frowns a bit, “Furies are bad news, in a perfect world we would’ve never gotten involved. But this world is far from it, and they might be our advantage should Goguryeo try and help those revivalists. Only as a last resort though, the cost is still too high.”

A shake of his head, “Never mind that now, though. This is between you and me though, okay?” His words hold the same tinge of threat that you’d heard on several occasions before. You nod almost out of habit at this point. “Also, the next time you take a stroll, be more cautious of who and what you may be stumbling in on.”

#seventeen x reader #jihoon x you #jihoon x reader #jihoon seventeen #woozi x reader #hye.favs — hwarang series #joshua hong x reader #seventeen x you

39 notes · View notes

lemon-boy-stan · 4 years ago

Text

meeting taehyung on the set of hwarang as a-ro includes

he’d be a little shy at first

he’d be fine with the guys, but as soon as you join them he’d go totally quiet

remember he was younger back then so he hasn’t really gained all that incredible confidence yet

he would definitely be intimidated by the other guys. seeing as you’re the main love interest he’s definitely worried about what might happen between you and other members.

that doesn’t stop him from stealing glances, though.

even though he goes quiet when you’re around that doesn’t mean he doesn’t not want to impress you.

he’ll always dress nice around you.

sometimes the guys make fun of him for it.

throughout the season, you’d get to know each other better.

you guys are around the same age so you get along better than the rest of your castmates who are a few years older.

you decided that you’d grown a crush on him.

that’s when the other girls in the cast would mention that he liked you, too

taehyung brought you to meet his friends (the band)

they also liked you (in a friend way) and they knew already something good would happen between the both of you

which of course, did.

soon you and taehyung would start hanging out together outside of work.

he was one of the few cast members you’d be texting the most.

throughout the filming of the episodes you’d get to know each other even better

you didn’t get to spend a lot of time together filming seeing as he wasn’t a major character but you would spend every possible spare hour with him rehearsing or just being together

where of course, a crush would soon grow.

tae’s quite oblivious, though.

he liked you, too, but he thought you were way out of his league.

you dreaded the last day of filming.

although you lived near him you were still miserable about it

so he asks you why you’re so sad later that day

and of course it just... comes out

he makes the move and kisses you

and locks the door but that doesn’t stop the rest of the cast from talking about it until the cows come home.

BTS MASTERLIST // TXT MASTERLIST

175 notes · View notes

nimnimworld-blog · 7 years ago

Note

I wanna show a bit of love to the often overlooked characters! May I please have a reaction for Ah Ro and Dan Se when the person they've been crushing on confessed to them first? Please and thank you!!

A/N: I am happy to see a request for Ah Ro and Dan Se. I hope to see more requests for Ah Ro and Dan Se reactions. Thank you, anon~

AH RO:

“I... I, uh... wow...” To say Ah Ro was surprised would be a huge understatement. The moment you (her lifetime crush) confessed your love for her: Ah Ro couldn’t help but smile, feeling rather speechless. She let out a small giggle, pinching herself discreetly through one of her hanbok’s sleeves. She couldn’t help but wonder if she was dreaming or hallucinating.

DAN SE:

"Wait... w-what?” Dan Se was stunned. So much so that he had turned into a living statue. What the Hell did you just say?! He must’ve been dreaming. That was all he could think in order to reason with himself that he simply imagined your confession. Why would you like someone like him, anyway? Your words repeated in his mind as he stared in shock.

#completed request #hwarang reactions #hwarang scenarios #hwarang x reader #hwarang smut #hwarang #ah ro #dan se

70 notes · View notes

withasideofeggsy · 7 years ago

Text

Hwarang :: Sam Maek Jong x Reader :: Part III

Hi hello sorry this took me forever to write. I wrote this over the span of the past few months so I hope it flows okay. I had a lot of trouble concluding this series as the show ended. I was at war with myself to add more details of the drama or how I imagined the drama to end so here it is! I hope you all like it regardless. I know the Hwarang hype died but I wanted to finish this for you guys :) so I hope you read it nonetheless! I also added a little sexy time for yall so please enjoy! See ya in my next fic!

Read part 1 and part 2 here!

“Mother.”

The room’s temperature dropped and the tension got thicker by the second, the faceless King finally made his appearance. Mustering up the last drop of strength I had left I look up to see the long awaited King, only to reveal Ji Dwi.

“Mother! Just this once, won’t you allow me to be happy?” he cries out, startling everyone in the room. I couldn’t process anything in my throbbing head, all I could make out was that Ji Dwi, the man who I was dotting after for the last few days was calling the Queen his mother. “Sam Maek Jong…I’m protecting you! Her dangerous mentality will get you killed,” the Queen explains with as much frustration. Sam Maek Jong? I couldn’t ponder on what the Queen called Ji Dwi as what left his lips next practically stole my last breath. “If a dangerous mentality will get anyone killed here, it will be you Mother. If you dare touch a hair on her head again…I can’t even imagine the things I will do. I will kill, and I will show you how dangerous I can be.” With that calm threat he sheathes his sword, “Now leave.” The Queen lowers her sword, “I know you too well, to know that you are only all talk, Sam Maek Jong.”

It was too fast for Ji Dwi to register, I fell watching him as he screamed. I felt pain as my body collided into the ground, knocking the air out of my burning lungs. Only with enough strength to control my eyes, I lock them with Seyeo who had pushed me out of the way, he gives me a small smile in contrast to his usually cocky smirk. “Seyeo…” I breathe staring at the long blade sprouted from his shoulder. “Let me protect you one last time, my Princess.” “No…no…no…” I mumble reaching out for him. It all happened so fast, I could only focus on the blade sliding out from his shoulder causing more blood to seep into his dark hanbok. There was so much yelling from Ji Dwi and the Queen but I couldn’t hear anything. I couldn’t even hear my own sobbing as I engulfed Seyeo into my arms, despite his serious injury he still managed to pull my hanbok back onto my shoulders and helped me tie the front, “You are still the Princess, I know you like Ji Dwi but you can’t be showing him your body this soon.” “You are so dumb, you are hurt and you care about that?!” I scream applying pressure onto his wound, in which he shrugs. “This isn’t as bad as that time you impaled me by accident during training three years ago.” I cracked a smile despite the hot tears running down my cheeks, “Shut up will you? You’re hurt I can’t have you bleeding out on me. That’s an order.” He nods, “I can’t disobey you so I guess I won’t die on you today.” I scoff pulling him into a tighter hug, “I’m sorry…I couldn’t protect you.” In which it was his turn to return the scoff, “I should be saying that to you. You’re a mess your blood is soaking through your hanbok and your face is smeared in it.” A soft cough gained my attention. We both looked up to Ji Dwi who held the most irritated expression I’ve ever seen on a person. He kneels down to our level and clasped his hand onto Seyeo’s wounded shoulder, “Are you alright?” to which Seyeo nods, “Yeah this is nothing.” Ji Dwi then turns to me and his expression softens significantly, “I’m sorry for not being able to protect you.” He places a hand on my dampened back from all the blood, “I’m so sorry.” I look up at him through hooded eyes, I was getting sleepy, slowly craning my neck I pressed my lips against his, “There’s nothing to apologize for. Thank you for saving us...your Majesty.” He holds me against him gently so that he wouldn’t cause any more pain to my injuries, “I love you,” he whispers against my forehead. “Alright, let’s go before the Queen comes back and decides to stab me again,” Seyeo interrupts getting up from my lap with surprisingly no difficulty for someone who just got impaled. “I love you too,” I bashfully smile looking anywhere but his face. He places a chaste kiss onto my blooded forehead before scooping me up into his strong arms. I suck in a sharp breath as my clothes scrape against the broken skin on my back, “You’re a good girl, please be strong for me. Don’t fall asleep.” I nod, gripping his shoulder with one hand. I was starting to feel light headed but I couldn’t fall asleep for his sake, “(Y/n) please stay awake, for me okay?” “Okay…” I mumble holding him even tighter so that I wouldn’t slip away. Seyeo retrieves the discarded swords on the ground before quickly joining our side. With one hand pressed against his shoulder he angrily waves the sheathed swords in his other hand, “This stupid sword stabbed me twice, I’m going to throw it away. It’s bad luck.” “That’s my favourite sword, I’ll throw you away,” I manage a soft giggle snuggling into Ji Dwi’s chest.

The walk back to the Hwarang house was slow, it felt like years has passed. “Ji Dwi?” I mumble against his neck, “Yes?” he responds back softly. “So…you are King Jinheung? Do I address you as that? Or Sam Maek Jong? Or Ji Dwi?” He nuzzles his nose against mine, “You can call me Jagi.” I smile as I hear a slight gagging sound come from Seyeo who lagged behind by a few steps. “I like that…Jagi?” “What is it (Y/n)?” “I’m getting sleepy,” I mumble with closing eyes, “Be good for me, keep your eyes open just a little longer okay?” I nod quietly, forcing my heavy eyes to open just a crack, “Okay for you.”

Shortly like he said we finally made it back to the Hwarang house. Seyeo insisted that Ah Ro treated me first but it was evident to everyone in the room that he was bleeding out quickly, so much to his protests Ah Ro treated him first while Sam Maek Jong combed his fingers through my hair soothingly while I waited for my turn. When Seyeo was all patched up Ah Ro smiled at me and brought her kit over to where I sat. “Alright time for you guys to leave, she needs to strip of her clothes.” Seyeo gets up obediently when I nod for him to be dismissed however Sam Maek Jong was more reluctant to. “It’s alright, you can go I’ll be okay,” I assure him with a small nod and he shakes his head, stubbornly continuing to be planted onto the floor. I turn towards Ah Ro and shrugged in which she glares up at Sam Maek Jong and she shakes her head disapprovingly, “Ah no such respect for a woman’s privacy. Who raised you? Aish!” I quietly snicker at her bad mouthing the King of Silla, if she only knew whom she was lecturing at. “You’ll need to completely take off your top,” Ah Ro says and I nod untying the belt of my hanbok. She gently peels the blood soaked fabric from my skin and I cringed as I hear her sucking in her breath when the wounds were revealed. “Is it really bad?” I ask with squeezed shut eyes, the only response I got was Sam Maek Jong patting my head softly as he pulls me into his lap. “Ah okay! Let’s…start…somewhere…” Ah Ro mumbles fumbling with her tools. She begins by wiping at the cuts with a wet towel and I accidently whimpered out loud causing her to stop in shock. “I’m so sorry it’s going to get worse from here…” she confessed placing a soft warm hand on my shoulder in which I nod to, “Y-Yeah it’s okay. Please continue Ah Ro.” She nods with her lips pulled into a tight line. I slowly look up at Sam Maek Jong and his eyes never left my scar littered back until I slipped a hand into his and gave it a tight squeeze. His warm chocolate orbs met mine and he pulls me flush against his chest despite my nudeness. “I’m going to start stitching up the deeper cuts okay Princess (Y/n)?” I nervously nod and squeezed his hand tighter. In response he combs his fingers through my sweat soaked hair trying to soothe my pain, “Keep your eyes on me, okay?” I nod again whimpering as I felt the needle sink into the skin of my back. He coos encouraging words to me, but by the fourth stitch I started to feel even more faint. I squeezed onto Sam Maek Jong’s hand tighter if that was even physically possible. I was grateful that he didn’t seem to mind too much that the circulation in his hand has stopped completely. He continues to stroke my hair in comfort as Ah Ro tried her best to be as gentle and as quick as possible. The ringing in my ears got louder, and I knew I was going to pass out soon due to the pain, and ultimately the feeling of safety made my adrenaline run dry, draining my body of energy. I didn’t realize I broke my promise to Sam Maek Jong of staying awake until I slipped into the darkness.

“You’re awake,” A low voice calls out. I blink away my blurry vision until I see my favourite person hovering above me. “Ji Dwi?” I mumble, from underneath the covers. “Ji Dwi?” He inquires with a raised brow and I gave him a questioning look in response. His lips pull into a firm line, “You don’t remember what happened yesterday?” I purse my lips, racking my brain for anything important that I might’ve forgotten and alas everything flooded into my head. I throw a hand onto my forehead due to the overwhelming rush of thoughts that I whacked myself on my head injury. He chuckles, “What will I do with you, you idiot?” I shrug with more caution to the stitches in my back, I was definitely not prepared to go back for more stitches anytime soon. A cute shy smile tugs at his lips and he leans down to press them against mine. Mustering up some strength, I raised my hand from under the cover so that I could cup his cheek. He closes his eyes peacefully and leans into my touch causing me to smile. “I’m at war with myself,” the male confesses under his breath. I almost laughed at the ridiculousness of that if it weren’t for the uneasy expression on his usually stoic face. I frown pinching his cheek gently, “Why?” He cracks open his tear brimmed eyes and tried for a smile, however it wasn’t very convincing due to the wavering. “Are you safest by my side or back home in Goguryeo?” His shoulders started to shake and quickly his tears bubbled over and streamed down his face. Using the pad of my thumb I caress his tears away, in which he expresses his gratitude by pressing his lips against my wrist. I take in a deep breath and smile up at him, “I think you know the answer to that,” he nods closing his eyes again and I giggle, “And I’m sure you also know my thoughts on that as well.” “I know, and it worries me that you would rather be by my side than be safe,” he groans in annoyance. “Even though being back home would be the logical choice, I feel safest by your side, Sam Maek Jong. And nothing can change that.” I took the opportunity of his shock to wrap my arms around his neck so that I could pull him into a hug, “I love you, and nothing can change that either.” Sam Maek Jong cups my cheek as I did to him earlier and brings himself down to gently plant a kiss onto my lips. He pulls back with a soft smile, “I love you most, and nothing will ever change that either. If you will have me, I wish for you to be at my side every step of the way.” I smile, “I wouldn’t have it any other way.”

*Mild smut warning*

Sam Maek Jong returns my smile and sits up right, “I almost forgot why I am in here.” He sighs and starts to pull down my covers, it was then that I realized that I wore nothing but a pair of loose pants and bandages around my chest. Sam Maek Jong shuffles closer to me and pulls me up into a sitting position as well. Even though he was extremely gentle I could feel the stitches pulling at the swollen skin. Sucking in a sharp breath I could feel the tugging of the broken skin as he starts peeling away the bandages from the sticky wounds. “I need to change your bandages okay?” As he unravels the bandages I stared to feel bashful, even though the situation was nothing but innocent I couldn’t help but feel shy as I become more naked by the second in front of him. As the bandages fell away from confining my breasts I hug my front to shield them away from Sam Maek Jong. “Why are you embarrassed? It’s not like it’s my first time seeing you naked. This is my…hmm…third actually,” he nods almost as if he was content with himself, “When I saved you from my mother, when you got your stitches, and today.” “Sam Maek Jong!” I gasp turning around to slap him. He flashes me a sly smile, evading my hit with much experience. “Hold still for me, my Princess,” he coos ringing out the warm wet towel to blot clean the wounds. I hated being addressed as Princess or any title of royalty but whenever those titles left his perfectly plump lips I knew he was teasing and it made me feel strange. Like a warm feeling pools in the lower portion of my stomach and I didn’t know how to deal with such new and foreign emotions. He pulls away the wet cloth and to my surprise replaces the lingering touches with his plump lips. I gasp at the new sensation of his soft wet lips trailing up and down my back. “W…What are you doing?” I whimper as his hands snake around to my front to cup my breast. He gives them a light but firm squeeze causing a moan to escape my lips. I could feel him smirking against my back. The male sits up right and pulls my back flush against his front. He leans forward so that his long hair tickled my bare skin, dipping his head into my neck where he suckled the skin gently. I groan, bringing my hands to cup his that continued to fondle my breasts, “What got into you?” I whimper with swallow breathes in between each word. Sam Maek Jong chuckles deeply and I could feel the rumble against my back, “Sorry, I got a little carried away,” he chuckles again and I blush meeting his dark gaze. “Forgive me,” his breath fans over my face as he nears closer to mine. I watch him carefully with hooded eyes, a small smile was fixated onto his features and he presses his lips against my partially agape mouth. He pulls back slightly before quickly diving back in with such passion and force I accidently let out a whimper of pain. “Sorry, we shouldn’t be doing this until you are completely healed,” he apologizes, pulling away with a pout. I frown evidently more upset than he was and he completely knew that as he lets out a chuckle. He gives my breast a final squeeze earning him a lewd mewl in which he smirks at. “If you continue to make such cute sounds I won’t be able to control myself,” he warns and I nod shyly, covering my face with my hands, “Sorry.” He hums as his way of accepting my lame apology while he bandages me back up with no funny business of any sorts. “Although you did start it,” I breathe under my breath. “What was that?” He raises a brow and I grin, “You heard me, my King.” He rolls his eyes, which was a reoccurring habit that he had whenever he was teased, frustrated but not frustrated enough to have a verbal or physical smack down with whoever was unlucky enough to be on the receiving end of his hot headed temper. “You are honestly testing me,” he sighs getting up from his seated position, “I’ll be back with something for you to eat.” I shake my head causing him to raise a brow, I pull onto the sleeve of his hanbok as I carefully lower myself back into the soft warm mattress. “I’m not hungry…can you just stay here with me while I rest?” He smiles softly, “Of course.” Sam Maek Jong lowers himself from his seated position and slipped under the sheets joining me. He pulls me close to his body and I sighed contently. It was very warm and overall very relaxing due to the security his presence always provided without fail for me. The silence was definitely comfortable but I couldn’t stop myself from asking him this, “Were you ever going to tell me that you were the King?” He raises his head so that he faced me, “Of course, I just couldn’t find the right time to tell you,” he confesses with knit brows, worry evident on his features. “I just…thought that you didn’t trust me or something,” I timidly giggle. “That’s stupid though,” he nods with a chuckle of his own, “That is really stupid.” I raise a brow for him to continue, in which he does with a grin, “I trust you more than I trust myself. If you told me to close my eyes and walk blindly into war I would, because you told me so.” I slap him playfully on the shoulder, “Now don’t you get dumb on me. There’s only enough room for one of us to make bad choices and that’s me, got it?” “Wouldn’t it be more fun if both of us made bad decisions together?” At the proposal I mock ponder for a second, “Then I would really have to rethink of our marriage. If we are to rule both Silla and Goguryeo it would definitely be trouble.” Sam Maek Jong nods in agreement, “We will keep each other grounded. And stop each other from making bad choices. But I assume that would be you making the choices and I would be there saving you from them.” I gasp offended, just slightly, I push him over onto his back and I sat on his stomach victoriously. “I would be protecting you from all those elites who want you dead. I would chop them down.” He chuckles at that, “Don’t be silly. You are a peaceful soul. You won’t harm a fly.” Using my index finger I boop his nose lovingly, “I will do anything to protect my man!” “You are the cutest,” he says breathlessly, pulling me into a kiss.

We spent most of the morning like that, snuggled into each other and enjoying the quiet blissfulness it had to offer after yesterday’s eventful evening. I was curled on my side with his warm chest pressed softly against my back. His arms wrapped around my waist and his chin was propped on top of my head comfortably. I really wondered how I ever slept peacefully without him by my side. I didn’t want to scare him away, so I didn’t vocalize this but I was extremely excited for the day we would get married so that I could start and end my day like this in his arms. He softly hums, the soft rumble in his chest resonated into my back, “I look forward to having this everyday once we get married.” The man had no shame and was so blunt about his feelings I really didn’t know how to handle it. The blood rushes to my cheeks, a rather reoccurring thing that happened whenever anything leaves his mouth. I stutter shyly, “I was just thinking the same thing.” Sam Maek Jong shifted from his lying down position, “Oh? We are soul mates aren’t we?” he cheekily grins gazing into my eyes. I bite my lip, trying to hide an enormous bashful smile, “Stop saying those things Maek Jong…” “Why are you getting shy when I only speak of the truth?” He teases causing me to playfully slap him upside the head, “Sam Maek Jong!” He hums with closed eyes, “I love it when you say my name. I wonder how I’ll react when you start calling me King Jinheung.” His dotting behaviour was too much to handle right in the morning, I groan shoving him off of me, “What are you? A pervert?” He ponders hard for a minute with knit brows and pursed lips, “Yes. Just a little bit though,” he confesses with a bright grin that showed off his pearly white teeth. “What have I gotten myself into?” I mutter under my breath, and much to my dismay he had extremely good hearing, “Marriage to the said pervert.” “Aish! Okay I had enough of you,” I exclaim getting up from under the covers. Sam Maek Jong pouts and rolls onto his back, “Where are you going?” I stare at him dead in the eyes, “Back to Goguryeo.” He sits up quickly with wide eyes and a gaping mouth. I roll my eyes at his reaction, “Don’t be stupid, I’m just kidding. Sword practice is going to start soon.” He lets out a sigh, “Of course I knew that,” he says rolling his eyes but I could see the relief washed over his features, “also you should be resting,” he adds. I smile picking out a clean hanbok to wear, “I’m alright, besides I need to help Han Sung.” He gets up from the mattress and walks over to across the room to where I stood skimming through my pile of clothes. “No you aren’t,” he says stubbornly pulling me into his chest as he rests his chin atop of my shoulder. “He needs the help,” I explain looking over my shoulder into his huge doe eyes, “Besides I promised him, and I’m fine. It’s just a flesh wound.” He chuckles lightly, “You aren’t fooling anyone, come on.”

He wrapped his arm around my waist and pulled me along to practice where Seyeo was already standing under our usual shaded spot. He quickly made his way towards us and instantly pulled me into his chest, “Why aren’t you resting?” he mumbles into my hair. I scoff, “Why aren’t you resting? You’re the one who got impaled.” Seyeo sarcastically laughed and rolled his shoulder, “I’m fine. Let’s get you settled down,” he suggests planting a soft kiss on my forehead. Sam Maek Jong clears his throat, catching my attention. “Oh you’re still here,” I muse causing him to roll his eyes. He quickly dips down to my height and presses his lips firmly against mine as his hand held the back of my head. I started to get flustered as whistles and hollers erupted from the Hwarang who watched the scene unfold. “Oh gosh…” I mumble covering my face missing the sly smirk he flashed to Seyeo who just rolled his eyes in return. “Okay just go to practice you!” I scold shoving Maek Jong towards the rest of the men who already had their swords in hand.

“So you got the hots for the King huh?” Seyeo teases breaking the comfortable silence. “And you were dumb enough to get kidnapped huh?” I poke back. He sighs, rolling his shoulder, which was obviously causing him discomfort much to his denial. “In my defense I was easily taken because they told me that they had you.” I raise a brow at that, “Really?” Seyeo smiles softly and ruffles my hair, “Well duh. How else would they have gotten me to go anywhere against my will without a trail of dead bodies?” I giggle at his statement which made absolute sense. Of course they blackmailed him, he has easily one of the best swordmen I’ve ever seen in my (y/age) years of living. “Also it’s my job to care for you and to protect you, so no need to give me a lecture saying that I don’t have to put my life on the line to protect you. Because I actually do, not that I’m complaining though,” he adds with a gentle assuring smile, “But who would’ve thought that he was the King.” I laugh along with him, “I know right? I never thought that this trip would actually succeed in its purpose. I came here to marry the King and apparently I really am. And I’m actually really excited.” Seyeo smirks, “It’s even more amusing seeing before this trip you had no intention of marrying anybody, instead using this trip as some sort of vacation. And not only that, you accused the King to be some huge stuck up jerk with, I quote, not a silver spoon, but a huge gold spoon about the size of a ladle to be so stuck up his ass that you can see it exiting from his mo-” “Okay!” I interrupt smacking his injured shoulder, effectively shutting him up instantly. “I wonder how this will all pan out though, seeing that his mother wants me dead and half the nobles want him dead.” “It’ll work out.” “I really hope he doesn’t die though. Apparently that ‘battle to the death’ thing is really going to happen.” “It’ll work out.” “I’m-” “It’ll work out, now shut up and stop over stressing.”

Like promised, Sam Maek Jong helped Han Sung in his training which he was super excited about. So excited that Han Sung ran over to tell me the great news, “I heard you aren’t feeling too well so Ji Dwi will be helping me out today! If you are sick you should go see Ah Ro! She’s very good and kind. Oh and I knew it!” Han Sung exclaimed pausing to pull my hands into his chest, “You like Ji Dwi! Is it because of his beautiful glittery eyes or his charming smile?” he adds batting his eyelashes cutely. “Aish! Just go train Han Sung!” I scold shoving him away playfully in which he flashes me a wide grin in return before hoping back to Sam Maek Jong.

“Thanks again for helping Han Sung with his training,” I say for the umpteen time that afternoon. Maek Jong smiles casually with a shrug, “It’s nothing really. It’s nice to see him finally improve.” “Right!?” I excitedly exclaim causing him to chuckle. He slips his hand into mine, intertwining his slender fingers with mine. “I sometimes wonder if you love Han Sung more than me,” he playfully pouts. I giggle at that, squeezing his hand tightly, “I love you, you dummy.” He leans down to press a chaste kiss onto my lips, “Is that anyway to speak to the King of Silla?” he teases pulling away with a smile. “Just because you are a King it doesn’t excuse you of being stupid,” I truthfully answer causing him to smile fondly. “I am so in love with you it’s quite embarrassing.” “It’s alright, you are always embarrassing yourself anyway. Picking fights with Sun Woo…occasionally Ban Ryu. And apparently Seyeo, wow you are on a roll huh?” He humours me with a blank expression, staring unmovingly into my eyes. Somewhere looking like a dead fish. “Alright I take it back! Just stop staring into my soul!” I dramatically exclaim with the back of my hand pressed against my temple for effect. Maek Jong pulls my arm away so that he held both of my hands in his. He leans forward, so close that our noses with practically touching, “I can see into your mind…and…I see nothing but emptiness!” “Wow!” I yell directly into his face causing him to flinch back, “Oh wait…I see something. A temper shorter than Ban Ryu’s!” I pulled back with a mock hurt expression in which he responds with a mock grimace himself, “That’s too much huh? No one has a shorter temper than Ban Ryu.” giggling at that I could’ve sworn I heard Ban Ryu sneeze in the distance.

Walking aimlessly we ended up back at our usual place, behind the Hwarang house and at the small lake. Being alone I finally managed to ask him about the worry that was nagging at my brain the entire day. “What’s going to happen tomorrow?” Tomorrow was the battle to the death event that Princess Sookmyung kindly put together, and for whatever that was going to go down tomorrow I don’t think I could ever be ready. Maek Jong paused in his steps and turned me to look up at him and he said what he always said, “It’s going to be fine,” he told me again. “I know,” I lied again. I couldn’t bear to watch the Hwarang put their lives on the line for nothing but shear entertainment of the royal family. “I don’t want anyone to get hurt,” I mumble and he nods in compassion. With tomorrow coming so soon he couldn’t find it in his heart to lie to me saying that no one was going to get hurt, instead he pulled me into a tight warm embrace.

Saying that I had a restless sleep was an understatement. I spent majority of the night pacing in Seyeo’s room complaining about everything and anything until he had enough and picked up his sword, “Okay that’s it. Let’s go fight this out of your system.” He always knew how to make me feel better. The harsh clacking of wood caused some of the Hwarang to wake up, considering if they could even sleep a wink with the events coming in the morning. “Sorry did we wake you up?” I asked stopping momentarily in our heated sword fight. Most of the group shook their heads, “We couldn’t sleep anyways,” admitted Han Sung. I smiled softly at him, combing his messy long tresses behind his ear. “Also you shouldn’t be moving Princess (Y/n), Ji Dwi said that you were feeling ill.” “That’s right,” Maek Jong interjected causing me to grin awkwardly. “Um it’s just that…I couldn’t sleep. I was worried about you…all of you actually,” the Hwarang stayed silent some with soft smiles adorning their lips, “I…whatever happens tomorrow…just do something you won’t regret. If you want to hold back your attacks do so, if you want to attack full force then by all means do so. Just don’t regret it and remember that this isn’t the real fight.” The air around us was physically buzzing, however I wasn’t sure if it was exactly comforting, it was just sparked and alive fueling the group of young men. “Everyone got that?” and a chorus of hollers erupted them, most likely waking up any of the remaining Hwarang that were actually sleeping, “Very well then, go back to your rooms and try to get some sleep. Whatever happens tomorrow I hope to see all your faces happy and well the following day. Dismissed.” Han Sung managed to beat Maek Jong in approaching me first, “Wow that was so cool!” he excitedly mused causing embarrassment to rush through my body. I didn’t know what got into me to be honest, I almost sounded like my mother when she was giving pep talks to our soldiers back home. “Get some sleep Han Sung,” I stutter shyly in which he nods, “Not before a kiss good night right?” “Wha!” I gasp in shock but before I could give a proper reply Seyeo threw his arm around Han Sung’s shoulder, “Of course not.” Seyeo jokingly kissed Han Sung on his cheek effectively causing the poor child to scream in disgust as he was dragged away back to his room by my always reliable royal guard and friend. “If that kid survives tomorrow I’m going to kill him myself,” Maek Jong breathes out in annoyance. I wasn’t sure if I wanted to laugh or scold him so I did both simultaneously, most likely coming off looking like a crazy person. “Let’s get you some rest, I’ll tuck you in my Princess.” I blush with a small nod. Even though it was his big day tomorrow here he was spoiling me like usual.

“You know if it’s too much for you, you don’t need to come tomorrow to watch it,” Maek Jong softly says caressing my cheek. I look up at him from my lying position as he sat comfortably beside me. “No it’s alright. I’ll watch, I need to be there if things get out of hand.” He was quiet for a moment before speaking up again, “My mother will be there.” I nod knowingly, “I’m aware.” “Aren’t you scared?” The corners of my lips pull into a small smile as I lean up to press them softly against his, “There’s nothing to be scared of when you’re here.” He reciprocated my smile and gently brought me into another kiss, “That’s right my Princess.” He looked into my eyes with his warm brown ones and continued to stroke his long slender fingers through my hair. “And don’t forget that I’m perfectly capable of taking care of myself,” I add resulting him to chuckle. “How could I ever forget? Sometimes I feel like you are more capable of protecting me than I am of you.”

I reach out to cup his cheeks, bringing him closer. His broad chest was flush against mine as I gave him a longer kiss. He softly massages his lips against mine as his hand skims down my waist and into the knot of my flimsy nightwear. A soft moan escapes my lips when I felt his cold digits teasingly scratch at my stomach, travelling lower and lower, “Maek Jong…” I breathe. He chuckles deeply, connecting our lips again before reluctantly pulling away. I frown at the lost of contact and he mockingly pouts as well with a shake of his head. “Be good for me, I can’t control myself if you keep being so cute (Y/n).” I sit up with a soft groan to grab his hand, “Then don’t control yourself…” “(Y/n)…” Maek Jong groans with a small shy smile, “You are hurt, this can wait until you are better.” I cast my gaze down still holding his hand tightly and he knew what was bothering me instantly. “I’ll be okay, trust me. I’ll be extra careful to make sure that my, you know, doesn’t get damaged in the fight,” he chuckles and I couldn’t help but to giggle along with him. “Even if I end up losing both of my hands tomorrow I’ll find a way to pleasu-” “Okay!” I cut him off as all the blood in my body rushed to my cheeks, “Okay…I got it…” I timidly smile at my lap, “You’re such a pervert you know that?” He hums kissing the back of my hand, “Try to get some sleep, I’ll see you in the morning alright?” I nod watching him get up. He pauses by my door before turning around to flash me a smile.

I managed to sleep for a few hours before the sun seeped into my room. And right on cue a knock was heard on the wood of the thin paper door. “(Y/n), you should go visit Ah Ro to get your bandages changed before it starts.” I sit up with much less difficulty compared to yesterday, “Okay, thank you Seyeo.” I look at the stash of clothes I packed and I couldn’t decide which one to wear on this eventful day. I usually wore black or dark colours but I feel like it would be too ominous, and with that, it cancels out half of the clothes I brought. White feels the same, red could symbolize blood…and that left me with the last hanbok I had in my pile, a soft pink one. I didn’t remember packing this or even owning such a hanbok at all…so probably mother snuck this in. I smile, stripping myself of my silky white nightwear to envelop myself with the soft material. I don’t know if this was at all possible just by the clothes I had on my back, but I felt like a good omen.

Walking out of my temporary room I see Seyeo at his usual spot in the morning, leaning on the pillar closest to my door. He raises a brow with folded arms across his chest, “Well that’s new…and quite refreshing actually.” I slap his arm, I would like to say gently but that was never the case with Seyeo, “Is that what I get for getting that for you?” he asks rubbing his arm and I look up at him dumbfounded, “You got this for me?” “Are you stupid? Was it there for the past few weeks? I got it made for you considering what’s happening today. I doubt you would want to wear what you usually wore since it screams funeral,” he adds indifferently as if he didn’t just go through the trouble in getting me new clothes just to make me feel better. I pull him into a tight hug, “Thank you.”

With Seyeo by my side walking from Ah Ro’s office and into the tournament was a lot more bearable. Before walking up in the viewing area I tried my best to delay that and Seyeo noticed it too. So he suggested that I went to wish the Hwarang good luck. “Are you sure? Wouldn’t everyone be watching?” I ask quietly in which he shrugs, “Then give them something to look at. These sickos are here to watch these guys shed blood for entertainment. I wouldn’t care much of what they think.” I grin, that’s my best friend right here. Pursing my lips I nod slowly, “Yeah I think I’ll go do that.” I jog up to the Hwarang and enveloped the closest one I could get my hands on. “Good luck!”

By the tenth Hwarang I finally reached Maek Jong, and I lost my ability to speak. He smiles warmly and pulls me into a hug, “You look different,” he says pulling away and I nod, “I’m wearing pink! It’s a good omen!” I blurt out in a frenzy causing him to chuckle, “Alright, alright, go wish Han Sung good luck before he explodes.” “Okay...see you after? In one whole piece?” “Of course, and I’m keeping my promise, I will protect my…” “Aish! I don’t want to hear it! Bye Ji Dwi!” I could feel his gaze on me as I walked away to see Han Sung who huddled in the corner of the field with his brother close by his side. I nod at his brother who returns the gesture before I focused on Han Sung, “How are you feeling?” He pouts pulling me into a tight hug, “I’m kind of scared.” I pat his head gently, “It’s normal to be scared, just don’t freeze up during the fight okay?” He nods against my shoulder and I pat his back before puling away. “I’ve seen you improve with my very own eyes. You’ll be just fine.” He nods with a wavering smile, if something were to happen to him today god have mercy, I will tear this place apart. I lean up to place a quick chaste kiss onto his cheek, “For good luck,” I pull away again with a smile and he nods enthusiastically with a bright boxy smile of his own. Suddenly the gate doors opened and entered the Queen, signalling for the tournament to finally start. My heart hammered against my ribcage but thankfully Seyeo was there to place a hand on my arm pulling me along towards the seating area. He practically had to drag me up the steep set of stairs as my legs started to feel like lead, “Get a hold of yourself,” Seyeo whispers in my ear and it finally snapped me out of my daze.

I walked up to the seated Queen and I bowed, “Your majesty.” I look up from my long lashes to see her curtly nod, “Princess (Y/n), take a seat here beside me.” The request was a bit nerve racking considering that her own daughter was seated a fair distance from her and how I was to be seated a little too close to her for my own comfort. But nonetheless I nodded with a smile, “It would be an honour to, your majesty.” I slowly lower myself on the hard wooden chair with only slight discomfort as the ridges in the slats of the backrest started to dig into the closing wounds. The Queen leans towards me and looks straight into my eyes with a small knowing smile, “Does it hurt?” Of course she wanted me to sit right beside her and on this chair of all the damn chairs in Silla, the detailing in the backrest was protruding into next week for reason but for aesthetics and for my discomfort apparently. “Why would it hurt?” I politely ask leaning further into the chair with a smile of my own. The sour expression doesn’t leave her expression as she leans back into her own, much more comfortable looking I must add, chair as she nods, “Good.” Seyeo stood closely behind me as his hand gently rests on my shoulder comfortingly before returning to his side.

When the tournament started I wasn’t at all fazed of what went down. The Hwarang refused to go through with a proper fight. I bit my lip refraining from grinning proudly as Soo Ho and Ban Ryu, the two who were constantly at each other’s throats refused to harm one another. What fazed me was that Princess Soomyung stood up in anger and shouted for blood to be spilt. That’s when one of the elders suggested that his personal swordsmen should join in the fight against the Hwarang since they refused to hurt each other. And of course, it had to be “to the death” with these people. My gaze wandered over to Han Sung’s shocked but evidently terrified face before it travelled over to Sam Maek Jong who was having some intensive staring contest with his mother. I should’ve spoken up but the hand on my shoulder stopped me from acting brashly. “I get to choose the Hwarang,” says the elder who I recognized to be Ban Ryu’s step father, also known as the key player to trying to get the King out of the picture. I then looked over to the Queen who had her lips pulled into a thin line, “Alright.”

My heart hammered violently as I watched the set up of the field change, and to my surprise Sam Maek Jong wasn’t called out. Instead it was Ah Ro’s brother, Sun Woo. I furrow my eyebrows together in thought as I realized what had happened. The Queen has been using Sun Woo as a coy for Maek Jong to be safe. Although evidently the love of my life would be safe I couldn’t help but feel anger coursing through my veins as an innocent had to play bait. Sun Woo stood in the middle with the swordsmen, ready for the fight to commence. “But, do you know what would be even more entertaining?” The Queen began and the elder raised a brow. “To show the Hwarang that a fight means a fight, there is no holding back no matter who you are.” I couldn’t follow along her proposal until I realized that I was being dragged to replace Sun Woo.

I could barely process the events flying by before my very eyes until I stood right in front of the swordsman. I guess the Queen really wanted to get rid of me by the end of this week. I stretch out my back and I could feel the stitches starting to tug at the swollen skin, the Queen is smart I’ll give her that. If my health was at its peak, practically nothing could take me down but considering that I almost died a day ago I didn’t see any good chances that I would make out of this “life or death” showdown. Seyeo stood beside me and unsheathed my two swords at his hip, all the while casting a worried gaze my way. “Don’t forget your morals, but also don’t forget your own safety.” Basically summarizing that I shouldn’t go full out crazy and kill the poor swordsman but instead try to make peace and parry the blows. I frown looking up at the swordsman who’s face was void of any emotions, then to the left where Han Sung held a concerned expression, and Maek Jong who held an even more concerned one. I tap the floor with one of my swords, gaining his attention. “It’s okay,” I mouth and he nods. He was trying to be nonchalant about everything but I could see the stress and worry etching across his usual poker face. The Queen’s loud voice booms across the courtyard, “Hwarang! When I ask you to fight you fight. I don’t care who you are or who your parents are. Take example of (Y/n) who will fight to the death because I said so.” I swallow thickly and tightened my grip on my swords.

A gong suddenly echoes into the deathly silent air, signalling for the fight to start. Almost immediately the chosen swordsman lunged forward with his blade. Taken aback slightly by his quick advance I barely dodged the blade as it skimmed across my ribs. The familiar trickle of warmth filled me as I rolled my wrist that held the offense sword. Okay, focus (Y/n), one sword offensive and one sword defense. Advancing quickly, I used the technique that always worked, keep pushing the pace with light swings until your opponent gets tired and deliver the final strike. The only difference today was the uncomfortable tight tugging felt on my entire back with each swing I made. His stamina was no doubt impeccable, but so was mine. Once he lost his rhythm slightly, I wasted no time to let out a frustrated cry, lunging at him. As the sword neared his neck I flipped the blade causing the cool blunt edge to glide across his throbbing jugular. The swordsman drops his sword and gazes upon the ground in defeat. I remove the blade from his neck and dropped both of the swords in my hands. Walking over to the hunched over male, I bent down to pick up his discarded blade before holding it out for him to accept. “I don’t believe in killing for entertainment. So I’m sorry to disappoint,” I announced while moving my gaze from the man to the royal audience above, “However, it is obvious that this man would’ve been dead if I followed through. Which means theoretically, there is no opponent for the Hwarang to fight, so that concludes the tournament.” I couldn’t help the cocky grin from spreading across my face as I watched the Queen’s stoic gaze ever so slightly crack. After basking in the hard earned victory of the Queen’s little game I turn towards the group of Hwarang with a nod. “You’ve done well today, take the remainder of the day off to spend time with your families or go treat yourselves at the Okta!” The familiar hollers resonated throughout the Hwarang house as they made a break to freedom. But unsurprisingly a few of the men lagged behind. “That was so cool!” Han Sung practically swoons before engulfing me in a tight embrace. “I’m glad you thought so! Aren’t you relived that you didn’t have to fight?” I tease nudging him in the side causing him to childishly giggle, “Yeah! Thank you Princess (Y/n) for taking one for the team!” I roll my eyes with a shy smile, “Yeah, yeah, I know. Now run along kid.” He pouts, “I’m not a kid! I’m a grown man!” he whines but obediently runs back to his older brother who stood nearby. I sigh with a smile as I turn towards Maek Jong who stood there with a small smile himself. I took a step towards him but I didn’t get far before an extremely worried Seyeo threw himself in front of my line of vision, completely blocking Maek Jong from my view. I gasp in shock as he quickly pressed his hands on my cheeks, giving me a quick once over. He tilts my head side to side, back and forth, “Are you hurt in any way?” he inquires, repeating his examination. I shake my head and used my hand to swat his away, “I’m okay I’m okay! But my head is going to fall off if you don’t quit doing that!” He let’s out a big sigh, “Oh thank god. Okay you may proceed to see your husband.” I blush at his embarrassing ways, “Aishhh why must you tease me like this? He’s barely ten steps away! He could totally hear you, you idiot!” I scold as Seyeo casually whistles strutting away from the scene he caused. “Come here then my wife,” the smooth voice I’ve came to love teases, “Oh gosh not you too,” I mumble under my breath as I close the space between us. I stood right before him, I could feel the warmth radiating off from his body as it seeped into mine. “I’m glad you are okay,” he says holding me tightly against his chest. “I’m glad you are okay too,” I smile against his neck as his hold tightened. “If I didn’t respect your wishes, I would send you home in an instant. You aren’t safe here. At this rate you are a bigger target than me in Silla with my mother after you,” he grumbles against the crown of my head. I let out a quiet chuckle, “I know, but I’ll say this again. I can take care of myself.” Sam Maek Jong lets out a frustrated groan, “I know you can but I just want you to be safe. Always safe, and I want to take care of you okay?” I’m not sure if it was the heat, or the fact that we had this conversation multiple times already, but nonetheless it ticked me off. “I don’t need you to take care of me okay? I proved that today haven’t I?” I groan challenging his frustration. He sighs while shaking his head gently, “I’m well aware, my love. But isn’t it natural for one to wish an easy worry free life upon those they love?” I cast my gaze to the ground while pulling my bottom lip between my teeth, I felt bad for snapping at him. I nod in agreement as he plants a soft kiss against my forehead despite my skin being sticky from sweat. “I’m sorry for getting angry,” I mumble against his red Hwarang uniform. He chuckles light heartedly, “Nothing to be sorry about, if anything I am to apologize. You are strong, brave, and intelligent. And I am well aware of that but yet I still try to protect you from everything and hide you away. It’s obvious you can take on the world by yourself unlike someone like me, the face less king, who all he does is hide.” I knit my brows together in confusion while hearing out his self-degrading confession. I raise my hand to give him a good whack upside the head, he sucks in a sharp breath and I nod, “Aish that is the last time you say and think about such things okay? Next time I will hit you ten times harder!” Maek Jong nods rubbing his head, slightly dumbfounded by what happened in the short time frame. “We will work together from now on okay? No more hiding, we fight the battles we cannot avoid and give whenever possible. We will protect each other. And…besides I kind of like it when you want to protect me. I think it’s refreshing and very…alluring to say in the least.” He raises a brow cockily, “Oh?” I look up at him shyly, “Oh?” I echo and he smiles down warmly at me. “It seems that everything I do these days is suggestive to you, my Princess.” I roll my eyes, gently pushing him away, “You are testing me are you not?” He chuckles with a casual shrug.

After the tournament it has been a pretty relaxing week in the Hwarang house. So the recovery process was clean and fast, however the peace and quiet didn’t last long seeing that this is Silla after all. Baekje, another neighbouring Kingdom of Silla initiated war. With the Queen’s ruling there was a lot of poverty in the outskirts of the capital, forcing the citizens to hunt on Baekje’s land. If this happened on their other neighbouring Kingdom, Goguryeo, it would’ve been fine. Seeing that my Kingdom was rather peaceful and fruitful with the vast amount of land we were fortunate of ruling. However, it had to be on Baekje’s land, causing a whole uproar with the notorious Prince who practically was born from the bloodshed in a battlefield. Now this led to where we are today, in the present where volunteers are asked to accompany Princess Sook Myung as a peace offering tribute.

“I’m coming too!” I argue gripping onto the collar of Maek Jong’s hanbok, practically screaming at his face. He places his hand on top of mine and squeezes back softly, “No you’re not, we talked about this,” he hums patiently as my adrenaline ran high. Maek Jong chuckles quietly when he realized that my lower lip was trembling as I fought back the tears from overflowing, “Don’t go…” I choke. He leans down to give me a long and soft passionate kiss, “It’s my duty to go to make things right for Silla,” he says pulling back with a gentle smile adorning his lips. I shake my head childishly, biting my lip to keep the tears at bay, “No! It’s your duty to stay here, by my side where it’s safe. Where I can protect you.” He lets out a heavy sigh, gathering me into his arms, “Now that doesn’t sound like the Queen of Goguryeo I’ve grown to love.” He was right, the real me would tell him to hurry up and fight for what’s right, no running away, and protect his people with pride. Was it my emotions that are getting in the way of the possibility of never seeing him again? Or was it the fear I felt knowing that he is stepping up to the blood thirsty Prince of Baekje, and I wouldn’t be there by his side. “Go fight with pride and protect your people…” I trail off focusing on the floral patterns in the fabric of his hanbok, “It’s just that I’m worried. Seeing that you will be confronting the Prince of Baekje. You know how he is…” Sam Maek Jong caresses my cheek softly with the pad of his thumb, “Of course I know how he is, that’s why I can’t allow you to accompany me on this journey. He will cause bloodshed regardless of the situation and I don’t want your eyes to see such a thing. And importantly, he would want such a beautiful, strong, and intelligent girl like you, and I can’t have that. He can have my blood by not you, never, not even over my cold dead body.” He had a point, however I was famously stubborn and I had a point as well. “If I go... I can stop all of this without anyone getting hurt.” “Anyone but you, love. I will never let him lay a finger on you let alone look your way.”

With only three kingdoms making up our land, practically all royal families knew of each other, perhaps a little too well. The Prince of Baekje liked destroying things, especially living things. He would find much pleasure in breaking strong headed people into small submissive toys for him to play with. I knew that, Sam Maek Jong knew that, everyone knew that. If I went as a peace offering it would be without a doubt successful. No one would get hurt, besides just one person, me. But here was the peaceful soul that was Sam Maek Jong who would not even consider the proposal just to protect one person, rather than the greater good of his people. “Maek Jong…I can stop a war from ensuing. I can prevent hundreds upon hundreds of meaningless deaths.” He sighs shaking his head to clear his thoughts, “For you to breakdown because of someone like him, or anyone for that matter…I would rather have someone rip my arm out of its socket and beat me up with said arm than for you to endure anything of that sort. I can’t have him see you, because he will want you, and he search everywhere for you until he can have you and I can’t have that, I really can’t,” my heart hammers against my chest at his confession, “I also have an important job for you to do while I’m gone.” I nod for him to continue so he does, “I need you to go back to Goguryeo and inform your people about this. If Silla were to fall Goguryeo would be next.” He looks intently into my orbs for a moment before I nod, “Yes, understood.” No matter how selfish I wanted to be, if it were to put my people in danger I had to step up to fill the shoes my mother entrusted to me, that’s something he knew and I hated him for that. “I will prepare men to station along Silla,” I propose and he nods, “If you can that will be great, however I’m concerned that your men will question as to why they are protecting their neighbouring Kingdom instead of their own.” I chuckle at that, “Well we are to get married soon no? Should we not treat Silla and Goguryeo as one, my King?” His mouth opens slightly to only close again, he was at a loss of words it seems. Sam Maek Jong simply nods with a grin stretched across his beautiful features, “Yes of course, that is right my Queen.”

I understood my role, however I was still reluctant to leave his side, especially as I watched him pack his belongings for the three day long trip. It was great that he was finally stepping up to this royal title however, if it wasn’t for me…would he have been safe instead of taking on such roles to prove his worth? One promising thing out of this entire mess was that the Hwarang who volunteered to accompany Princess Sook Myung on this trip were the most talented individuals that caught my eye on the first day I stepped foot into the house. I woke up from my daze as Maek Jong plopped down beside me on my futon, “When are you setting out?” he softly asked. I tilt my head slightly so that I could gaze into his soft brown eyes, “In tomorrow’s time, shortly after seeing you good bye.” He chuckled deeply shaking his head, “This isn’t good bye, you know that.” No I didn’t know that for sure, and that’s what scares me. “Promise me you’ll come back,” I whisper as the corners of my eyes started to bubble with hot tears. He nods with a soft smile, “I promise to return to your side in a few days time (Y/n).” There it was, another lie. I smile up at him regardless and in turn he leans down to place a gentle kiss upon my lips. “Get some rest, it’s going to be a long ride back home tomorrow,” he suggests while getting up to retire to his room. He makes it to the sliding paper door but before he could exit I ran up to him and embraced him tightly from behind. “Don’t leave me.”

~NSFW kiddos~

I roughly turn him away from the door to face me and slipped my hand into the knot of his hanbok. I look up at him dumfounded as he laughed out loud, “Ahh you are too cute…” he sighs placing his hands on my hips as I groan, leaning up against him to give him a kiss, “It’s supposed to be sexy you idiot!” I whine as he hushes me while carding his long slender fingers through my silky locks, “I don’t think you are capable of that (Y/n), you are too adorable. “ Blood rushes to my cheeks at his flustering words, as I roughly slam him into the paper door causing the poor wood to creak. “Aishhh my Princess, you are so rough…do you want me to fall through this door and have everyone see and hear us?” he teases causing all my intentions of having him right here and now to fly out the breaking door. I frown turning around to make my way back to my futon. I plop down into the soft cushion and wrapped my blanket around myself ready to retire for the night. That annoyingly sweet chuckle of Maek Jong filled the room as he made his way towards my reclined form. He pulls the covers off my body as I whine in protest, “I’m sorry for teasing, come on my love,” he laughs as I giggle in response to his fingers dancing up and down my ribs. “That’s my girl,” he breathes as his fingers untie my hanbok, allowing the silky material to slip open. He hums peeling away the material open from my front causing a soft gasp to escape my lips as the cold night air bit at my exposed flesh. As my hanbok fell open I felt extremely bashful as Maek Jong’s eyes started to wander. I pulled my hanbok closed again causing him to smile, “Now you are feeling shy? After trying to strip me huh?” I playfully slap his bicep and he took this as an opportunity to pin both of my arms above my head. My heart hammers against my chest as a sweet smile sweeps across his face, “I’m going to mark you as mine.” I nod wanting every bit of him as his dominance took over. He guides my hands into his hanbok where it easily slipped through the loosening material, thanks to my eagerness earlier. I could feel his milky smooth skin beneath my fingertips as they ran up and down his toned front. His breath hitches in his throat when my nails accidently traveled a little too low and grazed the top of his pelvis. He smirks, shaking his head lightly, kissing the top of my head, “Let me take care of you first, okay?” I nod shyly while carefully watching him as he slips the fabric away from my body, leaving me completely naked and feeling slightly vulnerable being completely bare before his eyes. His eyes rake over my body and I bit my lip nervously a waiting for his reaction. “Mmm so beautiful,” he hums with a bright smile. I felt lightheaded with the amount of blood continuously rushing into my head in the past few minutes. “Do you want to stop?” he inquires and I instantly shake my head causing him to chuckle. “I…I’m just nervous is all,” I confess throwing an arm over my breasts. Maek Jong lets out an airy laugh and shakes his head with a smile. Instead of providing me with comforting words he swiftly strips himself of his own clothes instantly putting my nerves at ease seeing that he was completely bare for me to see as well. I gingerly lift my hand that was cupping my breast to touch his hot smooth skin causing a low rumble to erupt in his chest. His hand in return reaches out to knead my breast into his large palm. I let out a small cry as his lips met my other breast where he nibbled gently at my nipple before lightly suckling the bud into his mouth. The coolness of the night air mixed with his hot mouth latched onto my breast and his warm hands exploring my body caused endless shivers to run up my spine. I bashfully let out a lewd mewl as warmth filled my lower belly. The tension in my stomach grew as his long slender fingers rubbed at my core. I wasn’t entirely sure what was happening to my body but the new sensation was exciting. I sigh out his name encouraging him to continue which he willingly does. His wet kisses trail down my ribs, stomach, hips, and my thighs. A sharp gasp escapes my parted lips as his warm lips met with my core. “Maek Jong…” I cry out as I feel his wet appendage prod into my opening. He lets out an airy chuckle causing blissful vibrations to stimulate the sensitive region. I felt over stimulated with the amount of attention he gave me. One of his hands held my thigh down while his fingers rubbed circles into my skin soothingly, his other hand kept busy by teasingly prodding into the hot tight cavern while his mouth latched and suckled on my swollen bundle of nerves. I whined loudly before I could catch myself. Maek Jong, rather content with himself, pulled away with a smug grin. “Do you really want the entire Hwarang to hear, Princess?” I wasn’t sure what got into me, but the spark of confidence he gave me when his head was between my legs allowed me to say such lecherous words, “It’s Queen to you, and did I give you permission to stop?” I barely had time to cringe at my statement before Maek Jong slides his slender fingers out of me and into his mouth all the while maintaining eye contact. He pulls his index and middle finger away from his mouth with a pop and he grins, “A King does what he wants no?” I gasp, not from his sexual innuendos however. I sit up to face him directly, “Excuse me?” his orbs suddenly widened and his mouth gapped as his hands waved around the air frantically, “I-I’m just kidding! I was just talking dirty jagiya...and you ruined the mood.” “Oh,” I bashfully add causing him to roll his eyes with a smile, “Oh,” he mocks earning him a well deserved smack on his head. His smile never wavered but the atmosphere thickened once again as he lowers me back onto the futon with himself hovering above my frame. “I’ll make it up to you,” he huskily states, burying his nose into the crook of my neck. “Just…do it already!” I say rather impatiently making him let out a cute breathy chuckle, “Do what?” I couldn’t believe he’s making me ask for it. I stared at him with a raised brow and he blinked innocently in response, reluctantly with a blush I shyly mumble, “Y-You inside of me.” I could literally slap a gayageum into my face and kill myself right here and now. Sam Maek Jong couldn’t just put me out of my misery, instead he pretends to ponder about the sit\uation, “You need to be more specific jagiya.” I roll my eyes with flushed cheeks, “Of course I mean your-” I cut myself short when my eyes started to wander and they just so happened to land on his tall standing member. My gapping mouth twitched, I can’t believe I didn’t notice until now how large he was. Taking no opportunity to miss he strokes his thick girth of his length with a low groan. His thumb smears the pre cum beading at its tip along the throbbing vein running underneath his erection. My heart hammered against my ribs as I watch him guide his member near my opening. I eagerly spread my legs wider for him and he delivers. Rubbing the soft skin of his erection’s head along my slit lubricated the tip allowing him to teasingly prod in and out. Whining impatiently at the growing and dissipating coil in my stomach I clutched onto his shoulder doing the last thing I ever thought I would do, beg. “Please, please just put it in!” I hiss causing him to smirk. My eyes roll back as he pushes his thick length in, stretching and filling my core. He moves his hips slightly causing a sharp gasp of pain to leave my lips, he leans down slowly to place a kiss on my sweaty forehead. “Ah I’m sorry my Princess,” he coos placing another kiss on my nose. He stays still, comfortingly rubbing patterns into my hips with his fingers while he waits for my body to get used to him. After a few moments I squeeze his bicep signalling him to start moving. He kisses me again before pulling out slowly and thrusting his hips back, the feeling was much more enjoyable as my body adjusted to his size. I let out a soft moan raking my fingernails along his back to encourage him to continue. He rocks his pelvis against mine rhythmically building up the tension in my lower belly to coil once again. Breathing seemed to get more difficult as his pace quickened to the point where the sound of skin slapping against each other filled the room. I started to pant as his thrusts came more irregular and more desperate, clawing at his broad back as he slammed his hips relentlessly into mine. His name stringed with a fury of incoherent cries left my parted lips as my body shuddered against his. The creaking of the floorboards was utterly shameful but that didn’t slow down his thrusts. The coil in my stomach reached its limits feeling his erection twitch inside. I clench my walls around his length while my thighs hug tightly around his waist. “I’m not going to last…” I pant lightheadedly and he nods burying his face into the crook of my neck where he bites and sucks the skin harshly as if he was desperate for one more touch. He lets out his own breathy cries when the clenching mixed with my own thrusts that met his got too much for him to bear. With a loud moan he pulls out quickly before he could release within me. “T-That was close…” he pants as small starting squirts of hot liquid met my inner thigh. Hastily I grabbed his member and guided him back into me. “What are you doing?” he cries out in surprise as I pull him on top of me once more. “If…if tomorrow is the last time I see you…I want this,” I confess watching his confusion turn into admiration when he finally understood. He nods, picking up from where he left off until his high was met again. He groans out my name spilling his hot seed within me. My arms move to wrap around his chest allowing me to hug him inhumanely tightly while he rode out his orgasm. I was so close to finishing so I was slightly disappointed that it ended so soon. “We aren’t done yet Princess,” Maek Jong pants with a sloppy grin. His fingers found my bud of sensitive nerves working his index and middle finger relentlessly, speeding up my high exponentially. He watches my expression intently as I felt over stimulated. My eyes roll back and my walls clamped around him as I came mixing my warm fluids with his all the while his name left my lips at volumes that I’m sure everyone in the Hwarang house heard. Sam Maek Jong lets out an airy laugh at my dishevelled state, I gaze up at him with unfocused vision as he pulls slowly pulls out allowing his sticky warm seed to dribble out and onto the futon. “Ahh what a mess,” he chimes disappearing from my line of vision. Before I could sit up to see where he left to I felt his familiar soft warm lips on my core where he places butterfly kisses up along my slit to the swollen bundle of nerves. “Maek Jong…” I whine reaching out with grabby hands. He chuckles vibrating my womanhood one final time before pulling away to lie down beside me. I brush away his long silky hair that surprisingly failed to get dishevelled from his face. I giggle placing a kiss on his cheek causing a bright cheeky smile to bloom across his face. I snuggle against him resting my head flush against his neck while I tangled my limbs with his. The air was sticky and thick with the smell of sex and sweat however it was pleasant knowing that it was the result of lovemaking. I also couldn’t be bothered that probably the entire house heard of our nightly activities, especially my next door neighbour Seyeo who would most likely give me an earful the following morning. I simply didn’t care, I was worried, terrified even with the events of tomorrow coming so fast as I bask in this moment.

~End of sexy time~

Shivers run up my spine as Maek Jong’s warm fingers rake across the healing scar tissue littered across my back. The night air was biting harshly tonight but I was glad that I had Maek Jong beside me to provide one more warm safe night where I could close my eyes without a single worry. “I love you,” I hum closing my heavy eyes. He chuckles kissing the crown of my head, “And I love you most.” With a tired airy laugh I embrace him tightly, “I’m going to miss you.” “I’ll be back before you know it,” he whispers against the top of my head. I pull back slightly so that I could face him and look into his eyes, “You promise?” “I wouldn’t leave you for the world,” he confesses with a smile, “Besides…if your little intention works out…I can’t leave our child either.” I shyly smile biting my lip as he easily read through me, “I just want a piece of you if you didn’t come back.” “To remember me by?” I shake my head hastily, “Of course not! I would never forget about you…it’s just that…it’s like a safe keeping.” His contagious eruption of giggles filled the room, “I’m just teasing, I know (Y/n)…” his smile suddenly disappears from his face and the air in the room turned almost bitter, “I’m going to miss you my love. Please take care of yourself…and everyone.” I shake my head with hot tears threatening to bubble over, “Stop talking as if you won’t make it back!” I yell hugging him tightly. He sighs, “I’m sorry, to be honest with you…I’m nervous about the coming events.” As much as I didn’t want to admit it, if there is any slight hiccup in the peace offering plan all hell will break loose and war will ensue, however not before the heads of the treaty group are sent back to Silla as a present to the Queen. I knew all too well about the reality of things but I had to stay positive, or others would call this being completely mad and in denial but I was never one to care about what others thought about me. “I’ll see you again. This isn’t good bye,” I choke out between sobs, “It can’t be good bye! I don’t want to live waiting for you each day to come back home but you never do!” Sam Maek Jong brushes away the matted hair covering my face so that he could get a good look at my violent crying that racked my entire body, “This isn’t like you (Y/n).” I balled up my fist, angry at his words, “For once let me be just (Y/n) the girl who is madly in love with you. I don’t want to be Queen if I don’t have you by my side!” I scream plummeting my fist against his bare chest. He catches my fist in his large palm, “I don’t want to lie to you. I don’t know what’s going to happen. But I need you to be strong and keep making this shitty world a better place. I need you to make things right if I fail tomorrow. I need you to fight and win the battle I couldn’t. I need you to never lose that fiery aura around you that burns everything in your quake. I need you to be alive.” I lie there in silence basking in his words and in the finality of them, as much as I hated to admit it he was right. “You are the Queen everyone has been waiting for, don’t let them down or me. But importantly, don’t let yourself down.”

The morning came too fast. I didn’t even realize that I fell asleep while listening to Maek Jong’s final words. I watch him from afar as he stood tall beside his horse, ready for departure at the gates. We haven’t exchanged any words since last night and I felt utterly speechless in saying one final good bye. Do I say good bye? Is that a bad omen do I say see you again? Or does that just completely ignores what he said yesterday? I snapped out of my internal war instantly when I heard Princess Sook Myung’s voice boom in the courtyard, “Let’s go!” No this can’t be it, not yet. I sprint up to him ignoring the dull ache in my hips with my sword clutched tightly in my hand. I take him my surprise as I threw my arms around his neck in a final desperate embrace. I pull back slightly embarrassed at the scene I caused, feeling all the eyes in the proximity to fall upon me. I cough to clear my throat, “Um here take this with you,” I murmur indifferently holding out my most prized possession before him. I close my eyes and held my head up high a huge attempt to hide how broken I felt inside. I only cracked open one eye slightly when his familiar chuckle that I’ve grown to love echoed in the courtyard. He takes my sword and straps it against his hip, once secured he casually asks “I’ll see you soon?” I roll my eyes, folding my arms across my chest, “I’ll see you if I see you, if I don’t then bye I guess,” I huff with puffed out cheeks. I catch a glimpse of his grin before he pulls me flush against his chest, “I love you,” he whispers against the shell of my ear. I wrap my arms around him tightly nodding as tears streamed down my face, “I love you.” With a final lingering kiss he left.

And he never came back.

Just kidding.

I sat at my throne back home in Goguryeo, it’s been almost a week since he left. And to say I was getting restless was an understatement. I groan flopping on side with one leg sticking up and over the arm rest while the other stayed planted on the ground. It was an unpleasant sight for anyone who walked into the throne room to witness but I could care less at the moment. Anytime today I would receive a letter from Sam Maek Jong, or not but I didn’t want to think about the latter. A familiar voice, a very very annoying voice I might add chimes in the large empty room. “Wow what an unpleasant sight.” “Shut up Seyeo, if you don’t have any good news regarding Maek Jong leave me alone,” I groan shaking my leg impatiently. “I leave you for a week and his is how you greet me? Really (Y/n)?” My eyes widen to unnatural sizes as I see the man I’ve been restlessly waiting for stand beside Seyeo who looked utterly done but the relief and happiness on his features was easy to spot. I literally rolled off my throne and flew down the set of stairs and into Maek Jong’s awaiting arms. “I’m sorry I took so long to get to you, I was supposed to send you a letter but I thought it would be a better surprise if I came here myself.” I was ecstatic but also extremely angry, “You made my wait for this?!” I yell hammering him in the chest with my fists. “Ahhh that’s my cue to leave,” Seyeo whistles indifferently striding out of the room as if nothing happened. Maek Jong chuckles, “I had some things to work out. I’m sorry for keeping you waiting my Princess,” he apologizes holding my hands. I tried to frown but I failed seeing how extremely happy I was at the moment, “Well it better be for a very good reason!” He laughs, “I worked everything out with Mother. I’m officially King of Silla and I’m here to ask for your hand in marriage as I’ve seem to have gotten her blessing as well. Is that good enough of a reason for keeping you waiting?” My mouth hanged open like a dead fish, there was no other way to describe it. I gapped for a bit while his grin never wavered. After a long moment of silence I finally answered, “Yeah okay I guess.” “Yeah okay I guess I went through all that trouble for such a reaction,” he teases hugging me tightly to his chest. “Yeah okay I guess,” I hum mockingly in which he says, “Yeah okay I guess that’s okay since I love you.” I smile against his shoulder embracing him just as tightly, “Yeah okay.”

End.

#hwarang #hwarang the beginning #hwarang the poet warrior youth #hwarang x reader #hwarang imagine #hwarang imagines #sam maek jong #sam maek jong imagine #sam maek jong x reader #ji dwi rang #ji dwi imagine #ji dwi x reader

439 notes · View notes